Meanwhile, modern kitchens sometimes feel like survival competitions. Between grocery prices, busy schedules, teenagers eating like professional athletes, and husbands wandering into the kitchen asking “What’s for dinner?” while standing directly next to the refrigerator, I find myself appreciating old-school kitchen wisdom more every year.

These grandma kitchen habits are simple, practical, and honestly still make life easier today.

1. Clean As You Cook

Grandmas rarely left the entire kitchen exploding until after dinner. They washed bowls while things simmered, wiped counters while water boiled, and put ingredients away as they finished using them. This kept messes manageable and made the after-dinner cleanup far less painful.

I try very hard to follow this habit because future me deserves kindness too. Even rinsing a few measuring cups while pasta cooks makes a huge difference later. Otherwise the kitchen starts looking like a baking show contestant had a nervous breakdown halfway through making tacos.

2. Keep a Pot of Soup Going

Older generations were masters at stretching ingredients into soup. Leftover vegetables, broth, potatoes, rice, beans, or bits of chicken could all become a hearty meal. Soup was practical, filling, and forgiving.

This habit still works beautifully today, especially when groceries feel wildly expensive. Soup also solves the eternal “what’s for lunch” problem without requiring another trip to the store. Plus, soup somehow makes everyone think you worked harder than you actually did.

3. Save Bacon Grease

Grandmas rarely wasted flavorful cooking fat, especially bacon grease. A small jar in the refrigerator could be used to flavor vegetables, potatoes, cornbread, or fried eggs. A little bit adds a ton of flavor.

You do not need huge amounts, but keeping some on hand can make simple food taste better. Also, any recipe that starts with bacon grease already feels emotionally supportive.

I’ve even noticed that the grocery stores are selling jars of bacon grease, so once agan grandma was right and way before it was really “a thing”

4. Always Have Pantry Staples

Grandmas kept basics stocked because they understood the value of being able to make dinner without running to the store every five minutes. Flour, rice, beans, pasta, canned tomatoes, broth, potatoes, eggs, and oats were kitchen essentials.

This habit saves money and stress because you can throw meals together quickly. Nothing feels more powerful than realizing you already have what you need while avoiding a grocery store trip that absolutely would have ended with unnecessary snacks.

5. Use Leftovers Creatively

Grandmas did not believe leftovers were only meant to sit untouched in sad plastic containers. Leftover chicken became casserole or soup, mashed potatoes became potato cakes, and stale bread became croutons or bread pudding.

This habit stretches groceries beautifully and cuts food waste dramatically. In my house, leftovers either become tomorrow’s lunch or disappear mysteriously sometime around midnight.

6. Keep the Counters Clear

Older kitchens functioned better because grandma usually kept workspaces reasonably clear. Clutter makes cooking harder, especially when you are trying to prep meals quickly. A clean counter instantly makes the kitchen feel calmer.

I am not saying my counters always look magazine-ready because absolutely not. But even spending five minutes clearing mail, snack wrappers, and random cups helps the kitchen feel less chaotic.

7. Bake Simple Things From Scratch

Grandmas often made simple homemade foods instead of buying every baked item prepackaged. Biscuits, muffins, pancakes, and cookies were made from basic ingredients already in the kitchen. It was cheaper and usually tasted better.

You do not have to become a full-time bakery operation to benefit from this habit. Even one homemade batch of muffins can save money on snacks while making the house smell incredible.

8. Dry Dishes While You Cook

Older generations often washed dishes by hand, so drying and putting things away immediately became part of the kitchen rhythm. This prevented giant towers of dishes from taking over the counters.

Even now, unloading the dishwasher or drying a few dishes while waiting on dinner helps tremendously. Otherwise the kitchen somehow multiplies dirty cups overnight like a science experiment.

9. Use What You Have First

Grandmas checked the refrigerator and pantry before shopping because wasting food simply was not acceptable. Meals were often built around ingredients already available instead of buying entirely new things every week.

This habit saves a surprising amount of money. Sometimes the best grocery trick is realizing dinner is already sitting in your freezer waiting for you to notice it.

10. Keep a Kitchen Towel Nearby

Grandmas always seemed to have a clean kitchen towel ready for drying hands, wiping counters, handling warm dishes, or quick spills. It sounds simple, but having towels handy makes kitchen work easier and faster.

I keep several around because my family somehow uses paper towels like they are being discontinued tomorrow. A good kitchen towel deserves more appreciation honestly.

11. Prep Ingredients Before Cooking

Older home cooks often chopped vegetables, measured ingredients, and prepared everything before starting the actual cooking process. This kept meals running smoothly and prevented frantic scrambling halfway through recipes.

It really does reduce stress, especially during busy evenings. Nothing raises blood pressure quite like realizing the onions still need chopping while something starts sizzling aggressively in the pan.

12. Save Glass Jars

Grandmas reused sturdy jars for leftovers, dry goods, grease, homemade dressings, and pantry storage. Before fancy storage containers existed, glass jars handled everything beautifully.

I still reuse jars constantly because they are practical and surprisingly durable. Plus there is something deeply satisfying about opening the fridge and seeing organized leftovers instead of mystery containers from another era.

13. Make Big Batches

Older generations often cooked large portions on purpose because leftovers made future meals easier. Big pots of chili, soup, spaghetti sauce, or casseroles stretched across multiple days.

This habit saves both time and money. Cooking once and eating twice feels like the closest thing homemakers get to winning the lottery.

14. Keep Fruit Visible

Grandmas often kept bowls of fruit on the counter where everybody could see them. When healthy snacks are visible and easy to grab, people are more likely to actually eat them.

This works surprisingly well with kids and adults alike. Of course, my teenagers can still somehow overlook bananas while detecting hidden chips from three rooms away.

15. Start Dinner Early

Grandmas understood that dinner goes more smoothly when you start before everybody is starving and cranky. Prepping ingredients early in the day or getting food cooking ahead of time reduces evening stress.

Even small things help, like thawing meat early or chopping vegetables beforehand. Future you will feel dramatically less overwhelmed around 5:30 p.m.

16. Keep Meals Simple

Older home cooking was often simple and practical instead of complicated. Meat, vegetables, potatoes, soup, bread, casseroles, or pasta showed up regularly because they worked. Not every dinner needed twelve ingredients and a garnish nobody eats.

This habit is honestly freeing. Some nights dinner just needs to feed people without creating a sink full of emotional damage.

17. Label Leftovers

Grandmas knew what was in the refrigerator because they paid attention to leftovers and used them quickly. Labeling containers with dates makes it easier to remember what should be eaten first.

Otherwise leftovers slowly transform into suspicious science projects nobody trusts anymore. The refrigerator should not feel like a mystery-solving game.

18. Sweep the Kitchen Every Night

Older generations often ended the evening by sweeping crumbs and tidying the kitchen floor. It kept pests away and made mornings feel calmer. Walking into a cleaner kitchen really does improve the mood.

With pets and kids, this habit matters even more. Gigi alone contributes enough fluff and crumbs to qualify as a full-time kitchen employee.

19. Freeze Extra Food Before It Goes Bad

Grandmas were excellent at preventing waste by freezing bread, meat, soup, fruit, and leftovers before they spoiled. Freezers were treated like practical tools, not mysterious icy caves where food disappears forever.

This habit saves money constantly. The key is labeling things clearly because unidentified frozen blobs rarely inspire confidence at dinnertime.

20. Keep a Few “Emergency Meals” Ready

Older homemakers often had simple backup meals available for busy or exhausting days. Pantry pasta, canned soup ingredients, eggs, grilled cheese supplies, or frozen casseroles helped prevent unnecessary takeout spending.

This habit is lifesaving during chaotic weeks. Sometimes dinner success simply means feeding everybody without crying in the grocery store parking lot.

21. Taste Food While Cooking

Grandmas rarely cooked without tasting as they went. Adjusting salt, seasoning, or texture during cooking usually leads to better meals than hoping for the best at the very end.

This habit makes such a difference, especially with soups, sauces, and casseroles. Also, tiny “taste tests” are one of the cook’s oldest and most deserved rewards.

22. Keep the Sink Empty When Possible

An empty sink instantly makes the kitchen feel cleaner and more manageable. Grandmas often stayed on top of dishes throughout the day instead of letting everything pile up into a towering disaster.

I am not saying my sink is always sparkling because life happens. But even clearing it before bed makes the next morning feel dramatically less rude.

23. Use Real Plates for Everyday Meals

Older generations generally used regular dishes instead of disposable products for everyday eating. It created less waste and often made meals feel more intentional and comforting.

There is something about sitting down with actual plates and silverware that slows people down a little. Plus disposable products add up surprisingly fast over time.

24. Keep Homemade Food Ready for Snacking

Grandmas often kept muffins, boiled eggs, cut vegetables, soup, or simple baked goods available for easy snacks. Ready-to-eat homemade foods helped prevent constant spending on convenience snacks.

Even prepping a few things ahead makes busy days easier. Otherwise people start wandering the kitchen dramatically claiming there is “nothing to eat” while surrounded by groceries.

25. Sit Down and Eat Together

One of the best grandma kitchen habits had nothing to do with recipes at all. Older generations often prioritized sitting down together for meals, even simple ones. The kitchen was not just for cooking; it was where family life happened.

Not every dinner has to look perfect or happen without interruptions. But eating together when possible slows everybody down for a little while. And honestly, in a busy house filled with schedules, phones, crumbs, pets, and endless dishes, that might still be the most useful kitchen habit of all.

And honestly? A lot of those old-school cleaning tricks still work better than the modern shortcuts. They are cheaper, simpler, and usually do not leave your house smelling like “Mountain Thunderstorm Breeze Explosion.” With two teenagers, a husband who somehow cannot see crumbs directly in front of him, and Gigi the goldendoodle leaving little tumbleweeds of fluff around the house, I appreciate any cleaning trick that actually works without draining my wallet.

1. Use Vinegar to Cut Grease

Vintage homemakers used plain white vinegar for greasy stovetops, cabinets, and kitchen messes long before expensive degreasers showed up. Vinegar naturally cuts through oily buildup and leaves surfaces feeling cleaner without a sticky residue. It is especially useful in kitchens where grease seems to float through the air and attach itself to absolutely everything.

I mix vinegar with warm water in a spray bottle for quick wipe-downs. Just avoid using it on natural stone surfaces like marble or granite because the acidity can damage them over time. Other than that, vinegar is basically the overachiever of the cleaning world.

2. Sprinkle Baking Soda on Carpets Before Vacuuming

Old-school homemakers used baking soda to freshen carpets long before scented carpet powders became popular. A light sprinkle helps absorb odors and gives the room a cleaner smell after vacuuming. It is especially helpful in homes with pets, kids, or mysterious teenage bedroom odors that science may never fully explain.

Let the baking soda sit for about 15 minutes before vacuuming thoroughly. It is simple, inexpensive, and does not leave behind overwhelming perfume smells. I want my house to smell clean, not like a candle store tackled my furniture.

3. Clean Windows With Newspaper

Before paper towels took over every cleaning aisle, people cleaned windows with crumpled newspaper and glass cleaner or vinegar water. Newspaper leaves fewer streaks and lint behind than many paper towels. It sounds strange until you try it and suddenly feel like a woman from 1954 with excellent life skills.

Modern newspapers are different than they used to be, but the trick can still work surprisingly well. Use black-and-white pages and avoid glossy inserts. Just maybe skip doing this while wearing white sleeves unless you enjoy tiny ink smudges.

4. Salt Removes Fresh Stains

Salt was an old-school emergency cleaning hero for spills on fabric, especially red wine. Sprinkling salt on a fresh spill helps absorb moisture before the stain sets deeper into the fabric. It buys you precious time before proper washing.

This works best on fresh spills, not ancient mystery stains from last soccer season. Keep salt handy during dinners and holidays because someone always knocks over something dramatic right when everybody sits down.

5. Air Out the House Daily

Vintage homemakers believed in opening windows regularly, even during cooler weather. Fresh air helps remove stale smells, cooking odors, and stuffiness that builds up indoors. Modern homes are more sealed up, which is great for energy bills but not always wonderful for freshness.

Even opening windows for ten minutes can make a noticeable difference. The house feels cleaner almost instantly. Gigi treats open windows like a live nature documentary, so this trick also doubles as free dog entertainment.

6. Use Lemon to Freshen Garbage Disposals

Lemon peels have been used for generations to help freshen smelly garbage disposals. The citrus oils help cut odors while leaving behind a cleaner scent. It is a much nicer smell than whatever mystery science experiment was living down there before.

Run cold water while grinding small lemon peels in the disposal. Some people also add ice cubes to help knock loose buildup. It is oddly satisfying and makes the kitchen smell less like forgotten leftovers.

7. Boil Water and Lemon to Freshen the Kitchen

Before plug-in air fresheners and sprays, homemakers simmered lemon slices, cloves, cinnamon sticks, or orange peels on the stove. The steam naturally freshened the air while making the house smell warm and welcoming. It is one of those tricks that feels cozy instead of artificial.

This is especially helpful after frying food, cooking fish, or burning dinner slightly while answering seventeen questions at once. Not that I would know anything about that personally.

8. Use Toothpaste to Polish Small Scratches

Plain white toothpaste was often used to buff tiny scratches from surfaces like shoes, silver, watches, and even some glass items. The mild abrasives can help smooth light marks without harsh chemicals. The key is using basic toothpaste, not glittery blue gel with “cool mint crystals.”

Always test a small area first because some finishes are delicate. But for little scuffs and dull spots, this old-school trick still surprises me every time. Toothpaste really said, “I clean teeth and apparently everything else too.”

9. Clean Cast Iron With Salt

Vintage cooks often cleaned cast iron pans using coarse salt instead of soap. Salt acts as a gentle scrubber that helps remove stuck-on food while protecting the seasoned surface. This method is still loved by cast iron fans today.

Use a paper towel or cloth to scrub with salt while the pan is slightly warm. Rinse lightly, dry thoroughly, and oil the pan afterward. Cast iron maintenance sounds intimidating until you realize it is basically treating a skillet like a needy houseplant.

10. Dry Laundry Outside When Possible

Line-dried laundry smells fresher because outdoor air naturally helps remove odors. Sunlight can also help brighten whites and reduce musty smells. Vintage homemakers relied heavily on clotheslines because dryers were not always available or practical.

Even now, towels and sheets dried outside feel different in the best way. Of course, depending on pollen season, you may also accidentally bring half the outdoors back inside. It is a gamble.

11. Use Baking Soda to Scrub Sinks

Baking soda is a gentle abrasive that works beautifully on sinks without scratching most surfaces. Old-school homemakers used it to remove residue, stains, and dull buildup from porcelain and stainless steel. It cleans effectively without needing harsh fumes.

Sprinkle baking soda directly onto a damp sink and scrub with a sponge or cloth. Rinse thoroughly afterward. The sink ends up sparkling enough to briefly make you believe you have your life under control.

12. Polish Wood Furniture With Simple Ingredients

Before shelves full of specialty sprays existed, many homemakers polished wood furniture with small amounts of oil and vinegar mixtures. The oil added shine while vinegar helped remove grime and fingerprints. It was practical and inexpensive.

Always test homemade mixtures carefully because different wood finishes react differently. But a little simple polishing can make tired furniture look surprisingly refreshed. It also gives you an excuse to dramatically dust while pretending you are in an old movie.

13. Keep Cleaning Rags Instead of Wasting Paper Towels

Vintage households reused old shirts, towels, and cloth scraps for cleaning instead of constantly buying disposable products. Cleaning rags are more absorbent, sturdier, and cheaper over time. They also create less waste.

I keep separate rags for bathrooms, dusting, and kitchen messes because I like organization when possible. Admittedly, my “organized cleaning basket” occasionally becomes a random pile of mystery cloths, but the intention is there.

14. Use Hot Water for Greasy Dishes

This sounds simple, but older homemakers understood the power of genuinely hot water. Hot water helps break down grease much faster than lukewarm water, making dishes easier to clean with less soap. Sometimes the old tricks are old because they actually make sense.

If you let greasy pans sit in hot soapy water for a few minutes, cleanup becomes dramatically easier. It is one of those habits that quietly saves time without anybody giving it enough credit.

15. Dust From Top to Bottom

Vintage homemakers cleaned rooms in a logical order. Dust higher surfaces first so falling dust gets cleaned up later when vacuuming or sweeping floors. This prevents doing the same work twice.

It sounds obvious until you vacuum first and then notice dust floating down from ceiling fans like tiny flakes of betrayal. Cleaning smarter matters when you already have enough to do.

16. Use Ice Cubes to Lift Carpet Dents

Furniture dents in carpet have annoyed people for generations. One vintage trick is placing ice cubes on the dent and letting them melt slowly. As the carpet fibers absorb moisture, they often fluff back up when brushed gently.

It does not work perfectly every single time, but it can make a noticeable difference. Plus it feels oddly magical, which is nice because carpet problems rarely bring joy.

17. Clean as You Cook

Old-school homemakers often cleaned dishes, counters, and utensils while meals were cooking. This prevented giant kitchen disasters from piling up after dinner. It also made the kitchen feel less overwhelming.

I try very hard to do this, although sometimes dinner chaos wins. Still, even rinsing a few bowls or wiping counters while pasta boils can save you from staring at the kitchen later like it personally offended you.

18. Use Vinegar to Remove Hard Water Spots

Hard water buildup around faucets and showerheads is nothing new. Vinegar helps dissolve mineral deposits naturally, making fixtures look cleaner without heavy scrubbing. Old-school homemakers used this trick long before expensive specialty sprays arrived.

Soak a cloth or paper towel with vinegar and wrap it around affected areas for a while before scrubbing gently. Watching hard water stains disappear is deeply satisfying in a way I cannot fully explain.

19. Sweep the Kitchen Every Night

Vintage homemakers often ended the day with a quick kitchen sweep. Crumbs attract pests, and waking up to a cleaner kitchen feels calmer in the morning. It is one small habit that makes the whole house feel more together.

With kids, pets, and snacks constantly appearing somehow, sweeping nightly is almost necessary. Gigi contributes approximately seventeen pounds of fluff and outdoor debris every week, so the broom and I are very close friends.

20. Wash Walls Occasionally

Older generations regularly washed walls because smoke, cooking residue, fingerprints, and dust built up over time. Modern people forget walls exist until sunlight suddenly exposes every mark in horrifying detail. Gentle cleaning can brighten rooms more than you expect.

A damp cloth with mild soap usually works for many painted walls. Test a hidden area first because paint finishes vary. Nothing humbles a person faster than aggressively cleaning a wall only to realize the paint was not washable.

21. Use Cornstarch for Greasy Spots

Cornstarch was often used to absorb grease from fabric and upholstery. Sprinkle it on the stain, let it sit, and brush or vacuum it away before laundering if possible. It helps pull oils out before they settle deeper into the material.

This works especially well for fresh greasy spots. Older homemakers understood that quick action matters with stains. Meanwhile, I sometimes spend twenty minutes pretending I did not notice the stain at all.

22. Keep Shoes Off Inside

Many vintage households treated outdoor shoes like dirt-delivery systems because that is exactly what they are. Removing shoes at the door reduces tracked-in dirt, mud, and debris, which means less sweeping and mopping overall.

This habit really does keep floors cleaner longer. Of course, teenagers can somehow still leave trails through the house despite removing shoes, but at least the odds improve slightly.

23. Shine Stainless Steel With a Tiny Bit of Oil

A small amount of oil on a soft cloth can help polish stainless steel appliances and reduce fingerprints. Vintage homemakers often used simple methods like this instead of buying multiple specialty products. Less is definitely more here.

Use only a tiny amount and buff carefully. Too much oil turns the refrigerator into a slippery fingerprint museum. Ask me how I know.

24. Use Club Soda on Some Fresh Fabric Stains

Club soda has long been used as a quick treatment for certain fresh stains on fabric. The carbonation and moisture can help loosen spills before they set deeply. It is not magic, but it can buy valuable time.

Blot gently instead of rubbing aggressively, which usually just spreads the mess around. Honestly, most stain removal is just trying not to panic while searching for clean towels.

25. Rotate Mattresses Regularly

Older homemakers often rotated mattresses to help them wear more evenly over time. This simple habit can help maintain comfort and extend mattress life. It also gives you an opportunity to vacuum underneath and rediscover items missing since 2022.

Check manufacturer recommendations because some modern mattresses should not be flipped. But regular rotating still helps many styles stay supportive longer.

26. Use Curtains to Control Dust and Heat

Heavy curtains and proper window coverings were once an important part of home management. They helped reduce dust, sunlight damage, heat, and drafts. Smart homemakers used them strategically to keep homes cleaner and more comfortable.

Closing curtains during the hottest part of the day can genuinely help rooms stay cooler. It is one of those practical tricks that sounds boring until your energy bill arrives.

27. Keep Cleaning Supplies Simple

Vintage homemakers often relied on just a few dependable cleaning basics instead of dozens of products. Vinegar, baking soda, soap, bleach, hot water, and elbow grease handled most household messes. Simpler routines were easier to maintain.

I think modern cleaning aisles can make us feel like we are failing if we do not own 47 different sprays. Meanwhile, Grandma cleaned the whole house with three products and a determined expression.

28. Clean the Fridge Before Grocery Day

Old-school homemakers often cleaned out refrigerators before shopping so they could see what they already had and make room for fresh groceries. This reduced waste and kept forgotten leftovers from turning into science fair entries.

Even a quick wipe-down before grocery shopping helps the fridge feel less chaotic. Plus it prevents balancing new groceries on top of ancient barbecue sauce bottles nobody remembers buying.

29. Use Pillowcases to Clean Ceiling Fans

This clever trick has been around for years because it works beautifully. Slide an old pillowcase over each fan blade and pull it back slowly so the dust stays trapped inside the fabric instead of floating everywhere.

It is much less messy than attacking ceiling fan dust with a dry cloth and accidentally creating indoor weather conditions. Ceiling fans collect an alarming amount of dust for something spinning above our heads daily.

30. Let Cleaning Products Sit Before Scrubbing

Vintage homemakers understood that patience helps cleaning products work better. Soap, vinegar, or cleaners often loosen grime more effectively if allowed to sit for a few minutes first. Immediate aggressive scrubbing is not always necessary.

This trick saves effort and frustration, especially in bathrooms and kitchens. Honestly, sometimes cleaning just requires giving the product a moment to handle its business while you stare tiredly into the distance.

31. Use Sunshine to Help Freshen Fabrics

Sunlight has naturally freshening qualities and can help reduce stale smells in some fabrics. Older generations often aired rugs, bedding, and pillows outdoors when weather allowed. Fresh air and sunshine did part of the work for free.

There is something deeply satisfying about bringing sun-warmed sheets back inside. It feels wholesome in a way that almost makes me forget somebody still has dishes hidden in their bedroom.

32. Tackle Small Messes Immediately

One old-school habit that still works beautifully is handling little messes before they grow into giant ones. Wiping spills quickly, rinsing dishes promptly, and folding laundry before Mount Laundrymore forms all make cleaning easier overall.

This does not mean your house has to look perfect every second. It just means tiny messes are usually less stressful than giant cleanup marathons fueled by resentment and cold coffee.

33. Stick to a Simple Cleaning Routine

Vintage homemakers often followed basic routines instead of waiting for total disaster mode. A little daily tidying, weekly deeper cleaning, and seasonal projects kept homes manageable without constant overwhelm.

The truth is, consistency beats perfection almost every time. Even simple habits like making beds, wiping counters, sweeping floors, and handling clutter regularly can make a home feel calmer. And honestly, calmer is the dream when your household includes teenagers, pets, endless snacks, and at least one person who somehow misses the laundry basket every single time.

The funny thing is, a lot of the best tricks are not new at all. They are the same old-school habits smart homemakers used for years because they made sense, stretched food, and kept the kitchen running without wasting half the grocery budget.

1. Shop Your Kitchen Before You Shop the Store

Before making a grocery list, old-school homemakers checked the pantry, refrigerator, freezer, and even that odd little shelf where cans go to be forgotten. This keeps you from buying the third bottle of mustard when what you really need is eggs and coffee. It also helps you build meals around what you already paid for.

I like to call this the “use what you own” method, which sounds fancy but mostly means standing in front of the freezer in slippers. You might find half a bag of peas, a lonely pound of ground beef, or bread that can become garlic toast. That is dinner money you do not have to spend twice.

2. Plan Meals Around What Needs Using First

Instead of planning meals from scratch every week, start with the food that is closest to going bad. Old-school homemakers were very good at this because wasting food was not treated like a casual little oops. Soft peppers became fajitas, wilting spinach went into eggs, and leftover chicken became soup.

This trick works because it turns potential waste into real meals. I try to look at my refrigerator like it is giving me clues. Sometimes the clues are helpful, and sometimes they are just a cucumber judging me from the back of the drawer.

3. Keep a Running Grocery List

A running grocery list saves money because it keeps you from guessing at the store. When you write things down as you run out, you are less likely to forget basics and less likely to grab random extras “just in case.” Those just-in-case groceries add up fast.

Old-school homemakers often kept a notepad near the kitchen, and honestly, that still works beautifully. A phone list works too, but there is something very satisfying about scribbling “flour” on paper like you are running a tiny general store. The goal is simple: do not rely on your memory when your household is eating like a football team.

4. Never Shop Hungry

This one has been around forever because it is painfully true. Shopping hungry makes everything look necessary, including bakery cookies, fancy cheese, and chips you suddenly believe are part of a balanced lifestyle. Your grocery cart starts making emotional decisions.

Eat something small before you go, even if it is just toast, a banana, or a handful of crackers. A fed shopper is a calmer shopper. A hungry shopper is one sale sign away from buying three kinds of cereal nobody asked for.

5. Check the Unit Price

Old-school grocery shoppers knew that the bigger package was not always the better deal. Unit pricing helps you compare the actual cost per ounce, pound, or item, which is much more useful than staring at two boxes and hoping math feelings kick in. Sometimes the smaller package on sale beats the bulk size.

This is especially helpful for cereal, pasta, rice, paper goods, and cleaning supplies. I know it is not glamorous, but neither is realizing you paid more because the box looked cheerful. The unit price is the little truth-teller on the shelf.

6. Buy Store Brands When They Make Sense

Smart homemakers have always known when brand names matter and when they absolutely do not. Store-brand basics like flour, sugar, oats, canned tomatoes, frozen vegetables, and many pantry staples often work just fine. Switching even a few items can shave money off every grocery trip.

There are a few things my family is picky about, and I have accepted that with the maturity of a woman who chooses her battles. But for plenty of everyday ingredients, nobody notices the difference once it is in a casserole, soup, or lunchbox. If they do notice, they are welcome to cook next time, which usually ends the discussion.

7. Stretch Meat Instead of Making It the Whole Meal

Older generations were experts at making meat go further. Instead of serving giant portions, they stretched it with beans, rice, pasta, potatoes, vegetables, or broth. A pound of ground beef can become tacos, chili, soup, stuffed peppers, or pasta sauce when it has a little backup.

This is one of the best tricks for feeding a family without feeling like the grocery bill is personally attacking you. Teenagers can eat meat like they are preparing for winter hibernation, so stretching it is not optional in my house. It is survival with seasoning.

8. Use Leftovers on Purpose

Old-school homemakers did not treat leftovers like sad little containers of defeat. They planned for them. Roast chicken became sandwiches, soup, or pot pie, and leftover rice became fried rice or a quick side dish.

The trick is to store leftovers in a way that makes them easy to use. Label them, keep them visible, and think about tomorrow’s lunch before they vanish into the refrigerator fog. In my house, leftovers either become lunch or disappear mysteriously at midnight, usually near a teenage bedroom.

9. Cook Once, Eat Twice

This is different from just hoping leftovers happen. Cooking once and eating twice means intentionally making extra rice, beans, chicken, roasted vegetables, or soup so another meal is halfway done. It saves time, dishes, and money.

Old-school homemakers did this naturally because they understood kitchen efficiency. If the oven is already on, roast extra potatoes. If you are browning ground beef, cook more and freeze half. Future you will feel like someone left her a present, and for once it was not dirty socks on the stairs.

10. Keep a Price Memory

Smart grocery shoppers remember what things usually cost. You do not need a complicated spreadsheet unless that brings you joy, in which case please enjoy your beautifully organized life. Even a rough memory of common prices helps you recognize a real sale from a pretend one.

Pay attention to your regular staples like eggs, butter, coffee, chicken, pasta, and produce. When a good price shows up, you can stock up within reason. The key phrase is “within reason,” because nobody needs 19 jars of pickles unless there is a very specific picnic emergency.

11. Stock Up Slowly

Old-school pantries were built little by little, not with one giant panic shopping trip. When a staple is on sale, buy one or two extra if your budget allows. Over time, this creates a cushion that helps during busy weeks, tight months, or those nights when dinner needs to appear fast.

This works best with foods your family actually eats. Pasta, rice, canned beans, broth, tuna, oats, flour, and frozen vegetables are all useful if they fit your normal meals. A pantry full of random bargain items is not savings; it is a scavenger hunt with expiration dates.

12. Shop the Sales, But Do Not Let Sales Boss You Around

Sales are helpful only if they match your real life. Old-school homemakers used sale flyers to plan meals, but they did not buy things just because a sign was shouting at them. A discount on something nobody eats is still wasted money.

Use sales as inspiration, not instructions. If chicken thighs are marked down, plan a few meals around them. If fancy crackers are on sale but your budget needs milk and laundry detergent, wave politely and keep walking like the strong grocery warrior you are.

13. Learn the Markdowns

Many stores mark down meat, bakery items, dairy, and produce at certain times. Old-school shoppers often knew when to check for these deals because they paid attention. Markdowns can be a great way to save, especially if you can use the item quickly or freeze it.

Meat markdowns are especially useful if you have freezer space. Bread can be frozen, ripe bananas can become muffins, and discounted vegetables can go straight into soup. It is not glamorous, but neither is paying full price for something you could have bought for less yesterday.

14. Freeze Food Before It Turns

The freezer is one of the best grocery-saving tools in the house. Old-school homemakers froze bread, berries, meat, broth, butter, cookie dough, casseroles, and cooked beans. Freezing food before it spoils protects the money you already spent.

The trick is to freeze things while they are still good, not when they are already questionable and you are negotiating with yourself. Slice bread first, portion meat, and label containers clearly. A mystery frozen lump is not a meal plan; it is kitchen roulette.

15. Save Vegetable Scraps for Broth

Clean carrot peels, celery ends, onion pieces, parsley stems, and other mild vegetable scraps can be saved in a freezer bag for homemade broth. This old-school habit turns scraps into flavor instead of trash. Once the bag is full, simmer it with water and seasonings for a simple stock.

It is a small thing, but it makes soups, rice, sauces, and casseroles taste better without buying boxed broth every time. Just avoid bitter or strong scraps like too much cabbage or anything spoiled. Gigi would happily inspect all scraps for me, but her standards are suspiciously low.

16. Buy Whole Ingredients Instead of Too Many Convenience Foods

Convenience foods have their place, especially during busy seasons, but old-school grocery habits leaned heavily on basic ingredients. Potatoes, rice, beans, oats, flour, eggs, vegetables, and simple cuts of meat can become a lot of meals. They usually cost less per serving than pre-made options.

This does not mean every meal has to be from scratch with soft music playing in the background. Some nights are absolutely a frozen-pizza-and-salad situation. But keeping whole ingredients around gives you more flexibility and keeps the grocery budget from being eaten by individually wrapped everything.

17. Make a Few Meatless Meals

Old-school homemakers often served simple meatless meals without making a big announcement about it. Beans and cornbread, baked potatoes, vegetable soup, macaroni and tomatoes, eggs and toast, or grilled cheese with soup can all be filling. Meatless meals are one of the easiest ways to lower the weekly grocery bill.

The trick is making them satisfying, not skimpy. Add enough protein, fat, and flavor so nobody feels like dinner was a punishment. My teenagers can detect “too light” from across the room, like highly trained snack detectives.

18. Keep a Pantry Meal List

A pantry meal list is a simple list of dinners you can make from shelf-stable or freezer staples. Old-school homemakers always had a few meals they could pull together without running to the store. This saves money because every extra store trip invites impulse buys.

Good pantry meals might include pasta with canned tomatoes, tuna melts, bean soup, fried rice, pancakes, chili, or baked potatoes with toppings. Keep the list somewhere visible for tired nights. Decision fatigue is real, and it usually arrives right when everyone starts asking what is for dinner.

19. Use Cash or a Firm Budget

Before cards and apps made spending feel invisible, many homemakers shopped with a set amount of cash. That method still works because it creates a clear boundary. When the money is gone, the cart has to behave.

You do not have to use physical cash if that is not your style, but setting a firm grocery number helps. Keep a running total as you shop or round prices up in your head. It is not as fun as pretending groceries are free, but apparently stores frown on that.

20. Avoid Too Many Last-Minute Store Runs

One of the sneakiest grocery budget leaks is the quick trip for one thing. You go in for milk and leave with chips, candles, grapes, shampoo, and a seasonal mug you did not need but emotionally understood. Old-school homemakers avoided extra trips by planning ahead and making do.

Try to keep basic backups on hand so you are not constantly running out. Powdered milk, shelf-stable broth, frozen vegetables, and extra bread in the freezer can save a trip. Every avoided store run is a tiny victory for your budget and your sanity.

21. Use Every Bit of the Chicken

A whole chicken or bone-in chicken pieces can stretch into several meals if you use them well. The meat can become dinner, sandwiches, soup, casseroles, or salad, and the bones can make broth. This is one of those old-school tricks that still feels incredibly practical.

Even if you buy a rotisserie chicken, the same idea applies. Pull off the meat, save the bones for stock, and use every usable bit before tossing anything. It is frugal, efficient, and makes you feel like you have your life together for at least seven minutes.

22. Store Food Properly As Soon As You Get Home

Old-school homemakers knew groceries were not truly “put away” until they were stored in a way that helped them last. Wash and dry certain produce when appropriate, move dry goods into sealed containers, freeze what needs freezing, and keep older items toward the front. Good storage prevents waste.

This little bit of effort after shopping can save a surprising amount of money. Lettuce lasts longer when handled well, flour stays fresher sealed, and meat is easier to use when portioned before freezing. I do not always feel like doing it, but I also do not feel like throwing away slimy greens while whispering apologies.

23. Keep a Soup Night

Soup night is an old-school grocery miracle. It uses leftovers, stretches small amounts of meat, welcomes tired vegetables, and can feed a family without drama. Add bread, crackers, rice, or potatoes and suddenly it feels like a real meal.

Soup is also forgiving, which is exactly what I need on a weeknight. A little chicken, broth, carrots, noodles, and seasoning can become dinner with very little fuss. It is the kitchen version of making something out of almost nothing, which is basically homemaker wizardry.

24. Bake Simple Treats Instead of Buying Them All

Old-school grocery habits often included homemade cookies, muffins, quick breads, or simple cakes. Baking at home can cost less than buying packaged treats, especially if you keep basic ingredients on hand. It also makes the house smell like you are winning at life.

You do not need to bake every day or turn into a bakery with a mortgage. Even one batch of muffins or cookies can cover snacks for a few days. Of course, with teenagers, “a few days” may mean one afternoon and a suspicious trail of crumbs.

25. Repurpose Stale Bread

Stale bread does not have to go straight to the trash. Old-school homemakers turned it into breadcrumbs, croutons, bread pudding, French toast, stuffing, or casserole topping. This is such a simple way to stretch something that looks useless.

Keep a freezer bag for bread heels and odds and ends. When you have enough, pulse them into crumbs or cube them for croutons. Bread is dramatic and goes stale the moment you look away, so it helps to have a plan.

26. Know Which Foods Are Worth Buying in Bulk

Bulk buying can save money, but only when you buy things your household uses regularly. Rice, oats, flour, sugar, pasta, beans, toilet paper, and certain frozen foods may be worth buying larger if you have space and can use them before they lose quality. Old-school homemakers understood storage limits because nobody wanted a pantry full of regret.

Do not buy bulk just because the package looks like a deal. If your family does not eat lentils, a giant bag of lentils is not savings; it is a long-term relationship you did not agree to. Bulk works best when it supports meals you already make.

27. Make Do Before You Buy More

This might be the most old-school trick of all. Before running to the store, smart homemakers asked, “What can I use instead?” Sour cream might be replaced with plain yogurt, breadcrumbs with crushed crackers, buttermilk with milk and a little acid, and fresh herbs with dried ones.

Making do does not mean being cheap in a miserable way. It means being resourceful, calm, and unwilling to spend money every time a recipe gets bossy. Some of the best family meals come from substitutions, leftovers, and a homemaker who refuses to put on real shoes for one missing ingredient.

These grocery tricks are old-school because they worked then, and they still work now. They are not flashy, but they keep food from going to waste, stretch the budget, and make the kitchen feel a little more manageable. And honestly, with grocery prices acting the way they do, I will take every sensible trick I can get.

And I know, “getting older” gets a bad reputation. Wrinkles, gray hair, joints that make noise when you stand up—it sounds like a whole situation. But what people don’t talk about enough is how much lighter life can feel. Less pressure, fewer expectations, and a whole lot more “I’m just going to do what works for me.”

So here it is—31 reasons getting older feels way better than anyone warned us about. And honestly, I wish someone had told me sooner so I could’ve relaxed a little earlier.

1. You Stop Caring What Everyone Thinks

This alone is worth the price of admission. I used to replay conversations in my head like I was reviewing game footage. Now? If it wasn’t wildly embarrassing, I’ve already moved on. People are too busy thinking about themselves anyway.

2. You Finally Know Yourself

It takes years to figure out what you actually like, not what you think you’re supposed to like. Turns out, I don’t need to pretend I enjoy complicated recipes or loud restaurants. Growth is realizing your preferences are valid.

3. Saying No Becomes Easy

No long explanations, no guilt. Just a simple “I can’t” or even “I don’t want to.” It’s incredibly freeing, and honestly, I highly recommend trying it at least once a week.

4. You Value Your Time More

You realize time isn’t unlimited, so you stop wasting it on things that drain you. That includes people, obligations, and yes—sometimes even folding fitted sheets properly.

5. You Care Less About Trends

If it’s uncomfortable, overpriced, or requires too much effort, I’m out. I’ve reached a point where classic and comfortable win every time. And no one can convince me otherwise.

6. Your Confidence Grows Naturally

It’s not loud or showy—it’s steady. You’ve been through enough to trust yourself, and that kind of confidence doesn’t need validation.

7. You Appreciate the Little Things

A quiet house, a clean kitchen, a good cup of coffee—these things start to feel like luxury. And honestly, they kind of are.

8. You Let Go of Perfection

Perfect is exhausting. Real life is messy, and that’s okay. Once you accept that, everything feels easier.

9. Your Circle Gets Smaller (and Better)

You stop tolerating drama and start focusing on people who actually show up for you. Fewer relationships, but stronger ones.

10. You Stop Comparing Yourself

Comparison loses its grip because you realize everyone is on their own path. Also, social media is not real life, no matter how convincing it looks.

11. You Embrace Comfort

If it’s not comfortable, I’m not interested. This applies to clothes, shoes, furniture—everything. Life is too short for uncomfortable jeans.

12. You Trust Your Instincts

That little voice in your head? It’s usually right. And after years of second-guessing, you finally start listening to it.

13. You Don’t Need Approval

You stop looking for validation from others. You know what works for you, and that’s enough.

14. You Laugh More

Things that used to stress you out now just make you laugh. Sometimes because they’re actually funny, and sometimes because what else are you going to do?

15. You’re More Financially Aware

You start making smarter choices with money. Not perfect, but intentional. And that feels good.

16. You Let Things Go Faster

Holding grudges takes energy, and frankly, I don’t have that kind of time anymore. It’s much easier to move on.

17. You Enjoy Your Own Company

This one is huge. You don’t need constant plans or noise. A quiet night at home actually sounds amazing.

18. You Focus on What Matters

The small stuff doesn’t feel as urgent anymore. You start prioritizing what truly matters—family, health, peace of mind.

19. You Accept Your Body

It may not look the same as it did 20 years ago, but it’s carried you through a lot. That deserves some appreciation.

20. You Stop Over-Explaining

You don’t feel the need to justify every decision. “Because I said so” suddenly applies to yourself.

21. You Sleep Better (When You Actually Get Sleep)

Okay, this one is hit or miss—but when you do sleep, you appreciate it on a whole new level.

22. You Care Less About “Stuff”

Material things lose their appeal. Experiences and memories start to matter more.

23. You’re More Selective with Energy

You choose where your energy goes, and you protect it. No more giving it away freely.

24. You Stop Trying to Fix Everything

Not every problem is yours to solve. And that realization is incredibly freeing.

25. You Appreciate Real Conversations

Small talk loses its charm. You start valuing deeper, more meaningful connections.

26. You Let Yourself Rest

Rest is no longer something you have to earn. It’s something you need—and deserve.

27. You Accept Change More Easily

Life changes constantly, and you learn to adapt instead of resist. It’s not always easy, but it’s easier than fighting it.

28. You Find Joy in Simplicity

Simple moments start to feel more meaningful. Less chaos, more calm.

29. You Speak Your Mind

Respectfully, of course—but honestly. You don’t hold back as much, and it feels good.

30. You Realize You’re Stronger Than You Thought

Looking back, you see everything you’ve handled. And it reminds you that you can handle whatever comes next.

31. You Finally Feel… Free

Free from expectations, pressure, and the need to prove anything. You’ve earned this stage of life, and honestly, it’s pretty great.

So yes, getting older comes with its quirks. But it also comes with a kind of freedom that no one really talks about—and once you experience it, you wouldn’t trade it for anything. Not even wrinkle-free skin.

So I put together the list I wish someone had handed me years ago—preferably laminated, next to a glass of wine and a warning about low-rise jeans. These are the things women over 55 constantly say, “If I had only known…” And honestly, same.

1. Your Time Is Actually Valuable

For years, I treated my time like it was on clearance—free for anyone who needed something. School volunteering, running errands for everyone else, saying yes to things I absolutely did not want to do. Now? I guard my time like it’s the last piece of chocolate in the house. Because it kind of is. You don’t get it back, and suddenly you realize how much of it you gave away without even thinking.

2. Saying “No” Is Not Rude

This one took me way too long. I used to say yes and then sit there resentfully folding laundry thinking about all the ways I should’ve said no. Turns out, a simple “I can’t” is perfectly acceptable. No long explanation. No guilt spiral. Just… no. It’s honestly freeing and a little addictive.

3. Friendships Change—and That’s Okay

Some friendships last forever, and some fade quietly like that one houseplant you swore you’d keep alive. And that’s normal. People grow, life shifts, priorities change. It doesn’t mean anyone failed—it just means the season ended. And sometimes, new friendships show up right when you need them.

4. You Don’t Need Everyone to Like You

This would’ve saved me so much stress in my 20s and 30s. Not everyone is going to like you—and honestly, you don’t even like everyone. Once you accept that, life gets lighter. You stop performing and start just being. It’s very “take it or leave it,” and I mean that in the healthiest way possible.

5. Your Body Is Not the Enemy

I spent years picking apart my reflection like I was auditioning for something. Now I look back and think… what was I doing? Your body carries you through everything—raising kids, late nights, stress, joy. It deserves appreciation, not constant criticism. Also, comfortable pants are a gift, and I will not be convinced otherwise.

6. Sunscreen Is Non-Negotiable

If I could go back, I’d bathe in sunscreen. Not in a weird way—but you get it. Skin care isn’t about perfection; it’s about protection. And yes, those little spots you ignored in your 30s suddenly become very noticeable later. Lesson learned.

7. Money Matters More Than You Think

I’m frugal by nature, but I wish I had been more intentional earlier. Saving, investing, understanding finances—it’s not boring, it’s empowering. And nothing feels better than knowing you’ve got a cushion when life inevitably throws something unexpected your way.

8. Comparison Is a Waste of Time

There will always be someone with a bigger house, cleaner kitchen, or seemingly perfect life on social media. But comparison steals your joy faster than my dog Gigi steals food off the counter. Focus on your life. That’s the one that matters.

9. Your Kids Don’t Need Perfection

I worried so much about getting everything right. The meals, the schedules, the memories. Meanwhile, my kids remember random things like movie nights and inside jokes. They didn’t need perfection—they just needed me to show up. Preferably with snacks.

10. Marriage Takes Effort (and Humor)

Let me just say this: if you can laugh together, you’re doing something right. My husband still doesn’t know where half the kitchen things go, and at this point, I’m convinced he never will. But you learn to pick your battles—and sometimes just label the drawer.

11. Rest Is Not Lazy

For the longest time, I felt guilty sitting down. Like if I wasn’t doing something productive, I was failing. Now I know rest is necessary. You recharge, reset, and honestly, you become a much nicer person to be around.

12. Trends Come and Go

Trust me, you don’t need every trend. Half of them will look questionable in five years anyway. Stick with what makes you feel good. Classic always wins, and so does not freezing because a jacket “ruins the outfit.”

13. Your Health Is Everything

You don’t realize how important your health is until something feels off. Taking care of yourself isn’t selfish—it’s essential. Doctor visits, moving your body, eating well—it all adds up. And yes, water actually does help, even if it’s boring.

14. You Can Always Start Over

New career, new hobby, new mindset—it’s never too late. I think we put deadlines on ourselves that don’t actually exist. Life doesn’t end at 40 or 50. If anything, it gets more interesting because you finally know yourself.

15. Not Everything Needs a Reaction

This one is powerful. Sometimes the best response is no response. You don’t have to engage in every disagreement or defend every opinion. Peace is underrated.

16. A Clean Kitchen Really Does Matter

I hate admitting this, but it’s true. Waking up to a clean kitchen just sets the tone for the day. It’s like a small win before coffee. And honestly, I’ll take any win I can get.

17. You’ll Care Less About “Stuff”

At some point, you realize things are just things. The clutter, the impulse buys—it all loses its appeal. Experiences and memories start to matter more, which is both refreshing and slightly inconvenient when you’re trying to justify a new throw pillow.

18. Confidence Comes Later

I wish I had known confidence isn’t something you magically have in your 20s. It builds over time. Every mistake, every lesson—it all adds up. And one day you wake up and think, “Oh… I actually like who I am.”

19. You Don’t Have to Explain Yourself

This ties right into boundaries. You can make decisions without justifying them to everyone. It’s your life. That realization is both empowering and a little shocking at first.

20. Little Joys Matter Most

A quiet morning, a good cup of coffee, a walk outside—these things become everything. Life isn’t just big milestones; it’s the everyday moments that really stick with you.

21. Your Circle Gets Smaller—and Better

You stop tolerating drama and start valuing genuine connections. Fewer people, but better relationships. It’s quality over quantity, and it makes a huge difference.

22. You’ll Wish You Took More Photos

Not the perfect, posed ones—but the real moments. The messy kitchen, the laughing kids, the everyday life. Those are the memories you’ll want later.

23. It’s Okay to Outgrow Things

Jobs, habits, even mindsets—you’re allowed to move on. Growth means change, and sometimes that’s uncomfortable. But it’s also necessary.

24. You Know More Than You Think

Experience teaches you things you can’t learn any other way. Trust your instincts. You’ve been through enough to know what works and what doesn’t.

25. Laughter Is Essential

Life is too unpredictable not to laugh. Sometimes things go wrong, and honestly, all you can do is laugh and move on. It keeps you sane.

26. Your Opinion Matters

For years, I second-guessed myself. Now? I speak up. Your voice matters, and it deserves to be heard.

27. Happiness Looks Different for Everyone

There’s no one-size-fits-all version of happiness. What works for someone else might not work for you—and that’s perfectly fine.

28. You’re Stronger Than You Realize

Life throws challenges your way, and somehow you get through them. You adapt, you grow, and you keep going. That strength builds quietly over time.

29. It All Goes Faster Than You Think

This one hits the hardest. The years go by quickly. The kids grow up. Life changes. So enjoy it while you’re in it—even the messy, chaotic parts. Because one day, you’ll look back and realize those were the good old days.

And if nothing else, just know this: you’re doing better than you think. Even if your kitchen isn’t clean, your to-do list isn’t finished, and your husband still can’t find the spatula.

And I’ve been paying attention. Because while I’m over here juggling teenagers, trying to remember if I switched the laundry (I didn’t), and negotiating with my husband about loading the dishwasher correctly (it’s not that hard), they are living in this calm, confident, slightly smug-in-a-good-way stage of life that honestly looks… amazing.

So this list? It’s what they’ve told me, what I’ve seen, and what I’ve slowly started believing. And if this is what’s waiting on the other side of 50, I’m not exactly mad about it.

1. You Care Way Less About What People Think

This is the one they both said immediately, without hesitation, like they’d been waiting years to say it out loud. Somewhere along the way, you just stop caring about every little opinion floating around you. No more replaying conversations at 2 a.m. wondering if you said something weird.

And from what I’ve seen, it’s not that they don’t care at all—it’s just that they care about the right things now. Their energy isn’t wasted on random people’s thoughts. It’s focused on what actually matters, and honestly, that kind of freedom looks incredible.

2. Your Circle Gets Smaller (and Way Better)

They both laughed when we talked about this one. The big social circles? Gone. The pressure to keep up with everyone? Also gone. What’s left are the friendships that are real, easy, and actually enjoyable.

And I see it. Their friendships aren’t about obligation—they’re about connection. No drama, no weird competition, just genuine “I like you and I’m glad you’re here” energy. Honestly, I’m already editing my own circle and it feels… right.

3. You Stop Apologizing for Existing

You know how we say “sorry” for everything? Sorry for asking a question, sorry for taking up space, sorry for literally breathing sometimes. Apparently, that fades.

They’ve both told me they just… stopped. Not in a rude way, but in a confident, grounded way. And I’ve watched it happen—it’s subtle but powerful. Less shrinking, more standing tall. I’m taking notes.

4. You Actually Know What You Like

No more pretending to like things because everyone else does. If you don’t like it, you don’t like it. End of story.

One of my friends told me she stopped ordering things at restaurants just because they sounded “fancy.” She orders what she actually wants now. And honestly? That feels like growth I aspire to.

5. Quiet Becomes a Luxury

Not awkward. Not boring. Luxury. The kind of quiet where you can actually hear yourself think.

As someone with two kids, a dog, and a husband who thinks volume equals effectiveness, this one sounds like a dream. They’ve both said they crave quiet now—and protect it like it’s gold.

6. You Spend Money Differently

This one spoke to my frugal-but-still-wants-nice-things heart. They’re not spending less necessarily—they’re spending smarter.

Quality over quantity. Experiences over stuff. And fewer impulse buys that end up in a drawer somewhere judging you later.

7. Time Feels More Valuable

This one hit a little deeper. They both said time starts to feel… different. More important. More finite.

So they choose how they spend it more carefully. Less time on things that drain them, more on things that fill them up. And honestly, that perspective shift alone seems life-changing.

8. Boundaries Get Stronger

“No” becomes a full sentence. No explanation, no overthinking, no guilt spiral afterward.

I’m still in the “over-explaining no” phase, but watching them just calmly set boundaries is inspiring. It’s not harsh—it’s peaceful.

9. You Let Go of Grudges Faster

Holding onto anger just doesn’t feel worth it anymore. Peace wins.

They’ve both said they still feel things—but they don’t hold onto them the same way. And that emotional lightness? You can see it.

10. Simple Things Actually Feel Special

A good cup of coffee. A quiet morning. A clean kitchen (okay, that one feels special at any age).

They notice these moments more, and they appreciate them more. It’s not about big, flashy things—it’s about everyday joy.

11. You’re More Comfortable in Your Own Skin

This one is huge. Less pressure to look a certain way, more acceptance of who you are.

And honestly, the confidence they carry? It’s not loud, it’s not showy—it’s just solid. And it’s beautiful.

12. Comparison Starts to Fade

No more measuring your life against someone else’s highlight reel.

They’ve both said they just don’t care anymore. They’re focused on their own lives, their own happiness, and it shows.

13. Health Becomes a Priority (In a Real Way)

Not crash diets or extreme routines—just taking care of yourself because you want to feel good.

And let me tell you, the supplement conversations alone could be their own podcast.

14. Mornings Feel Calmer

Less rushing, more intention. Coffee actually gets enjoyed instead of reheated three times (hi, it’s me).

They’ve both said mornings become something you look forward to, which feels like a personality shift I’m open to.

15. Trends Stop Mattering

They are not chasing trends. They are not impressed by trends. They are living their lives.

And honestly, that sounds like freedom.

16. You Listen More, React Less

With experience comes perspective. They don’t jump to conclusions or react emotionally as quickly.

It makes conversations feel calmer, deeper, and more meaningful.

17. You Know When to Rest

Rest isn’t earned—it’s necessary. And they treat it that way.

I’m still convincing myself I deserve to sit down, so this one feels revolutionary.

18. You Laugh More (and Louder)

Their laughter is different. It’s fuller, easier, less held back.

And honestly, it’s contagious in the best way.

19. You Stop Trying to Fix Everyone

This one… I need to learn. You realize other people’s problems aren’t yours to solve.

And that realization alone seems to free up a lot of mental space.

20. You Trust Yourself

Decisions feel clearer. There’s less second-guessing.

They’ve both said, “I just know now,” and I love that for them.

21. Home Becomes Your Favorite Place

Going out is fun… but staying in? Even better.

Honestly, I’ve been practicing for this stage my entire life.

22. Perfection Isn’t the Goal Anymore

Peace is the goal. And that shift changes everything.

Less pressure, more breathing room.

23. You Appreciate How Far You’ve Come

Instead of focusing on what’s missing, you see what you’ve built.

There’s pride there—and it’s earned.

24. You’re Less Reactive

Things that used to ruin your day? Minor inconveniences now.

And honestly, that emotional stability sounds amazing.

25. Experiences Matter More Than Stuff

Trips, time with loved ones, meaningful moments—they win every time.

And less clutter? Yes, please.

26. People Come to You for Advice

They’ve lived it, so people listen to them.

And I’ve definitely been one of those people more than once.

27. You Accept What You Can’t Control

This one is big. Letting go of control brings a surprising amount of peace.

Still working on it… but I get it.

28. Your Home Feels More Intentional

Less clutter, more comfort. Everything has a purpose.

And it shows—it feels calm the second you walk in.

29. Conversations Get Deeper

Less small talk, more real talk.

And those are the conversations that actually stick with you.

30. Patience Comes Easier

Not perfect patience—but better patience.

And honestly, I’ll take any improvement I can get.

31. Gratitude Becomes Second Nature

They notice things more. Appreciate things more.

It shifts how they experience everyday life.

32. The Small Stuff Stays Small

They don’t let little things take over their day.

Which sounds like a superpower, honestly.

33. You Build a Life That Fits You

Less following expectations, more following what actually works.

And that authenticity shows in everything they do.

34. Rest Feels Deserved (Because It Is)

No guilt, no overthinking. Just rest.

Imagine that kind of peace.

35. Relationships Feel More Meaningful

The people who matter… really matter.

And the effort goes where it should.

36. Contentment Replaces Constant Wanting

Not everything has to be bigger, better, or new.

Contentment becomes enough—and that’s powerful.

37. You Finally Feel Like Yourself Again

After everything—raising kids, building a life, navigating all the chaos—you come back to yourself.

And both of my friends said the same thing in different ways: “This is the best version of me.”

And honestly? If that’s what’s waiting ahead—more peace, more confidence, more clarity—I’m not rushing it… but I’m definitely looking forward to it. Because if life really does feel richer after 50, then maybe we’ve all got something pretty good coming.

So here are 29 tried-and-true kitchen hints that deserve a permanent spot in your routine. Some will save you money, some will save your sanity, and a few might just make you feel like you’ve got your life together—even if your dog Gigi is currently licking crumbs off the floor behind you.

1. Keep a Jar of Bacon Grease

Yes, I said it. That little jar of bacon grease in the fridge? Gold. Absolute gold. Use it to sauté vegetables, fry eggs, or even add a smoky kick to potatoes. It’s basically free flavor, and considering how expensive groceries are these days, I’m not letting that go to waste.

My grandma did this, my mom did this, and now I do this—even if my teenagers think it’s mildly horrifying. They also eat everything I cook with it, so jokes on them.

2. Add a Pinch of Salt to Sweet Dishes

This one feels fancy, but it’s actually old-school wisdom. A tiny pinch of salt enhances sweetness in baked goods and desserts. It balances flavors and makes everything taste more “complete.”

I started doing this years ago and now I can’t not do it. Even chocolate chip cookies taste like they came from a bakery instead of my chaotic kitchen.

3. Soak Pots and Pans Right Away

Instead of letting food harden into something that requires a chisel, just fill the pan with warm water immediately. It loosens everything up and saves you from scrubbing like you’re training for a fitness competition.

Do I always remember to do this? No. Do I regret it every single time I don’t? Absolutely.

4. Use Vinegar for Cleaning

Before there were 47 different cleaning sprays, there was vinegar. It cuts grease, removes odors, and makes your kitchen sparkle without the chemical smell.

I keep a spray bottle under the sink at all times. It’s cheap, effective, and makes me feel like I’ve got my life together—even when I definitely don’t.

5. Store Herbs in Water Like Flowers

Fresh herbs last way longer when you treat them like a bouquet. Trim the stems, stick them in a glass of water, and loosely cover with a bag.

This trick has saved me from throwing away sad, wilted cilantro more times than I’d like to admit.

6. Always Preheat Your Oven

This sounds basic, but it matters. Baking (and even roasting) depends on consistent heat. Skipping this step can mess up texture and cooking time.

I used to rush this step. Then I realized my cookies were basically playing a game of “will they or won’t they.” Lesson learned.

7. Use Ice Water for Crisp Veggies

If your lettuce or carrots are looking a little tired, soak them in ice water. It brings them back to life like a tiny spa day.

I swear it’s kitchen magic. Suddenly your salad looks like you just bought everything five minutes ago.

8. Peel Garlic by Crushing It

Give garlic cloves a quick smash with the side of a knife and the peel slips right off. No fiddling, no frustration.

This one makes me feel like a professional chef, even though I’m still wearing pajama pants half the time.

9. Keep a Running Grocery List

Old-fashioned, yes. Necessary, also yes. Keep a list on the fridge and add things as you run out.

This prevents the classic “I thought YOU bought milk” situation, which in my house ends with someone eating dry cereal and blaming me.

10. Save Vegetable Scraps for Broth

Onion ends, carrot peels, celery tops—throw them in a freezer bag and use them later to make broth.

It’s basically free soup starter, and it makes you feel wildly resourceful.

11. Use Lemon to Brighten Flavors

A squeeze of lemon can wake up almost any dish. Soups, veggies, chicken—you name it.

I didn’t appreciate this trick until I got older, and now I use it constantly like I’m on a cooking show no one asked for.

12. Dry Meat Before Cooking

Patting meat dry helps it brown better. Moisture is the enemy of that golden, crispy exterior.

This one small step makes a big difference—and makes you look like you know what you’re doing.

13. Keep Butter Soft in a Dish

A covered butter dish on the counter keeps butter spreadable and ready to go.

No more tearing bread to pieces because your butter is basically a brick.

14. Use Wooden Spoons to Prevent Boil-Overs

Place a wooden spoon across a pot and it can help stop boiling water from spilling over.

It’s simple, weirdly effective, and feels like something a wise aunt would tell you.

15. Clean as You Go

This is the habit I fight the most—and the one that helps the most. Washing dishes while cooking keeps things manageable.

Future you will be so grateful. Present you will complain the entire time.

16. Taste as You Cook

Seasoning isn’t a one-and-done situation. Taste along the way and adjust.

This is how you avoid serving something that tastes like pure regret.

17. Use Baking Soda for Odors

Baking soda absorbs smells in the fridge, trash can, and even on cutting boards.

It’s cheap, easy, and way better than pretending you don’t smell something weird.

18. Let Meat Rest Before Cutting

After cooking, let meat sit for a few minutes. It keeps juices inside instead of all over your cutting board.

I used to skip this step. Now I know better—and my steaks are much happier for it.

19. Freeze Leftover Bread

Don’t let bread go stale. Freeze it and toast slices as needed.

This saves money and prevents that guilt trip every time you throw away half a loaf.

20. Use Salt to Clean Cast Iron

Skip soap and scrub cast iron with salt and a little oil.

It keeps the pan seasoned and working like a dream—just like it’s supposed to.

21. Keep Knives Sharp

A sharp knife is safer and more effective than a dull one.

Also, it makes chopping feel oddly satisfying instead of mildly dangerous.

22. Store Onions in a Cool, Dry Place

Onions last longer when kept away from moisture and sunlight.

Not in a plastic bag shoved in a random corner… speaking from experience.

23. Use Leftovers Creatively

Turn leftovers into new meals—soups, casseroles, sandwiches.

This is how you stretch your grocery budget without feeling like you’re eating the same thing forever.

24. Add Pasta Water to Sauce

The starchy water helps sauce cling to pasta better.

It’s a small step that makes a big difference—and feels a little fancy.

25. Keep a Well-Stocked Pantry

Basic staples mean you can throw together a meal anytime.

This has saved dinner at my house more times than I can count.

26. Use a Damp Cloth Under Cutting Boards

Prevents slipping while chopping.

Simple, effective, and makes you look like you’ve got your act together.

27. Don’t Overcrowd the Pan

Give food space to cook properly. Overcrowding leads to steaming instead of browning.

I still struggle with this because I’m impatient—but it matters.

28. Label and Date Food

Know what you have and when you made it.

This prevents the mysterious “what is this?” container situation.

29. Cook with Love (Yes, Really)

It sounds cheesy, but it’s true. Taking your time and caring about what you’re making shows in the final dish.

Even if your kitchen is loud, messy, and slightly chaotic (hi, it’s me), good food still comes out of it.

At the end of the day, these old-fashioned kitchen hints aren’t just about saving money or time—they’re about making life a little easier and a lot more enjoyable. And if I can get dinner on the table without losing my mind (or ordering takeout again), I consider that a win.

1. Freeze Herbs in Olive Oil

Fresh herbs are so aspirational, right? Like, you buy them thinking you’re about to become this elevated home chef, and then three days later they look personally offended in your fridge. So now I chop them, freeze them in olive oil, and suddenly I’m prepared. I just toss a cube into a pan and it’s like, wow, who is she? Also, no waste, which makes my frugal side very happy. It’s giving organized, it’s giving capable, it’s giving “I planned this.”

2. Use a Damp Paper Towel Under Your Cutting Board

If your cutting board is sliding around like it has somewhere better to be, this fixes it instantly. Just put a damp paper towel underneath and it stays put. I don’t know why this isn’t common knowledge because it changes everything. Chopping suddenly feels safer and less chaotic, which is important because I already have enough chaos happening. It’s one of those small things that makes you irrationally happy.

3. Microwave Citrus Before Juicing

There is nothing more annoying than aggressively squeezing a lemon and getting basically nothing. Like, excuse me? You had one job. Pop it in the microwave for a few seconds first and suddenly it’s generous again. I use this constantly because I refuse to waste citrus—it’s a principle at this point. Also, it makes me feel efficient, which I deeply enjoy.

4. Peel Garlic with a Jar Shake

Put garlic cloves in a jar, shake it like you’re starring in your own cooking show, and the skins come off. It’s dramatic, it’s effective, and honestly a little therapeutic. Sometimes I hand it to the kids just to watch them commit to the moment. Anything that speeds up dinner and entertains me is a win.

5. Store Brown Sugar with a Marshmallow

Brown sugar turning into a rock is just rude. Add a marshmallow to the container and it stays soft longer. I don’t question it, I just accept the magic. Especially during baking season when patience is low and expectations are high. It’s one of those hacks that feels weird but works, and I respect that.

6. Use a Spoon to Peel Ginger

Peeling ginger used to feel unnecessarily difficult, like why is this so aggressive? Then I tried using a spoon and it was instantly better. Less waste, less effort, and somehow less irritation. Now I don’t avoid recipes with ginger, which feels like personal growth honestly.

7. Keep Salad Greens Fresh with Paper Towels

There is nothing more disappointing than opening a container of greens and finding a soggy situation. Line it with paper towels and they last so much longer. It’s simple, it works, and it saves money—which I love almost as much as I love not throwing food away. It’s giving responsible adult energy.

8. Grate Cold Butter for Baking

Forgetting to soften butter is basically my personality at this point. So I grate it instead. It softens quickly and mixes easily, and suddenly I’m back on track. It’s one of those hacks that feels a little extra but is actually genius. I use it way more than I thought I would.

9. Crack Eggs on a Flat Surface

Cracking eggs on the edge of a bowl is just inviting chaos. Do it on a flat surface instead and it’s so much cleaner. Fewer shell pieces, less frustration, better results. It’s such a small change but it makes a difference, and I’m all about that.

10. Use Kitchen Shears for Everything

I’m not exaggerating when I say I reach for kitchen scissors constantly. Herbs, meat, pizza—done. It’s faster, easier, and requires less cleanup. Even my husband uses them, which is honestly the strongest endorsement I can give. If he can’t mess it up, it’s foolproof.

11. Freeze Leftover Wine for Cooking

Okay, “leftover wine” is a bold concept, but if it happens, freeze it in cubes. Perfect for sauces later. It’s efficient and slightly fancy, which is my favorite combination. Also saves you from opening a whole bottle just for a splash, which feels responsible.

12. Keep a “Scrap Bag” for Veggies

I keep a bag in the freezer for veggie scraps and use it to make broth later. It’s basically free flavor, and it makes me feel very put together. Like yes, I planned this. Even if the rest of my kitchen suggests otherwise.

13. Use Ice Water for Crisp Veggies

If your veggies look tired, give them an ice bath. They perk right up like they just had a full spa day. I use this more than I’d like to admit. It’s quick, easy, and kind of satisfying to watch.

14. Toast Spices Before Using

This takes maybe a minute but makes everything taste better. Just toast them in a dry pan and suddenly you’re unlocking flavor. It feels like a chef-level move without actually being difficult, which is exactly my speed.

15. Use a Muffin Tin for Portioning

This is so good for prepping ingredients or serving things like taco toppings. Everything stays organized and contained, which is honestly rare in my house. It makes dinner look intentional instead of chaotic, and I appreciate that.

16. Store Onions in Pantyhose

This sounds ridiculous, I know. But tying onions in pantyhose actually helps them last longer. I felt a little judged by myself trying it, but it works. And at this point, I care more about results than appearances.

17. Use Dental Floss to Cut Soft Foods

Unflavored dental floss cuts through cakes and soft cheeses perfectly. No squishing, no mess. It’s oddly satisfying and surprisingly effective. Just make sure it’s not minty unless you want a very unexpected flavor situation.

18. Keep a Garbage Bowl While Cooking

This keeps everything cleaner while you cook. Scraps go straight into the bowl instead of all over the counter. It saves time, reduces mess, and makes cleanup easier. It’s a simple habit that makes you feel very efficient.

19. Freeze Coffee for Iced Drinks

Coffee ice cubes are a small luxury that make a big difference. No more watered-down iced coffee, just pure happiness. Especially on mornings when sleep was…not ideal. Which is most mornings.

20. Use a Potato to Fix Salty Soup

If you over-salt something, toss in a peeled potato. It helps absorb some of the salt. It’s not a miracle, but it can save a dish. And honestly, I’ll take any help I can get.

21. Roll Citrus to Get More Juice

Roll it on the counter before cutting and it releases more juice. Combine this with the microwave trick and you’re basically unstoppable. It’s such an easy step that makes a noticeable difference.

22. Use Binder Clips to Seal Bags

I use binder clips for everything—chips, frozen veggies, you name it. They’re cheap, effective, and already in the house. Not glamorous, but very practical. And I’d rather spend money elsewhere.

23. Label Leftovers with Dates

This prevents the classic “how long has this been in here?” moment. A little tape and a marker go a long way. It’s not exciting, but it’s necessary. Future you will be grateful.

24. Use a Slow Cooker Liner

Cleanup becomes almost nonexistent, which is honestly the dream. I resisted these at first, but now I’m fully on board. Anything that reduces dishes is a yes for me. Especially since I seem to be the only one noticing them.

25. Freeze Dough for Later

Make extra dough and freeze it for future meals. It’s like doing your future self a favor, which I love. Some nights you just need an easy win, and this delivers.

26. Use a Fork to Juice Citrus

Stick a fork in and twist while squeezing—it gets more juice out with less effort. No gadgets needed, just a simple trick that works. My favorite kind of solution.

27. Clean as You Go

I know this isn’t exciting, but it truly changes everything. Cooking feels less overwhelming when you’re not left with a disaster afterward. And while I’d love to say my family consistently helps…let’s just say I’ve mastered the strategic look that says, “someone else lives here too.”

At the end of the day, cooking doesn’t have to feel like a whole production. These little hacks make things easier, faster, and honestly a bit more enjoyable. And if they work in my house—with all its chaos—they will absolutely work anywhere.

It’s April 30th. My son’s graduation party is in three days. There are four collage boards leaned against my dining room wall and not a single photo glued to any of them. I have approximately 63,789 photos of Drew on my phone and the inability to commit to a single one of them is, I’m now realizing, not actually about photo selection. It’s about the fact that in 14 weeks I’m going to drive him two hours away and leave him at college.

And here’s the thing nobody warns you about. The summer before your kid leaves is not actually a summer. It is a slow-motion countdown disguised as a calendar. Every grocery run is potentially a Last Grocery Run. Every breakfast on a Tuesday is potentially a Last Tuesday Breakfast. You will go to bed at night doing math on how many Sundays are left and you will spiral. I have spiraled. I am still spiraling. If you’re reading this, you’re me. And I’m so glad we found each other.

I made this list for two reasons. One, because I needed it for myself. The unstructured panic of “we have to do EVERYTHING before August” is paralyzing and structure helps. Two, because I figured if I needed it, some other mom is sitting in her dining room next to her unfinished collage boards needing it too.

Forty ideas. Some big. Some small. Some you’ll do this weekend. Some you’ll save for July. Some won’t fit your kid and you’ll skip them, and that’s fine. The point isn’t to do all 40. The point is to stop scrolling Pinterest at 11 PM and actually do ONE.

Pour the coffee. Or the wine. Hold my hand. Let’s go.

The Conversations You Won’t Regret Having

1. Tell him your favorite memory of him as a kid.

Pick one. The specific one. The time he was four and tried to feed the dog his cereal. The time he came home from kindergarten with a story about a boy named Henry. The night he fell asleep on you during a movie and you didn’t move for two hours. Tell him out loud. He’ll roll his eyes. He’ll also remember it forever.

2. Ask him what he’s nervous about. Then don’t fix it.

This is the hardest one, honestly. Our entire job for 18 years has been fixing things. The scraped knee. The math homework. The friendship drama. Ask him what he’s scared about going to college and then sit on your hands. Don’t problem-solve. Don’t reassure. Just say, “yeah, that makes sense.” Watch what happens. He’ll tell you more.

3. Tell him the one thing about being an adult you wish someone had told you.

Mine is that nobody actually knows what they’re doing. Yours might be different. Maybe it’s about money. Or how to recover from a bad day. Or what to do when you fail. Pick one piece of grown-up wisdom that nobody handed you and hand it to him. He’ll act like he didn’t hear you. He heard you.

4. Apologize for something specific you’ve never apologized for.

Not a sweeping “I’m sorry for any time I let you down.” Those are useless. Pick a specific moment. A thing you said when you were too tired. A time you got it wrong. Own it. “I’m sorry I yelled at you about the dishwasher in 9th grade. That wasn’t your fault.” He’ll remember the specifics. He always has.

5. Tell him what you’re proud of about WHO he is, not what he’s done.

Not the grades. Not the awards. Not the team he made. The way he is with little kids. The way he makes his friends laugh. The fact that he holds doors for people without thinking about it. Tell him you see those things. Most kids only ever hear what they accomplished. Tell him who he IS.

6. Have the “if something happens” conversation.

Not morbid, just practical. What does he do if he runs out of money? If he gets sick? Does he have the family doctor’s number saved? What happens if a roommate situation goes sideways? Walk through it like a fire drill. Boring. Necessary. He’ll thank you in October.

Adventures, Big And Small

7. Take a road trip. Even just an hour away.

Pack snacks. Pick a playlist. Drive somewhere you’ve never been together. The whole point is the car. Conversations that happen at 65 mph staring at a windshield are conversations that don’t happen anywhere else. He’ll talk to you in a car in ways he won’t talk to you across a kitchen table. I don’t make the rules.

8. Walk his college campus together one more time before move-in.

Even if you’ve already toured it. Even if you’ve already done admitted students day. Go again. Walk the dorm building. Find the dining hall. Drive past the library. Eat lunch in the town. The point isn’t logistics. The point is both of you seeing the place that’s about to hold him next, together, while it still feels like a “we” thing.

9. Take him to your favorite restaurant from when he was little.

Wherever it was. The diner you used to go to after T-ball. The pizza place near the old house. Whatever location holds 50 small memories. Take him. Order what you used to order. It will feel weirdly emotional in a way you weren’t prepared for. Bring tissues.

10. Go to a concert. HIS music, not yours.

Whatever artist he’s been listening to in the car for two years. Buy two tickets. Don’t complain about the prices. Don’t complain about the volume. Stand next to him in a crowd of teenagers and watch him be 18 and happy. You will think about that night for the next ten years.

11. Spend a whole day outdoors with no agenda.

The lake. A state park. A beach if you’ve got one. The pool, even. The point is being outside, side by side, for a whole day, with no plan. Phones in the bag. Books optional. Just hours of being in the same place at the same speed. We don’t really do that anymore. Bring it back.

12. Have a “yes day.” He picks. You go.

Within reason. (No, you are not buying him a motorcycle.) But for one day, let him plan the whole thing. Breakfast, lunch, what you do, where you eat dinner. Watch him be in charge. It’s a sneak preview of who he’s about to become. Heartbreaking. Also kind of cool.

13. The grocery store run plus a quick lunch.

This sounds like nothing. It is not nothing. The boring errand-and-lunch combo is the most underrated mother-son activity on earth. Casual. Low pressure. Plenty of room for him to mention something he’s been thinking about while you’re in the produce aisle. Some of my favorite conversations with my own mom happened next to a pyramid of grapefruits.

Keepsakes And Things To Hold Onto

14. Write him a letter to open in his dorm room.

Sit down with paper. Tell him everything. Your favorite memory. Your hopes. Your fears. The thing you’d say if you were brave. Seal it. Slip it into his suitcase the day you drop him off. He will read it alone, on a twin bed, in a room he doesn’t know yet. Trust me on this one.

15. Make a “Mom’s Recipes” notebook.

Handwritten. Not printed. Pick the 15 to 20 recipes he actually loves. Your meatballs. Your chili. The chicken thing he asks for on his birthday. Write them out by hand with notes in the margins. (“Don’t burn the garlic.” “I always add extra cheese.”) It will quietly become his most prized possession by sophomore year.

16. Take a photo on the front porch in the same spot you’ve taken them in for years.

You know the one. First day of kindergarten. First day of every school year since. Take one more. Graduation week, or the morning of move-in. He will groan. Take it anyway. Frame it next to the kindergarten one. Cry on a regular Wednesday for the rest of your life. Worth it.

17. Record a video of his voice answering a few questions.

Not a fancy interview. Just hand him a phone and ask him a few things. What’s your favorite memory of childhood? What advice would you give your younger self? What’s something true about you nobody knows? Save the video forever. There will come a day when his voice sounds different and you’ll be grateful you have this one.

18. Frame something of his old work for his dorm.

A piece of art from second grade. A school paper he was proud of. A photo from middle school he never knew you saved. Frame it. Wrap it. Put it in his packing pile. He’ll act mortified. He will also hang it on his dorm wall and you know it.

19. Make a memory jar from family and friends.

Email or text everyone who’s known him. Aunts, grandparents, his coach, his best friend’s mom. Ask each one for a favorite memory. Print them. Fold them. Drop them in a mason jar with a ribbon. Give it to him at his graduation party or on move-in day. He will read every single one. So will you.

20. Print actual physical photos for an album he can take to college.

Not on his phone. Photos. On photo paper. Walgreens does it for under thirty cents a print. Pull 30 from across his life and put them in a small album. Slip it into his suitcase. Watch his roommates be jealous of the boy whose mom did this for him. Pure mom flex.

Life Skills To Send Him Off With

21. Teach him laundry. For real this time.

I am sorry to report that “I showed him when he was 12” does not count. Walk through it again. Whites and darks. The thing about the new red shirt. The mysteries of the dryer settings. How much detergent is too much. Make him do a load while you watch. He’ll roll his eyes. He’ll also call you in October about a stain, and you will be smug.

22. Teach him five actual meals.

Eggs (scrambled, fried, in a sandwich). Pasta with a real sauce, not just butter. A basic stir-fry. Grilled cheese with tomato soup. A sheet-pan chicken-and-veggies. That’s it. Five. Enough to keep him alive. Enough to impress someone in two years. Cooking together is also the kind of thing where conversations happen sideways. Bonus points.

23. Walk him through a real budget.

How much is in his account. What’s coming in (job, allowance, financial aid). What’s going out (food, gas, the random stuff). How to track it. How to NOT spend $400 at restaurants in a single weekend. Pull up a real Google Sheet. Do it together. He’ll pretend to be uninterested. He’ll thank you in November when his roommate is broke and he isn’t.

24. Show him how to make a doctor’s appointment and refill a prescription.

Genuinely. Most 18-year-olds have never made a single medical appointment for themselves. Walk him through it. Where the campus health clinic is. How to call. How insurance works (or sort of works). How to refill a prescription if he takes one. Boring. Critical. Future-you is grateful.

25. Teach him to write a professional email.

To a professor. To a boss. To an advisor. The structure: a subject line that actually says something, a greeting that uses their name, a brief body, a clear ask, a polite closing, his actual full name. He has spent four years texting in lowercase. This is a different language. Teach it before September.

26. Basic car stuff.

Even if he’s not taking a car. Gas. Oil check. Tire pressure. What the warning lights mean. How to jump a battery. How to put on a spare. He will need at least two of these things in his first six months. I promise you.

27. How to mend a button and use iron-on hem tape.

Five minutes. One needle. One spool of thread. One roll of hem tape. He’ll never sew anything else in his life. But the day he loses a button on his nice shirt before something important, he’ll think “wait, mom showed me this once,” and his world will not crumble. That’s the whole goal.

Last Week Rituals

28. One final family dinner with all his favorites.

Whatever HIS favorites are. Not yours. Not what’s easy. Make the actual things he loves, even if it’s three different proteins and a weird side. Set the table nicely. Light a candle if you do candles. Eat slowly. Take a picture. This is the last family dinner before everything is different. Make it count.

29. Take a “before I leave” photo on the porch.

Different from the graduation photo. This is move-in week. Backpack on his shoulder. Car packed in the driveway. Take the photo. Frame it next to his kindergarten “first day” photo on a shelf where you can see them both. Watch them age side by side for the rest of his life.

30. Give him a small token for his wallet.

A laminated photo of the two of you. A penny from his birth year. A folded note that says one sentence. Tiny. Carryable. He won’t tell you he has it. He’ll have it. When he’s overwhelmed in October, he’ll touch his wallet and remember he has somewhere to come home to.

31. Help him pack. Slowly. Not the night before.

Start a week out. Make a list. Lay things out on the bed. Talk about what’s actually needed. Pack the meaningful stuff first. The framed art, the photo album, the letter, the recipe book. Then the practical stuff. The slow pack creates time for things to come up. Things will come up.

32. The drive to drop him off. Let it be quiet sometimes.

Don’t fill every silence with chatter. Don’t quiz him on what he packed. Don’t hand him a binder of life advice in the passenger seat. Some of the drive should be loud and full of music and snacks. Some of it should be quiet, both of you looking out the window, both of you knowing exactly what’s happening and not needing to say it.

33. Don’t rush the goodbye in the parking lot.

This is the one. Don’t make it quick because it hurts. Don’t pretend you’re “fine” to make it easier on him. Hug him a long time. Tell him you love him. Tell him you’re proud of him. Cry if you cry. Get back in the car. Drive away. Pull over half a mile down the road and lose it. That’s the assignment. That’s the whole thing.

The Ordinary Moments That Are Actually The Whole Thing

34. Sit on the couch and watch his show with him.

Even if it’s terrible. Even if you don’t understand who anyone is. Don’t critique. Don’t ask 47 questions about the plot. Just sit there. Laugh when he laughs. The TV isn’t the point. Sitting on the same couch is the point. Five years from now you will not remember the show. You’ll remember the couch.

35. Make him breakfast on a random Tuesday.

Not a special occasion. A Tuesday. Make pancakes. Or eggs. Or French toast. Or whatever he liked when he was nine. Set it on the table. Eat with him. Don’t make a big deal. Don’t post about it. The whole point is that it’s an ordinary morning. Those are the ones that ache later.

36. Drive him somewhere he’s perfectly capable of driving himself.

He’ll think it’s weird. Do it anyway. Twelve minutes in the car is the most underrated mom resource on earth. He’ll say more in those twelve minutes than he’ll say across three full days at home. Take the long way. Don’t tell him you took the long way.

37. Let him sleep until noon and don’t wake him.

Resist the productive-mom voice in your head telling you he should be “doing something with his summer.” He is. He’s sleeping in the room he won’t be sleeping in three months from now. That is not nothing. Let him. Have your coffee in peace. The day will start when it starts.

38. Cook dinner together. No phones at the table.

Pasta. Tacos. A grilled cheese, even. Pick something that requires the two of you to be in the kitchen for 30 minutes. Phones away. Music on. Actual conversation. Maybe terrible. Maybe perfect. Definitely something you’ll wish you had more of in September.

39. Take a walk after dinner. No agenda.

Around the block. Around the neighborhood. With the dog or without. Don’t put on a podcast. Don’t make it “exercise.” Just walk and talk, or walk and not-talk. The pace of a walk creates a different kind of conversation than any other pace. He’ll mention something at minute eight that he wasn’t going to mention at all.

40. Sit in his room sometimes. Just because.

Not when he’s there. After he’s gone to a friend’s house, or work, or out for the night. Sit on the edge of his unmade bed. Look at the posters. The trophies. The clothes on the floor. Take it in. The room doesn’t stay this room. Memorize it now while it’s still his.

OK So About Those Collage Boards.

It’s still April 30th. The collage boards are still leaning against my dining room wall. The party is still in three days. I still haven’t picked the photos.

But I’m going to. And so are you. Because here’s what I figured out somewhere around idea number 23 of writing this list. The collage boards aren’t really about the photos. They never were. They’re about the fact that I have to admit, out loud, in glue and cardstock, in front of family and friends and a punch bowl, that this part is over. That my son is grown. That the next chapter starts in 14 weeks.

And that’s the point of every single thing on this list, too. None of these 40 ideas are really about the activity. They’re about saying yes to one more car ride. One more breakfast. One more concert. One more long hug in a parking lot. They’re about not letting the summer slip by in a blur of “we’ll do that next weekend” when there are only so many weekends left.

So pick one. Just one. Today. Don’t make a master plan. Don’t add it to the family calendar. Don’t overthink it. Just text him right now and say “hey, let’s grab lunch this week, just us.” That’s it. That’s the whole thing.

And then come back tomorrow and pick another one.

We’ve got this. Both of us. I’ll save you a seat in the parking lot.

OK quick context before we dive in. My kids are 15 and 18 now. Technically, the bored years are behind me. And yet. Here I am, on a Tuesday afternoon, writing a list called “what to do when bored,” because the muscle memory of those years runs DEEP. You do not forget the stretch of motherhood that involved a four-year-old saying “Mom I’m BORED” 87 times before noon. You just don’t.

Back then it would be approximately 2:47 PM on a Tuesday and my children would inform me, individually and then collectively, that they were BORED. Not “kind of bored.” Not “a little bored.” We’re talking soul-crushing, world-ending, “Mom, my LIFE is over” bored. They had, at last count, 4,000 toys, a backyard, an iPad, and at one point I’m pretty sure I bought them an actual trampoline. None of it mattered. They were bored. The only person who could save them was me. Apparently. Because dad was on a “work call” which I am 78% sure was a podcast.

So there I’d be. Me. A mom. Googling “what to do when bored” at 2:48 PM on a Tuesday like a contestant on a reality show whose only prize was silence.

I made this list because I have BEEN there. I lived through 47 consecutive snow days. I survived a stomach bug week that genuinely felt biblical. I entertained a four-year-old in a doctor’s office with nothing but a hair tie and pure determination. I am qualified to write this list. I am, in fact, over-qualified. My kids are 15 and 18 now and the boredom complaints have officially stopped. (They’ve been replaced by a very quiet house, which I would have, frankly, paid cash money for in 2015.)

Below are 55 actual, real, doable things to do when you’re bored. Some are for the kids. Some are for you (because your boredom was real too, I see you). Some are for the dog (yes, the dog was bored too, I could SEE it in his eyes). All of them are tested. All of them got us through. All of them will get you out of the doom-scroll spiral that we both know is the actual reason you’re on this article.

Grab a coffee. Or a wine. Or a coffee with a splash of wine, I’m not your boss. Let’s go.

55 Things To Do When You’re Bored At Home

1. Take a walk around the block.

Sometimes the answer was humiliatingly simple. Put on shoes. Step outside. Walk in a circle. The fresh air, the suburban gossip you collect from peeking at neighbors’ yards, the serenity of being momentarily unreachable. Genuinely healing. Bring the kids if you must. Bring no one if you can swing it.

2. Bake cookies from scratch.

Not the slice-and-bake. I love the slice-and-bake. But on bored days we did the real thing. Flour everywhere. Children “helping.” A vague suspicion someone added the salt twice. The cookies were ugly and weirdly amazing and I felt like a Pinterest mom for approximately 11 minutes.

3. Build a blanket fort that takes up your entire living room.

Every blanket, every pillow, every dining chair pressed into duty. By the time we were done, it was no longer a living room. It was a structure. A monument. The kids loved it. I loved it. I refused to take it down for 48 hours and my husband said nothing because he KNEW.

4. Have a kitchen dance party.

Pick a Spotify playlist named something like “2007 BANGERS” and turn it up so loud your neighbor texts you. Dance like nobody’s watching, specifically because nobody IS watching. Your kids are too embarrassed to look. This is therapy. This is exercise. This is a vibe.

5. Do an actual sheet mask.

Not a quick five-minute one. The full 20-minute, weird-faced, “mommy why” experience. Hide in your bathroom. Lock the door. Drink something cold. When you emerge looking like a cool, dewy main character, you’ll be a NEW WOMAN.

6. Try a recipe you’ve been pinning for two years.

You know the one. The fancy soup. The “easy” sourdough. The lemon ricotta pasta from that one influencer you can’t stand but secretly trust. Today is the day. Pull it up. Make it. Photograph it badly. Tell yourself it counts as self-care.

7. Watch a movie you loved as a kid.

13 Going On 30. The Princess Diaries. Now and Then if you’re feeling EMOTIONAL. There is nothing more healing than rewatching something you watched on VHS on a snow day in 1998. It will fix something deep in you. I cannot explain it scientifically.

8. Reorganize your spice cabinet.

I know how this sounds. But there’s a very specific, deeply unhinged satisfaction in throwing out a cumin from 2019 and putting all your spices in matching jars. You’ll feel like a Real Adult. You’ll feel like Khloé Kardashian. You’ll text a picture to your sister.

9. Read an actual book.

Not your phone. Not a blog. A book. With pages. I know. Who has time? But we all have time to scroll for 47 minutes about a celebrity divorce. Apply that energy to chapter one of something good and your brain will weep with gratitude.

10. Do a puzzle on the kitchen table.

Get a 500-piece puzzle and just leave it out. Do three pieces every time you walk by. By Saturday, the puzzle is done. You feel like a genius. The kids feel like geniuses. You’ll glue it and hang it in the garage forever like a trophy. Win.

11. Plant something. Anything.

A pot of basil. A weird succulent. A sad little tomato plant from Lowe’s. The act of putting a living thing in soil and committing to it does something to a woman’s nervous system. Plus if it lives, you have basil. Free basil, ladies.

12. Call a friend you haven’t talked to in months.

Yes, on the phone. Like an animal from the 1990s. Catch up on everything. Gossip about everyone. Laugh until you snort. Then immediately schedule a wine night. You will feel SEEN and that’s the most underrated mom feeling on planet earth.

13. Do gentle yoga in your living room.

Pull up a 20-minute YouTube video that says “for stress” or “for moms” or “for women who slept three hours.” Do it on the floor while your toddler sits on your back. Whatever. You stretched. That counts. You’re basically Gisele.

14. Declutter ONE single drawer.

Not the whole house. Don’t do the whole house, you’ll spiral. Pick one drawer. The junk drawer. The makeup drawer. The Tupperware drawer of doom. Empty it. Sort it. Throw the chaos out. Close it. Bask. Tomorrow, another drawer.

15. Make a vision board.

Get a stack of magazines, scissors, a glue stick, and a poster board. Cut out pictures of things you want. Vacations, kitchens, abs, peace. Glue them down like you’re 14 again. Hang it up. I’m not saying it works. I’m not saying it doesn’t. I’m just saying my friend made one and now she’s in Tulum.

16. Make a real photo album.

Not a digital one. Order prints from your camera roll for like, eleven dollars, and put them in an actual physical book. Your kids will FREAK. They’ll sit on the floor and look at it for hours. You’ll look like Mother of the Year. It’s shockingly easy.

17. Journal.

I KNOW. Just try it. Three sentences. What you ate. What you’re annoyed about. What you’re grateful for. That’s the whole entry. Do it for a week and you’ll feel like Carrie Bradshaw, if Carrie had three kids and a Costco membership.

18. Take a bath. With a candle. With a book. With a snack.

Non-negotiable. Lock the door. Tell the household you are unavailable. They survived before you and they will survive for 35 minutes now. The hot water, the candlelight, the snack. You will emerge transformed.

19. Learn a TikTok dance with your kids.

Yes, you’ll look ridiculous. Yes, your back will hurt. Yes, your tween will say “Mom, no” and then secretly love it. Pick a slow one. Practice for 20 minutes. Film it. Don’t post it. Or do post it, I’m not the boss of you.

20. Try a new hairstyle.

A messy bun is not a hairstyle, it’s a coping mechanism. Try something else. A french braid. A claw clip with the bangs out. A scarf headband like you’re a 1960s housewife. Your husband will NOTICE for once. Your friends will text. Reinvention is free.

21. Picnic in the backyard.

Even if your “backyard” is a 12-square-foot patio. Lay out a blanket. Pack a sandwich. Eat outside. The kids will think they’re in a fairytale. You’ll think you’re in a Hallmark movie. The dog will be utterly thrilled. Everyone wins.

22. Make homemade pizza for dinner.

Buy the dough at Trader Joe’s, lay out a buffet of toppings, let everyone build their own. It’s chaos. It’s delicious. It’s three nights of dishes. But the joy a child experiences crafting their own personal pizza is genuinely something else.

23. Color in an adult coloring book.

They sell them at Target for like four dollars. Get colored pencils. Sit at the kitchen table with a coffee. Color a mandala. Your blood pressure will plummet. You’ll finally understand why your grandma was always so calm. It’s been the coloring this whole time.

24. Karaoke night.

Pull up YouTube karaoke and let the family go. Belt “Total Eclipse of the Heart.” Watch your seven-year-old butcher “Let It Go.” It will be the best night you’ve had all month. There will be photos. There will be tears. There will be ice cream afterward.

25. Indoor scavenger hunt.

Write a list of 15 things hidden around the house. Send the children. They will be busy for 40 entire minutes. You can finally drink your coffee while it’s still hot. This is genuine genius. I should be paid for this idea.

26. Make playdough from scratch.

Flour, salt, water, food coloring, cream of tartar. Look it up. Takes ten minutes. The kids think you’re a wizard. The playdough lasts a week. The mess is contained. The dopamine hit is real. Five stars.

27. Throw a tea party.

Real cups. Real cookies. Possibly a hat. Even your son will play along if the snacks are good enough. Use the fancy mugs nobody ever uses because they’re “special.” Today is special. Today is a Tuesday and we are SURVIVING.

28. Write actual thank-you notes.

Pull out the stationery you bought three Christmases ago. Write to people who deserve thanks. A friend. A teacher. Your mom. Mail them, like an old-timey lady. Watch how it boomerangs joy back to you within 48 hours. It’s a real phenomenon.

29. Give yourself a real manicure.

Push back the cuticles. Shape the nails. Two coats and a top coat. Sit there for 20 minutes with your hands in front of you, doing absolutely nothing while they dry, like a queen. Pick a color you’d never pick. Live a little. It washes off in four days anyway.

30. Make a no-bake dessert.

Rice krispie treats. No-bake cookies. The chocolate-peanut-butter ones from the back of the oatmeal box. Quick. Easy. Borderline unhealthy. Perfect. The kids can help and they’ll be SO PROUD. You’ll be a hero by 4 PM.

31. Pajama day. Officially.

Declare it. Announce it. Nobody changes out of pajamas all day, that includes you. Movies, snacks, blankets, no real meals, just snacks all day long. It’s the most rejuvenating thing a household can do and it is FREE. We love free.

32. Make a digital photo book on Shutterfly.

Pull a year’s worth of photos and turn them into a book. They go on sale constantly, like 50% off basically every other Tuesday. You will cry. Your kids will cry. Your mom will cry when you give her one for her birthday. Tears all around.

33. Visit the library.

Free. FREE. Hours of free entertainment. Books to bring home. Most have storytime, craft hours, even free passes to museums. The library is the most underused mom resource on earth. Go. Today. Get a card if you don’t have one.

34. Board game tournament.

Pull every game out of the closet. Bracket-style. Single-elimination. Winner picks dinner. The competitive spirit will keep them busy for HOURS and you’ll laugh harder than you have all week. Monopoly is banned. We’re not trying to ruin our marriage.

35. Toilet paper roll crafts.

Dump the empty rolls in a basket. Add markers, glue, googly eyes, scraps of paper. Walk away. Children are FERAL for this. They’ll create entire civilizations of bug-eyed creatures. Pinterest moms know. Now you know too.

36. Sundae bar.

Ice cream, three toppings, whipped cream, cherries. Set it up like a buffet. The kids will believe they have entered an amusement park. It costs eight dollars. Their joy is priceless. Take a video. They’ll remember it for fifteen years.

37. Try a new workout video on YouTube.

Caroline Girvan. Heather Robertson. Whoever. Pick a 20-minute one and SUFFER. You will hate every second. You will love yourself afterward. You’ll text your sister “I worked out” and feel insufferable in the best way.

38. Make slime.

I know, I know, it’s a war crime against your carpet. Do it on the kitchen counter. Glue, baking soda, contact lens solution, food coloring. The kids will lose their minds. You will too, but quietly, in the corner, with a glass of something cold.

39. Lego challenge.

Set a timer for 30 minutes. Whoever builds the most creative thing wins. The prize? Picking the next show on family movie night. The motivation will be UNHINGED. The kids will be silent and focused. You will be alone with your thoughts. Bliss.

40. Make a time capsule.

Get a shoebox. Write letters to your future selves. Add a drawing, a small toy, a school photo, a little note about today. Tape it shut. Open it in five years and DIE LAUGHING. This is the kind of thing kids remember forever. Mom of the year.

41. Speed-clean one room.

Set a 15-minute timer and just GO. Music up loud. Bag in hand. Do not stop. Do not think. Just clean. By the time the timer goes off, the room will be 80% better and you’ll feel like Beyoncé in a mom uniform.

42. Watch a documentary.

Not a true crime one if you have anxiety. Pick something fascinating. Chefs, queens, octopuses (octopi?). You’ll learn something. You’ll feel smart. You’ll spend the rest of the night telling your husband random facts and he’ll pretend to be interested. As he should.

43. Plan your dream vacation.

Even if you’re not going. ESPECIALLY if you’re not going. Pull up Pinterest, pick a place, plan the whole trip. Flights, hotels, restaurants. Save it as a Google Doc. Now you have a plan for when the universe finally pays you what you’re worth. Manifest, baby.

44. Smoothie bar morning.

Frozen fruit, yogurt, juice, a couple of add-ins. Let the kids make their own. They’ll dump in things that should not go together and drink it proudly. You’ll sneak spinach into yours and feel virtuous. We’re all winning here.

45. Tie-dye old white t-shirts.

Five-dollar packs of plain white tees from Target plus a tie-dye kit. Lay it out on the patio. Let chaos reign. The shirts will be ugly. They will be PROUD. You’ll have summer pajamas for everyone and a memory the kids reference forever.

46. Make friendship bracelets.

Embroidery floss. YouTube tutorial. Two hours of focused, silent peace as fingers braid string. The product is adorable. The process is meditative. You’ll gift them to relatives and feel like a folk artist. Live the dream.

47. Write a letter to your future self.

Sit down with paper. Write a letter to who you want to be in a year. What’s true now. What you hope is true then. Seal it. Mark the envelope “Open April 2027.” Find it next April and CRY. Worth it.

48. Try a 10-minute meditation.

Use Calm. Use the free version. Use a YouTube video called “for moms who can’t even.” Sit. Breathe. Try not to think about the laundry. Fail. Try again. The fact that you tried is enough. You’re already winning.

49. Reorganize your closet.

Pull everything out. Try things on. Donate anything that hasn’t fit since 2019. Hang what’s left by color, like a maniac. Step back. It’s a BOUTIQUE. It’s a CAPSULE WARDROBE. You’re basically a fashion influencer now.

50. Listen to a podcast while you fold laundry.

A juicy one. A true crime one. A “Smartless” episode. The folding still happens. The brain still gets entertainment. The two-birds-one-stone of it all is honestly motherhood at its most galaxy-brained.

51. Make a bucket list.

Big things. Small things. Silly things. Things you want to do this year, this decade, this lifetime. Write them down. Put them on the fridge. Half the magic is in writing them. The other half is when you cross one off.

52. Bake bread.

Yes, real bread. Yeast, flour, water, salt, time. Watch it rise. Watch it bake. Smell your house. There is no smell on earth that hits like fresh bread on a Tuesday afternoon. You’ll feel like a colonial woman and IT WILL BE GREAT.

53. Sit and watch the sunset.

From your porch. From your driveway. From a parking lot. Wherever. Just sit. Watch the sky do its dramatic little thing. No phone. No agenda. Five minutes of awe. Free therapy. Highly recommend.

54. Themed movie night.

Pick a movie. Match the snacks. Italian movie? Pasta and Italian sodas. Beach movie? Goldfish crackers and lemonade. The kids will GASP. You’ll feel like an event planner. The TikTok girls will be furious you thought of it first.

55. Take a nap.

Yes. The most important one. If you can swing it, do it. 20 minutes. 90 minutes. On the couch. On the bed. With a kid on top of you, even. Sleep is a productive activity. Sleep is a reset button. The world will not fall apart in 20 minutes. I PROMISE.

The Real Truth About Boredom

Here’s what I figured out somewhere along the way. Boredom was never actually the enemy. Boredom is just your brain saying, “hey lady, we have not done a single new thing in three weeks and we are SHRIVELING.” It’s a signal. A nudge. A little fairy on your shoulder whispering, bake the cookies, take the bath, take the nap.

So next time you, or your kids, or even your dog declare yourselves bored, don’t panic. Pick something. Anything. Pick number 14 because that drawer has been mocking you for months. Pick number 18 because you’ve EARNED it. Pick number 55 because YES, naps count, naps will always count, naps are a love language.

Bookmark this list. Send it to a friend. Tell another mom you saw it on Pinterest and pretend you wrote it yourself. I won’t tell.

And one more thing, because I have to say it. My kids are 15 and 18 now. The bored years went by fast. Faster than anyone told me they would. The toddler asking for a tea party is gone. The kid who needed 47 toilet paper rolls and a glue stick is gone. Use the list. Use it now. While they’re still asking.

Now go. Save your sanity. You got this.

A Little Story

I started making baked potatoes in the slow cooker on a whim one summer when I really didn’t want to turn the oven on. Figured the worst that could happen was they’d be weird. They weren’t weird. They were perfect. I made them three more times that month and haven’t gone back to the oven method much since. When the oven is free, I might use it. But when it’s a hot day or I need the oven for something else, the slow cooker is where the potatoes go.

Why This Method Works So Well

Hands-off is the entire point. The whole advantage of slow cooker baked potatoes is the set-it-and-forget-it factor. On low for 6–8 hours, you can put them in before work and they’re done at dinner. On high for 3–4 hours, they’re ready for a weekend lunch or dinner without you doing anything between the start and the table.

No water, no foil needed. Some slow cooker potato recipes call for adding water to the bottom or wrapping each potato in foil. I’ve made them both ways and prefer plain and dry. The potatoes steam in their own natural moisture. The oil and salt on the skin actually do something — they create a slightly crisp, flavorful skin instead of just steaming the potato soft under foil wrap.

Great for feeding a crowd. A 6-quart slow cooker holds 4 pounds of potatoes — about 6–8 medium russets. That’s a lot of baked potatoes with zero oven monitoring. For bigger groups, run two slow cookers.

Frees up your oven. Holiday dinners, big family meals, any day the oven is taken up by a roast or a casserole — this is how you still get baked potatoes on the table without any juggling act.

Ingredients You’ll Need

Russet potatoes (4 lbs, about 6–8 medium) — Russets are the right potato for baking — I wouldn’t swap them for reds or Yukons if you want that classic fluffy interior. Yukon Golds will work but they’re waxier and produce a denser, creamier result that’s fine on its own but not quite a baked potato. Red potatoes are too small and waxy. Stick with russets.

One important tip: choose potatoes of similar size so they finish cooking at the same time. If you mix small and very large potatoes in the same batch, the smaller ones will be overcooked by the time the big ones are done.

2 tablespoons olive oil — The oil does two things: it helps the skin get slightly crispy rather than limp and steamed, and it carries the salt into the skin for flavor. Rub each potato thoroughly all over — don’t just brush a little on one side and call it done. Vegetable oil or melted butter both work as substitutes, but olive oil gives the best result here.

Salt (to taste) — This is the ingredient people under-do and then wonder why the skin is boring. Season the outside generously. I use kosher salt and I’m not shy with it — the skin is one of the best parts of a good baked potato, and salt is what makes it taste like something instead of just cooked starch.

How to Make Crock Pot Baked Potatoes

Step 1: Prep the Potatoes

Scrub each potato thoroughly under running water to remove any dirt — you’ll feel when the skin goes from gritty to smooth. Dry them off with a clean towel. Pierce each potato several times all over with a fork or the tip of a knife — this lets steam escape during cooking and keeps the potatoes from building up pressure inside. Don’t just do two or three pokes; go all the way around.

Step 2: Oil and Season

Rub each potato all over with olive oil, then sprinkle generously with kosher salt. Get the whole surface — top, bottom, sides. The salt sticks to the oil and creates a seasoned skin that actually tastes good. This is a step people rush and it shows when the skin comes out pale and bland.

Step 3: Into the Slow Cooker

Place the potatoes directly in the slow cooker — no foil, no water, no liner needed. Don’t stack them on top of each other if you can avoid it; try to keep them in a single layer or with minimal overlap so the heat can circulate evenly.

Step 4: Cook and Check for Doneness

Cook on high for 3–4 hours or low for 6–8 hours. Doneness is easy to test: slide a fork into the thickest part of the potato. If it goes in without resistance, the potato is done. If there’s any firmness in the center, give it another 30 minutes and check again. They’ll look a bit shriveled compared to oven potatoes and that’s completely normal — the inside will be perfectly fluffy.

Serve immediately with your favorite toppings. The skin will have some texture from the oil and salt — it’s one of the best parts.

Tips for Perfect Slow Cooker Baked Potatoes

• Match potato sizes. Even if you’re only off by a little, smaller potatoes will be overdone by the time bigger ones finish. Try to grab potatoes that are close in size at the store.
• Don’t add water. You don’t need it — the potatoes produce enough moisture on their own. Adding water creates steam that softens the skin instead of crisping it.
• Don’t wrap in foil. Same reason — you lose the oiled skin texture that makes these worth doing. Skip the foil and let the oil and salt do their job.
• Pierce them well. Multiple holes all over, not just a couple pokes. This lets steam escape evenly and helps the potato cook through from the inside out.
• Don’t panic if they look wrinkled. Slow cooker potatoes sometimes look a little more shriveled than oven potatoes. That’s fine — it’s just from the long moist cook. The inside will be perfectly fluffy.

Serving Suggestions and Topping Ideas

Baked potatoes are one of those foods where the toppings are half the meal. Here’s how we do them at my house, plus some other combinations worth trying:

Classic Loaded Baked Potato

• Butter
• Sour cream
• Shredded cheddar cheese
• Crumbled bacon
• Sliced green onions or chives

Chili Baked Potato

Ladle homemade or canned chili over the top, add shredded cheese and a dollop of sour cream. This turns a baked potato into a full dinner with almost no extra effort.

Broccoli and Cheese

Steam some broccoli and pile it on with a generous pour of cheddar cheese sauce or shredded cheese melted over the top. Kid-friendly and filling.

Simple and Good

Just butter and salt. Sometimes the simplest version is the best, especially when the potato skin is perfectly seasoned from the olive oil rub.

What to Serve Alongside

Crock pot baked potatoes work as a side dish for just about anything. Some favorites:

• Grilled or pan-seared steak
• Rotisserie or baked chicken
• Pork chops or ribs
• A big green salad for a lighter pairing
• Steamed vegetables or roasted broccoli

Or skip the side dish angle entirely and make these the main event — a baked potato bar with a spread of toppings makes an effortless dinner for a group. Set out butter, sour cream, shredded cheese, bacon bits, chili, steamed broccoli, and let everyone build their own.

Storage and Reheating

Refrigerator: Let leftover baked potatoes cool completely, then store in an airtight container or wrapped in foil in the fridge for up to 4 days.

Microwave reheating: Pierce the skin a few times and microwave for 2–3 minutes, flipping halfway through, until heated all the way through.

Oven reheating: Wrap in foil and bake at 350° for 15–20 minutes. This gives you a better result than the microwave if you have time.

Make into something else: Leftover baked potatoes are great scooped out and used for twice-baked potatoes, mashed into a rough potato soup, or diced up for a morning potato scramble with eggs and cheese.

Can You Make These Ahead?

Yes — this is actually one of the best make-ahead side dishes around because the slow cooker does the timing work for you. Put them on low in the morning and they’ll be done 6–8 hours later. They stay warm in the slow cooker on the “warm” setting for up to an hour after they’re done without getting overdone.

You can also cook them the day before, refrigerate, and reheat for the meal. They reheat well in the oven wrapped in foil.

Variations and Substitutions

Different potatoes: Yukon Golds work and produce a creamier, denser interior. Sweet potatoes cook the same way and are delicious — same method, same timing. Red potatoes are too small and waxy for this application.

Different oil: Avocado oil, vegetable oil, or melted butter all work in place of olive oil. Butter gives a richer skin but can burn slightly on long low cooks — olive or avocado oil are safer bets for 6–8 hours on low.

Seasoned skin: Mix garlic powder, onion powder, or smoked paprika into the oil before rubbing it on. The skin picks up those flavors and makes the whole potato taste more interesting even before toppings.

Smaller potatoes: If you want to use smaller russets or baby potatoes, reduce the cook time — check at 2–3 hours on high or 4–5 hours on low.

What Actually Makes These Come Out Right

The method is simple, but two things make a real difference in the result:

A reliable slow cooker with consistent heat. If your slow cooker runs cool or unevenly, your potatoes will need significantly more time — or won’t be done at all. A Crock-Pot 6-quart slow cooker is the standard for a reason — consistent heat, plenty of room for a full batch, and a warm setting that holds food without overcooking it.

Good olive oil for the skin. The oil rub is where all the skin flavor comes from, so it’s worth using one that actually tastes like something. California Olive Ranch is consistently fresh and well-priced — you’ll notice the difference on the skin versus a generic store bottle.

Frequently Asked Questions

Do I need to add water to the slow cooker?

No, and I’d actively tell you not to. Water creates steam that turns the skin soft and pale — exactly the opposite of what you want. The potatoes release their own moisture and that’s enough. Leave the bottom dry.

Do I need to wrap the potatoes in foil?

No. Skip the foil. I’ve tried it both ways and the no-foil version wins every time. Foil traps moisture around the skin and the oil and salt can’t do their job. Plain in the slow cooker gives you a much better skin.

How do I know when they’re done?

Poke the thickest part with a fork — it should slide in with no resistance, like poking room-temperature butter. If there’s any pushback at all, give it another 30 minutes. Don’t guess on this; an undercooked center is the one thing that ruins an otherwise easy dish.

Can I cook sweet potatoes the same way?

Yes, exactly the same method and timing. Sweet potatoes done this way are delicious and honestly might be even better — the skin caramelizes a little and gets this slightly sweet, salty crust that’s hard to stop eating.

Can I cook more than 4 pounds at once?

Depends on your slow cooker size. A 6-quart fits about 4 pounds comfortably. If you overcrowd, the potatoes cook unevenly and take longer — and some may come out underdone while others are fine. For a bigger batch, use two slow cookers or do them in shifts.

Can I leave them on warm after they’re done?

Yes, for up to an hour. After that they start to dry out and the texture suffers. The warm setting is great for timing flexibility, but I wouldn’t push past an hour. If dinner’s going to be significantly delayed, better to pull them and reheat than leave them sitting.

Lighter Version

The potatoes themselves are naturally pretty light — a plain baked russet is filling, high in potassium, and relatively low in calories before any toppings go on. The calorie difference comes entirely from what you put on top.

For a lighter version, top with plain Greek yogurt instead of sour cream, skip the bacon, and go light on the butter. A squeeze of lemon and fresh herbs (chives, dill, parsley) is also a great way to add flavor without calories.

More Recipes You’ll Love

• Pork Chop and Hashbrown Casserole
• Simple Crock Pot Beef and Noodles
• Cheesy Potatoes Potato Bake
• 40 Unforgettable Crockpot Recipes

Print

Crock Pot Baked Potatoes

Hands-off slow cooker baked potatoes with fluffy centers and seasoned skins, no oven needed.

Course Side Dish

Cuisine American

Keyword crock pot baked potatoes, slow cooker baked potatoes

Prep Time 10 minutes minutes

Cook Time 4 hours hours

Total Time 4 hours hours 10 minutes minutes

Servings 8 servings

Calories 200kcal

Equipment

• Slow cooker (6-quart recommended)
• Vegetable scrubber or washcloth
• Fork or knife

Ingredients

• 4 pounds russet potatoes about 6 to 8 medium
• 2 tablespoons olive oil
• Salt to taste

Instructions

• Scrub potatoes clean and dry well.
• Pierce each potato several times with a fork or knife.
• Rub potatoes all over with olive oil and sprinkle generously with salt.
• Place potatoes directly in the slow cooker with no foil and no water.
• Cook on High for 3 to 4 hours or Low for 6 to 8 hours, until a fork slides in easily.
• Serve hot with butter, sour cream, cheese, bacon, chives, or your favorite toppings.

Notes

Choose potatoes that are close in size so they finish at the same time. Do not add water and do not wrap the potatoes in foil; the dry slow cooker method gives better skin texture. Store leftovers in the refrigerator for up to 4 days and reheat in the microwave or oven.

If you try these crock pot baked potatoes, leave a comment below and let me know how you topped them! Always looking for new topping combinations worth trying.

Thanks to the #watertok TikTok trend, I’m totally inspired to revamp the flavor packets stash in my cupboard! Ready to find out how to keep your hydration game fun and flavorful? Here are my top picks for water mixes and their combos to keep you refreshed and hydrated all summer long!

BONUS Money-Saving Hack: Get a reusable water bottle that you’re obsessed with so that you will want to take it everywhere you go!

Get Drink Mix Packets HERE on Walmart.com

Get Free Shipping at Walmart.com with a Free Walmart+ Trial Membership

Are Drink Mixes for Water Healthy?

When it comes to water flavor packets, the scoop is pretty straightforward—many are a fantastic choice for jazzing up your daily H2O without piling on the calories or sugar. Look for mixes that are low in sugar or sugar-free, and those that ditch the artificial sweeteners and colors. These options can be a fantastic way to keep you hydrated and happy, especially if plain water doesn’t excite your taste buds.

However, like with anything, moderation is key. Some mixes might have additives or sugars that you’d want to keep an eye on, especially if you’re sipping multiple packets a day. Checking the ingredients list is your best bet to ensure you’re choosing the healthiest options for your lifestyle.

So, yes, water mixes can be part of a healthy hydration strategy—just opt for the cleaner options and enjoy the flavor boost they bring to your water bottle!

Water Mix Flavor Names Included in our Free Printable HERE:

Is Drinking Water with Sugar-Free Flavor Packets Good For You?

Drinking water with sugar-free flavor packets can definitely be a good choice, especially if it helps you drink more water throughout the day! These packets usually use sweeteners that don’t add calories, making them a great alternative for those looking to manage their calorie intake or cut down on sugar.

However, it’s also wise to consider what’s in those packets beyond just the lack of sugar. Some sugar-free options might contain artificial sweeteners, preservatives, or other additives that some people prefer to avoid. While these ingredients are generally recognized as safe in moderate amounts, everyone’s body reacts differently, so it’s important to pay attention to how these mixes make you feel.

If they help you stay hydrated, and you enjoy them without any adverse effects, they can certainly be a part of a healthy hydration routine. Just make sure to keep an eye on the ingredients list, and maybe rotate them with plenty of plain water to keep things balanced!

What Does Flavored Water Do to Your Body? (Lemons for Example)

Flavored water, whether it’s infused with real lemons or lemon flavoring, can be a fantastic way to boost your hydration game while offering some extra perks for your body.

Lemon-infused water, in particular, is a powerhouse. Adding fresh lemon slices to your water not only jazzes up the taste but also infuses it with natural vitamins and antioxidants. Lemons are famously high in vitamin C, which boosts your immune system and skin health. They also have a natural diuretic effect, which helps your body flush out toxins more efficiently.

If you want your water to taste like the lemonade you know, consider adding a true citrus product like True Lemon. I find mine at my Walmart stores.

As for lemon-flavored water packets, they often mimic the taste of lemons without the actual fruit. These can be beneficial if they encourage you to drink more water throughout the day, especially for those who might not always have fresh fruit handy. However, it’s good to check the ingredients for any artificial additives or sweeteners, which might not offer the same health benefits as real lemons.

In both cases, adding a lemony twist to your water can elevate your hydration and make your daily water intake a lot more enjoyable. Just remember, the more natural the source, the better the benefits!

If I am not adding flavor packets, how do I make fruit-infused water?

Making real fruit-infused water is a refreshing and simple way to spice up your hydration routine without any artificial ingredients or sweeteners.

Here’s how to create your own delicious fruit-infused water with simple ingredients:

• 1. Choose Your Fruit: Almost any fruit will work, but the most popular choices include lemons, limes, oranges, berries, and cucumbers. You can also experiment with herbs like mint or basil for an extra zing.
• 2. Prepare the Fruit: Wash your fruit thoroughly. Slice it thin enough so that the flavors can easily infuse into the water. Berries can be left whole or halved, while citrus fruits are best sliced or cut into wedges.
• 3. Combine and Infuse: Fill a pitcher or a large jar with cold water. Add the sliced fruits and herbs into the water. Use a spoon or a muddler to gently crush the fruit and herbs a bit to release their flavors.
• 4. Let It Sit: Let the mixture sit for a few hours in the refrigerator to infuse. The longer it sits, the more flavorful the water will become. For best results, let it infuse for about 3 to 4 hours or even overnight.
• 5. Serve and Enjoy: Once the water has reached your desired level of flavor, it’s ready to drink. You can strain out the fruits and herbs or leave them in to enjoy along with the water.
• 6. Refill: Don’t throw away the fruit after one use— you can often refill the container with water a few times before the flavors begin to diminish.

Creating fruit-infused water is a fun and healthy way to stay hydrated, and it allows you to play around with different flavor combinations based on your preferences and seasonal fruits. It’s a natural, sweet treat that feels indulgent without any of the guilt!

That was years ago. These days I plan ahead, I keep a rotation of dinners we all actually like, and I lean hard on recipes that are simple enough to pull off on a Tuesday after a long day. Over the years I’ve built up a pretty solid collection of go-to weeknight dinners — and I’ve rounded up 50 of my favorites right here so you’ve always got somewhere to start when that “what’s for dinner?” panic hits at 5pm.

These are real recipes that have been made in my actual kitchen and eaten by my actual family. Some take 20 minutes, some cook all day in the crockpot, some are sheet pan situations where you just throw everything in the oven and walk away. That’s my bar for putting them on this list — if my people ate it and asked for it again, it’s in.

Wendy’s Copycat Chili Recipe

If you’ve ever sat in a Wendy’s parking lot with a paper cup of chili and thought “I could probably make this at home,” you were right. This copycat recipe nails the flavor so well it’s almost uncanny — the combination of ground beef, kidney beans, tomato sauce, and a very specific blend of spices makes something that tastes exactly like what you’d get through the drive-through, except you made a whole pot of it for a fraction of the cost.

What I love about this recipe is how far it stretches. Chili is one of those magical meals you can serve for dinner, pack for lunch the next day, pour over baked potatoes or hot dogs, or pile on top of Fritos for a quick Frito pie. You could realistically feed your family twice off one pot and still have leftovers.

My husband is legitimately obsessed with Wendy’s chili. He was skeptical when I told him I was making a copycat version at home, but after the first bowl he admitted it was better than the original. That is the highest praise he gives for anything I cook and I will absolutely be bragging about it forever.

Get the full recipe here.

Beef and Cheese Enchiladas

Beef and cheese enchiladas are one of those dinners I can make completely on autopilot at this point, which makes them absolutely perfect for weeknights. Ground beef, refried beans, enchilada sauce, and lots of cheese — rolled up in flour tortillas and baked until bubbly and golden on top. Simple ingredients, huge payoff.

The refried beans are actually the secret to making these really satisfying. They give the filling a creaminess that holds everything together and makes each enchilada feel genuinely substantial. I’ve made these without the beans and they’re fine, but with the beans they go from good to great.

This is a dinner that requires zero drama and produces zero leftovers at my house. I usually make a big pan and there’s never anything left. If you want to make it even easier on yourself, prep the filling earlier in the day and just assemble and bake when you’re ready for dinner.

Get the full recipe here.

Shredded Beef Enchiladas: Crock Pot Dinner

These shredded beef enchiladas are the more impressive older sibling of the ground beef version. A chuck roast spends the day in the crockpot until it’s fall-apart tender, then you shred it and use it as the filling for enchiladas smothered in red sauce and melted cheese. The crockpot does the heavy lifting — you just do the fun part at the end.

The slow-cooked shredded beef has a depth of flavor that you simply can’t get from ground beef. It’s richer, more tender, and feels like a restaurant-quality filling. This is the recipe I make when I want weeknight dinner to feel like more of an event without actually spending more time in the kitchen.

Yes, there’s more assembly involved than a standard dump-and-go crockpot meal, but once the beef is shredded the rolling goes pretty fast. I usually do this on days I work from home when I have a little more flexibility. The results are absolutely worth the extra step and the table always gets quiet in the best way.

Get the full recipe here.

Easy, Inexpensive Mongolian Beef

Mongolian beef is one of those takeout staples that seems like it would be complicated to make at home, but it’s actually incredibly straightforward. Flank steak sliced thin, coated in cornstarch, and cooked in a sweet soy-ginger sauce until it’s sticky and glossy and completely irresistible over white rice.

This version is inexpensive and comes together in about 20 minutes once your prep is done. The sauce is the star — soy sauce, brown sugar, garlic, ginger, and a little hoisin come together into something that tastes like you absolutely paid someone to make it. My family thinks we ordered takeout every time I put this on the table.

I’ve started playing along and telling them it came from a restaurant, which makes them appreciate it even more. The reality is it cost me about a third of what takeout would and I made it in my pajamas, so honestly everyone wins. This one is in the permanent weeknight rotation and has been for years.

Get the full recipe here.

Easy Pulled Beef Sandwich Recipe

A chuck roast braised low and slow in a mixture of beef broth and Coca-Cola until it practically shreds itself — this pulled beef is one of the most versatile things I make in my crockpot. Pile it on hoagie rolls, stuff it in quesadillas, serve it over mashed potatoes. Whatever you do with it, it’s going to be delicious.

The Coca-Cola isn’t something you can taste in the final product, but it tenderizes the meat beautifully and adds a subtle sweetness to the braising liquid that makes the beef incredibly flavorful. It’s one of those technique things that sounds a little unusual until you taste the result and then you completely understand.

One roast feeds my family dinner and usually gives us enough for at least two more meals throughout the week. I’ll do beef sandwiches the first night, then use the leftovers for tacos or loaded baked potatoes later. It’s one of the best uses of a crockpot I know and the cost per serving is genuinely impressive.

Get the full recipe here.

Beef Stroganoff in Crock Pot

Beef stroganoff is the kind of dinner that feels fancy enough to be special but is actually completely effortless when you let the crockpot do the work. Tender strips of beef in a creamy mushroom sauce served over egg noodles — this is real comfort food at its very best, and it asks almost nothing of you.

The key to getting that rich, velvety sauce is adding the sour cream at the very end, off the heat, so it doesn’t curdle. Everything else goes in the crockpot in the morning and cooks all day. By the time you walk in the door, your whole house smells incredible and dinner is essentially done.

I’ve made this recipe enough times that my family starts requesting it in October and doesn’t stop until the crockpot gets put away in the spring. It’s cold-weather comfort food at its finest, and the egg noodles are the perfect vehicle for all that creamy, savory sauce. One of my all-time favorites.

Get the full recipe here.

Philly Cheese Steak Crock Pot Recipe

Everything you love about a Philly cheesesteak — the tender beef, the sweet peppers and onions, the melted provolone — without having to stand at the stove. A beef round steak with Italian seasoning, peppers, and onions slow cooks all day until it’s incredibly tender and deeply flavorful. Then you pile it onto hoagie rolls and broil with cheese for one minute.

When it’s done, you have a legitimate cheesesteak experience that you made in your own kitchen for a fraction of restaurant prices. The beef shreds beautifully and the peppers and onions get soft and sweet and caramelized from the long cook time. It’s one of those recipes where the slow cooker does something the stovetop simply cannot replicate.

My husband puts this in his top five dinners I make, which is high praise considering how many dinners I’ve made over the years. He grew up eating real Philly cheesesteaks and he still insists this one holds up. That kind of endorsement is what keeps a recipe in the permanent rotation at our house.

Get the full recipe here.

Philly Cheesesteak Sloppy Joes

What happens when you combine a sloppy joe with a Philly cheesesteak? Something that sounds a little chaotic but is actually one of the most crowd-pleasing sandwiches I’ve ever made. Ground beef cooked with peppers, onions, and Worcestershire sauce in a savory, slightly saucy mixture, piled onto toasted buns and topped with melted provolone.

This whole dinner comes together in about 30 minutes and uses ingredients you most likely already have on hand. The Worcestershire sauce and beef broth give the filling a real depth of flavor that makes it taste like something you’d order at a restaurant rather than something you threw together on a Tuesday night after a long day.

My kids fight over the last one every single time I make this. I’ve started making extra because the math never works out in my favor if I don’t. It’s messy, it’s cheesy, and it’s exactly the kind of dinner a busy weeknight calls for. On the table in 30 minutes and everyone is happy.

Get the full recipe here.

Philly Cheese Steak Sliders

These sliders take everything great about a Philly cheesesteak and pack it into a Hawaiian roll, then bake the whole pan together until the cheese is perfectly melted and the tops are golden and buttery. They work for weeknight dinner, game day, or feeding a crowd — honestly any occasion where people are hungry and you want something that disappears fast.

Shaved steak, caramelized peppers and onions, and melted provolone all tucked into those soft, slightly sweet rolls is a combination that is almost impossible to stop eating. I’ve made two pans for a group of eight people and there wasn’t a single slider left. They go that fast.

The butter-herb topping that gets brushed over the rolls before baking is what takes these from good to outstanding. It soaks into the tops as they bake and makes them so rich and fragrant and flavorful. If you’re feeding a crowd, double the recipe — you will absolutely be glad you did.

Get the full recipe here.

Beef Burrito Casserole Dinner Recipe

All the flavors of a beef burrito in one easy casserole — ground beef, refried beans, flour tortillas, salsa, sour cream, and cheese layered together and baked until bubbly. This is the dinner I reach for when I want something that feels put-together but takes about 20 minutes of actual effort.

The layering is what makes this feel special. The tortillas soften as they absorb the flavors around them, and when you scoop it out, you get a little of everything in every bite — creamy beans, seasoned beef, melted cheese. It’s like a deconstructed burrito that’s somehow even more satisfying than the original.

This casserole reheats beautifully, which makes it one of my favorite make-ahead dinners. I’ll put it together earlier in the day and just bake it when we’re ready to eat, or make a full pan on Sunday and heat up portions throughout the week. It keeps well and tastes just as good the next day.

Get the full recipe here.

Beef and Noodle Casserole Recipe

Ground beef, egg noodles, cream cheese, and a tomato-based sauce baked together into a bubbling, cheesy casserole that is the definition of weeknight comfort food. This recipe takes familiar pantry ingredients and turns them into something that tastes like way more effort than it actually is.

The cream cheese is what sets this apart from a basic beef noodle bake. It adds a richness and subtle creaminess to the sauce that makes every bite feel really satisfying. Combined with shredded cheddar on top that gets golden in the oven, this casserole hits all the right notes — creamy, cheesy, hearty, comforting.

My family cleans the pan every time. I serve it with a simple green salad and garlic bread and it feels like a complete, real dinner on the table without a lot of fuss. This is one I come back to again and again especially in the fall and winter when I want something warm and filling that practically makes itself.

Get the full recipe here.

Beef Stew Recipe

There are a handful of recipes in my life that I consider close to perfect, and this beef stew is one of them. Chunks of beef, carrots, potatoes, and celery slow cooked in a rich, savory broth all day in the crockpot — the kind of dinner that makes your whole house smell so incredible that your family starts asking what’s for dinner around 2pm.

The key to great beef stew is browning the beef first before it goes in the crockpot. It takes an extra five minutes but adds a depth of flavor to the broth that you simply can’t get by skipping the step. The Worcestershire sauce and tomato paste in the broth add richness that makes the stew taste like it’s been simmering for hours — because it has.

This is a non-negotiable in my fall and winter rotation. I make it on Sundays when the temperature drops and it sets the tone for the whole week. Serve it with crusty bread for dipping and you have one of the most satisfying meals imaginable. One of the truly great ones in my recipe collection.

Get the full recipe here.

Instant Pot Mongolian Beef with Fried Rice

The Instant Pot makes Mongolian beef with fried rice possible on even the most chaotic weeknights. The beef cooks tender in the pressure cooker in that sticky, sweet soy-ginger sauce, and the fried rice comes together right alongside it for a complete meal that feels like takeout but costs a fraction of what delivery would.

What makes this recipe so useful is that you’re getting the main dish and the side dish in one coordinated process — less cleanup, less time spent juggling multiple pots, and the whole meal is done in under 30 minutes. It tastes like something you ordered from a really good restaurant and I mean that genuinely.

This is one of my most-used Instant Pot recipes without question. Every time I make it I’m reminded of how much that kitchen gadget has changed weeknight cooking at our house. If you’re looking for a good reason to use your Instant Pot more, this is it.

Get the full recipe here.

Easy Chicken Casserole with Stuffing

This casserole has been in my regular dinner rotation for so many years it feels like an old friend. Chicken, cream of chicken soup, sour cream, and Stovetop stuffing baked together into something cozy and completely satisfying that comes together with almost no effort at all. Humble ingredients that add up to something genuinely wonderful.

The stuffing on top bakes into a beautiful golden crust while the chicken and creamy sauce underneath stay soft and moist. Every scoop has that perfect combination of textures — tender chicken, rich cream sauce, and a slightly crisp stuffing topping — that makes it so incredibly craveable.

I’ve brought this to potlucks, made it for sick friends, served it for church dinners, and made it on random Tuesdays when I just need an easy win. It works in every situation and it always gets eaten enthusiastically. If you’re looking for a go-to casserole that is genuinely simple and genuinely good, this is the one.

Get the full recipe here.

Crock Pot Chicken Chili Recipe

White chicken chili made with great northern beans and a creamy broth is one of my all-time favorite dinners. Chicken breasts go in the crockpot with chicken broth, white beans, green chiles, onion, and a simple spice blend, and by dinnertime you have a bowl of something really, genuinely wonderful that tastes far more complex than the effort involved.

Unlike red chili, white chicken chili is mild enough for the whole family but still deeply flavorful and satisfying. A spoonful of cream cheese stirred in at the end makes the broth creamy and rich without being heavy. I serve it topped with shredded Monterey Jack, a dollop of sour cream, and jalapeño slices for the adults.

This is probably my most-requested fall dinner. My kids eat it without complaint, my husband adds hot sauce to his, and I’m happy because it took me about eight minutes of active work to put together. Cornbread on the side and dinner is completely, happily handled.

Get the full recipe here.

Easy Italian Pasta & Chicken Dish Recipe

Rotini pasta, cubed chicken, jarred Alfredo sauce, and mozzarella cheese baked together into a creamy, cheesy pasta dish that is legitimately one of the easiest dinners in my arsenal. This is the recipe I make when I’m tired and hungry and need something that feels like a real dinner but requires almost zero thought.

Italian seasoning and garlic powder give this a big flavor punch that makes it taste more complex than the ingredient list suggests. You can use rotisserie chicken here if you want to cut down on prep time even further — it works beautifully and makes dinner even faster on those nights when you’re truly running on empty.

I’ve made this for potlucks, for new mothers who need a meal dropped off, and for my own family on nights when I just need something reliable. It always gets eaten, always gets complimented, and takes me about 15 minutes of actual work. That’s my definition of a perfect recipe.

Get the full recipe here.

Crockpot Chicken Sandwiches

Ranch-seasoned chicken with cream cheese and bacon, slow cooked all day and then shredded and piled onto buns — crack chicken sandwiches are in my permanent top five most-made dinners. The name is accurate. Once you make these, you completely understand why people are so obsessed with this combination.

Three main ingredients go in the crockpot in the morning — chicken, cream cheese, and a packet of ranch seasoning — and you come home to something that’s already pulled and perfectly seasoned and ready to go. Stir in some cooked, crumbled bacon at the end and pile it onto soft buns.

My family eats these without a single complaint, which in a house with picky kids and strong opinions about everything is genuinely impressive. I serve them with a simple coleslaw on the side or just some chips and call it dinner. Easy, cheap, and absolutely delicious every single time without fail.

Get the full recipe here.

Crockpot Shredded Chicken Tacos

Chicken breasts, a packet of taco seasoning, and a can of Rotel — into the crockpot they go. By dinnertime you have tender, perfectly seasoned shredded chicken that can become tacos, quesadillas, nachos, burrito bowls, or whatever your family is in the mood for. This is my Tuesday morning lifesaver, made at least twice a month.

The beauty of this recipe is its total flexibility. The chicken is well-seasoned on its own, but it works as a base for just about anything. Set out taco shells and toppings for a traditional taco night, put out tortillas and let everyone build quesadillas, or serve it simply over rice with avocado. Every version is great.

I’ve made this probably a hundred times and it has never once failed me. The chicken shreds incredibly easily after cooking in the crockpot all day, and the Rotel adds just the right amount of tomato flavor and mild heat. This is one of those dump-and-go recipes that delivers far more than what you put into it.

Get the full recipe here.

Buffalo Chicken Crock Pot Sandwiches

Three ingredients — chicken, cream cheese, and Frank’s RedHot Buffalo Sauce — go into the crockpot in the morning and come out as the most incredible spicy, creamy shredded chicken you can imagine. Pile it on buns or serve it on top of baked potatoes. Either way, it’s spicy, creamy, and gone before you can blink.

The cream cheese mellows the heat from the buffalo sauce and makes the filling rich and creamy without being overpowering. If your family likes things on the milder side, use less buffalo sauce; if they love heat, add more. It’s an easy ratio to adjust and the result is always outstanding.

I’ve served this at parties, tailgates, and regular Tuesday dinners, and it always gets compliments and recipe requests. Something about buffalo chicken just gets people excited. This version is so easy and so good that once you make it, it earns a permanent spot in the rotation without any debate.

Get the full recipe here.

Crockpot Hawaiian Chicken Recipe

Sweet, sticky pineapple-soy chicken that slow cooks all day and is served over rice with sesame seeds and green onions — this Hawaiian chicken is one of those recipes that makes dinner feel a little special on an ordinary weeknight. The sauce is a perfect balance of sweet and savory and the chicken gets so tender it practically melts.

Pineapple juice, soy sauce, brown sugar, and garlic are the base of the sauce, and as it cooks all day it reduces slightly and coats the chicken beautifully. If you want a thicker sauce, stir in a cornstarch slurry at the end and cook on high for about fifteen minutes. It’s a simple step that makes a noticeable difference.

This is one that earns real compliments. When I serve it over a mound of white rice with sesame seeds on top, it genuinely looks like restaurant food. My kids love the sweetness of the pineapple sauce, my husband loves how easy it is for me to make on a weeknight, and I love that everyone is happy. Everyone wins.

Get the full recipe here.

Slow Cooker Crack Chicken Pasta

The name crack chicken gets used a lot, but this pasta version is the most addictive thing I’ve made with it. Chicken, cream cheese, ranch seasoning, cheddar, and bacon all combined with pasta in the slow cooker into a cheesy, creamy, completely irresistible dinner that my kids have requested more times than any other meal I cook.

The pasta gets added toward the end of the cooking time and absorbs all that creamy, ranch-flavored sauce as it finishes. By the time it’s done, everything is coated in this rich, cheesy mixture that is genuinely hard to stop eating. I always make a full pot and I always run out. Every single time.

I’ve made this for family dinners, potlucks, and church events, and it gets the same reaction every time — immediate quiet because everyone is too busy eating to talk. If you haven’t tried crack chicken pasta yet, this recipe is the place to start. Just make sure you have enough for seconds.

Get the full recipe here.

Chicken Bacon Ranch Casserole

Chicken, bacon, ranch seasoning, Velveeta, and spaghetti baked together in a casserole that sounds a little unusual until you taste it. Then you completely understand why this one earns a permanent spot in the rotation. It’s cheesy, savory, a little smoky from the bacon, and completely satisfying in every bite.

Velveeta gets a bad reputation sometimes, but in casseroles like this it is genuinely the right tool for the job. It melts completely into the sauce and gives you that smooth, creamy, stick-to-the-noodles consistency that makes every bite rich and satisfying. Combined with real cheddar on top, you get the best of both worlds.

I was skeptical the first time I made this. The ingredient list is a little unconventional. But the first bite converted me completely and I’ve been making it ever since. This recipe has been a reader favorite for years and it continues to be one I reach for whenever I need something that I know will be eaten without any drama.

Get the full recipe here.

Easy Chicken Tetrazzini

Tetrazzini sounds like something you’d order at a fancy Italian restaurant, but it’s actually one of the most approachable baked pasta dishes you can make at home. Shredded chicken, thin spaghetti, a creamy Parmesan sauce, and a buttery breadcrumb topping — all baked together until golden and bubbling and completely irresistible.

This is a great way to use up leftover rotisserie chicken, which makes it even faster to put together on a weeknight. The sauce comes together in about ten minutes on the stovetop, then you combine everything, top with breadcrumbs and Parmesan, and bake. The result is pure comfort food that feels elevated without being the least bit difficult.

My family loves this dinner and it feeds a crowd easily. I’ve made it for regular Tuesday dinners, church potlucks, and for friends who needed meals dropped off. It travels well, reheats well, and gets eaten enthusiastically every single time. That’s a recipe that has absolutely earned its place in the permanent rotation.

Get the full recipe here.

Crack Chicken Instant Pot Recipe

For the days when you forgot to start the crockpot, the Instant Pot is here to save dinner. This crack chicken recipe gives you the same creamy, ranch-seasoned, cheesy shredded chicken in a fraction of the time — we’re talking ready in under 30 minutes from start to plate. It is a genuine dinner emergency rescue.

Chicken breasts, cream cheese, and ranch seasoning go into the Instant Pot, pressure cook for 15 minutes, shred, stir in cheddar and bacon, and you’re done. Pile it on buns, serve it over rice, stuff it into baked potatoes — it works beautifully every way you serve it.

This recipe has saved my dinner plans on more occasions than I can count. When the afternoon gets away from me and I realize I never started anything, the Instant Pot crack chicken is what I turn to. Fast, easy, and reliably delicious — exactly what a weeknight rescue recipe needs to be.

Get the full recipe here.

Easy Chicken Bacon Fettuccine Alfredo Casserole

This casserole takes chicken fettuccine Alfredo — already a crowd-pleaser — and makes it even better by adding bacon and baking everything together in the oven. The result is a creamy, rich pasta dish with a slightly golden top and a flavor combination that makes everyone at the table genuinely happy.

You can make this with homemade Alfredo sauce or jarred — either works well. The bacon brings a smoky saltiness that plays beautifully against the creamy sauce, and the baking step gives you those slightly chewy edges and golden top that you just can’t get from pasta cooked on the stovetop alone. It’s worth the extra step.

My sister asked me for this recipe the first time I made it for her, which is one of my all-time best recipe endorsements. I’ve been making it ever since and it never disappoints. If your family likes Alfredo anything, they are absolutely going to love this casserole.

Get the full recipe here.

Cheesy Tortellini Casserole Recipe

Cheese tortellini layered with Alfredo sauce and marinara, topped with mozzarella and baked until hot and bubbly with a golden, melted cheese top — this is one of those six-ingredient dinners that delivers way above its weight class. It tastes like something you spent real time on, and you absolutely did not.

The combination of creamy Alfredo and tangy marinara in the same dish creates a sauce that is more interesting than either one would be on its own. Every bite of the tortellini is coated in this slightly creamy, slightly tomatoey blend that is genuinely craveable. The cheese pull when you scoop it out is deeply satisfying.

This casserole goes together in about ten minutes of prep and bakes in under 30. I make it when I want a dinner that feels like more than just pasta but don’t have the time or energy for something elaborate. It’s become a regular in my rotation and one of the recipes I recommend most when people ask for easy weeknight ideas.

Get the full recipe here.

Four Cheese Baked Mostaccioli Recipe

This is the pasta dish I make when I want to really impress people. Mostaccioli pasta baked with Italian sausage, ground beef, and four kinds of cheese in a rich, deeply seasoned tomato sauce — it’s a complete meal in one pan that tastes like Sunday dinner even if you’re making it on a Wednesday night.

The four-cheese combination is what makes this special. Ricotta, mozzarella, Parmesan, and Romano all contribute something different to the final dish. Together they create a richness and complexity that makes this feel more sophisticated than a regular baked pasta, even though the process itself is really very straightforward.

This is my go-to when I’m feeding a crowd, hosting family, or just want a dinner that generates real enthusiasm at the table. It feeds a lot of people, holds well in the oven if timing gets tricky, and reheats beautifully the next day. One of my personal all-time favorites in this entire collection.

Get the full recipe here.

Spaghetti Casserole Dinner Recipe

This spaghetti casserole has a secret ingredient that raises some eyebrows the first time people hear it — cream cheese and cottage cheese mixed right into the pasta before baking. It sounds unusual, I know. But the texture and flavor that combination creates is genuinely special, and this recipe converts skeptics every single time.

The cream cheese and cottage cheese layer creates an almost lasagna-like interior that makes the casserole far more satisfying than regular baked spaghetti. Combined with seasoned ground beef and tomato sauce on top and melted cheddar across the whole thing, every bite is rich, layered, and really, really good.

Just make this. I know the ingredient list might give you a moment’s pause, but trust the process. I’ve served it at potlucks where people have asked what restaurant I got it from. When I tell them it’s a simple casserole I threw together, they always ask for the recipe. It’s one of the hidden gems in my collection.

Get the full recipe here.

Crockpot Baked Spaghetti

Baked spaghetti in the crockpot sounds like it shouldn’t work, but it absolutely does. Layers of spaghetti, meat sauce, cream cheese, and mozzarella all slow cook together into a rich, cheesy pasta situation that my kids consider one of the best dinners I make. If your family likes spaghetti, this version takes it to a completely different level.

The layering is what makes this special. The cream cheese softens and blends into the pasta and sauce as it cooks, creating a creaminess throughout that regular baked spaghetti simply doesn’t have. The mozzarella on top melts into a gooey, stretchy layer that makes every scoop feel indulgent and satisfying.

This is a great recipe for busy families because you can set it up in the morning and let it do its thing all day. By dinnertime you have a complete meal that’s been slowly perfecting itself for hours. Serve it with garlic bread and a salad and dinner is completely handled without any last-minute scrambling.

Get the full recipe here.

Crockpot Lasagna Easy Dinner Recipe

I was skeptical about crockpot lasagna for an embarrassingly long time. Then I made it and realized I had been missing out. No boiling noodles, no layering in a hot pan, no timing gymnastics — just layers of lasagna in the crockpot that come out tender, cheesy, and completely delicious.

The noodles cook right in the crockpot, softening as they absorb the sauce and moisture from the meat and cheese layers. They don’t come out with crispy edges like oven lasagna does, but in exchange you get perfectly cooked noodles every time with essentially zero effort on a weeknight morning.

My family thinks I spent hours on this. I will never tell them the truth. This is my secret weapon dinner for nights when I want something that feels impressive but isn’t going to cost me more than ten minutes of actual work. Set-it-and-forget-it lasagna is real and it is genuinely wonderful.

Get the full recipe here.

Crockpot Ravioli Casserole Recipe

Frozen ravioli, Italian sausage, jarred pasta sauce, and mozzarella — layered in the crockpot and cooked until everything is bubbling and hot and the cheese is perfectly melted. This might be the easiest four-ingredient dinner I make on a regular basis, and it tastes like something that took real effort.

The ravioli cooks right in the crockpot without any pre-boiling, which is one of my favorite things about this recipe. By the time it’s done, the pasta has absorbed some of the sauce and each ravioli is tender and full of flavor. The Italian sausage adds a savory richness that makes this feel like a hearty, complete meal.

On nights when I have absolutely no mental energy left for cooking, this is what I make. Layer it, turn it on, walk away. Dinner is handled. I am a genuine advocate for recipes that require minimal brainpower and still deliver a result that your family is happy about, and this one does exactly that.

Get the full recipe here.

Easy Tuna Noodle Casserole Recipe

Tuna noodle casserole has been feeding families for generations, and there’s a reason it never goes away — it’s cheap, fast, filling, and kid-friendly in a way that very few meals are. This version uses macaroni and cheese as the base, which makes it even easier and even more popular with the under-ten crowd.

Cream of celery soup, tuna, and peas mixed into mac and cheese, topped with crushed potato chips and baked until crispy and golden on top. The potato chip topping sounds like a gimmick but it absolutely isn’t — it adds crunch and salt and something fun that makes this casserole feel special rather than just practical.

This is a budget meal that doesn’t feel like one. I make it on weeks when I’m trying to keep grocery costs in check and it never feels like deprivation — it just feels like a cozy, familiar dinner that everyone eats happily. If you grew up on tuna casserole, this version will take you right back.

Get the full recipe here.

Walking Tacos

Walking tacos are exactly what they sound like — a bag of Doritos split open down the side and loaded with seasoned ground beef, shredded cheese, lettuce, tomato, and sour cream. You eat it with a fork right from the bag, and yes, it is every bit as fun as it sounds.

Kids absolutely lose their minds for walking tacos. There’s something about the eating experience — customizing your own bag, the Dorito-taco flavor combination, the novelty of eating out of a chip bag — that makes this dinner feel like an event. I make it on Friday nights when everyone’s in a good mood and nobody wants to do dishes.

Walking tacos are also endlessly customizable. Use Cool Ranch Doritos instead of Nacho Cheese for a different flavor spin, swap in refried beans for a vegetarian option, or set out a whole topping bar and let everyone go. It’s the most fun dinner in my regular rotation, no question.

Get the full recipe here.

Weeknight Deep-Dish Taco Squares Casserole Recipe

This taco squares casserole is a recipe I’ve been making for years and it has a certain nostalgic, old-school quality that I genuinely love. Bisquick crust, seasoned ground beef, a creamy sour cream layer, and plenty of cheese baked into squares that deliver everything taco night could be in easy casserole form.

The Bisquick crust bakes into something slightly bready and soft, like a deep-dish pizza crust but lighter and a little fluffier. The layers above it are all the familiar taco flavors — beef, cheese, tomato, sour cream — and the whole thing is sliced into squares and served topped with fresh lettuce and salsa.

This is a recipe that wins over picky eaters without much effort. The familiar taco flavors in a casserole format feel approachable and fun, and it’s one of those dinners that disappears fast. I’ve been making this since my oldest was little and it’s one of those family favorites that has genuinely stood the test of time.

Get the full recipe here.

Pork Shoulder Slow Cooker Enchiladas with Poblano Cream Sauce

This is the recipe I make when I want dinner to feel genuinely special. Slow-cooked pork shoulder shredded and rolled into enchiladas, then smothered in a smoky, creamy poblano cream sauce that is unlike any enchilada sauce you’ve ever had from a jar. It tastes like something you’d order at a really exceptional Mexican restaurant.

The poblano cream sauce is what makes this dish memorable and completely worth making. Roasted poblano peppers blended with cream, garlic, and chicken broth into something luxuriously silky and full of subtle, smoky heat. Once you make this sauce you will find other things to put it on — it’s that good on its own.

Yes, this takes more effort than most of my weeknight recipes, but so much of it is hands-off slow cooker time. The active work is maybe 20-25 minutes total. If you have a weekend day to make the pork ahead of time, you can assemble the enchiladas on a weeknight and it becomes very manageable. Absolutely, completely worth it.

Get the full recipe here.

Taco Crescent Bake

Crescent roll dough pressed into the bottom of a baking dish, topped with seasoned ground beef, shredded cheese, and Rotel, then baked until golden and bubbly — and then piled with crushed Doritos, lettuce, sour cream, and all your favorite taco toppings. Taco night reimagined in the best possible way.

The crescent roll base is buttery and soft and creates the perfect foundation for all those taco toppings. My kids are obsessed with this dinner because it hits all the same notes as taco night but somehow feels even more fun. The Doritos on top add crunch that makes every bite genuinely exciting.

This comes together in about 25 minutes from start to finish and tastes like you planned something really fun. I put it in the oven, set out the toppings in little bowls, and by the time it comes out everyone is gathered and ready and dinner is completely done. A weeknight winner, every time.

Get the full recipe here.

Steak Fajitas Restaurant Style

These steak fajitas taste exactly like what you’d get at your favorite Mexican restaurant, and they’re surprisingly achievable on a weeknight. Flat iron steak marinated in a bold combination of lime juice, garlic, cumin, and chili powder, then cooked hot and fast with colorful peppers and sweet onions until everything is perfectly caramelized and fragrant.

The marinade does most of the work here, and even an hour of marinating time makes a significant difference in the flavor and tenderness of the steak. If you have more time, marinate overnight — the result will be even better. The key to getting that restaurant-quality sear is a very hot pan and not overcrowding, so the meat sears rather than steams.

Set out warm tortillas, shredded cheese, sour cream, guacamole, and salsa, and let everyone build their own. There’s something about fajita night where the whole table feels lively and engaged and happy. This is one of those dinners that’s more than just food — it’s cheaper and honestly more fun than going out.

Get the full recipe here.

Mexican Shrimp Fajitas Recipe

Shrimp fajitas are one of those dinners that feels special and a little indulgent but comes together in about 15 minutes. Shrimp seasoned with cumin, smoked paprika, garlic, and lime, cooked with colorful bell peppers and onions until everything is perfectly caramelized and fragrant. Gorgeous to look at and absolutely delicious to eat.

Shrimp cooks so fast that the active cooking time here is maybe eight to ten minutes once everything is prepped and your pan is hot. The trick is not to overcook the shrimp — they go from perfect to rubbery very quickly, so pull them the moment they’re pink and opaque. A hot pan and quick attention are all you need.

Serve these in warm flour tortillas with avocado, cotija cheese, a squeeze of fresh lime, and a little sour cream. This dinner looks stunning — the bright colors of the peppers and the pink shrimp make it genuinely beautiful on the plate. It’s the kind of meal that feels like a treat even on a regular Tuesday night.

Get the full recipe here.

Crockpot Enchilada Soup

All the flavors of enchiladas in a warm, filling soup that practically makes itself in the crockpot. Chicken, beans, corn, enchilada sauce, and chicken broth come together into something that smells so incredible cooking all day that you start getting genuinely hungry around 2pm and find yourself setting the table by 4.

This soup is deeply satisfying in a way that’s surprising for something this simple to put together. The enchilada sauce gives the broth a rich, slightly smoky flavor that makes the whole thing taste like real, made-from-scratch Mexican food. The beans add body and protein that make it filling enough to be a complete meal on its own.

I top mine with shredded Monterey Jack, a spoonful of sour cream, a handful of tortilla chips, and a few sliced jalapeños. Serve it with warm cornbread on the side and you have a dinner that is cozy, satisfying, and genuinely excellent. This one goes on the fall and winter rotation every year without question.

Get the full recipe here.

Sheet Pan Oven Quesadillas

Making quesadillas one at a time in a skillet while the rest of your family waits is a thing of the past once you discover oven quesadillas on a sheet pan. Line them up, bake, and have a whole batch ready at the same time. This method has completely transformed quesadilla night at our house and I will never go back.

The oven gives you a perfectly crisp, golden exterior on both sides without any flipping or babysitting. You can fit four to six quesadillas on a sheet pan at once and they’re all done at the same time, which means you actually get to eat with your family instead of standing at the stove for twenty minutes.

Use whatever fillings your family loves — cheese and chicken, black beans and corn, peppers and steak. The sheet pan method works for all of them. Set out sour cream, guacamole, and salsa and call it dinner. Fast, fun, and my kids request this one at least once a week.

Get the full recipe here.

Pork Chop and Hashbrown Casserole Dinner Recipe

Pork chops baked right on top of a creamy, cheesy hashbrown casserole — this is one-pan dinner at its most satisfying. Everything goes in the same baking dish, goes in the oven, and comes out an hour later as a complete meal. This is the kind of old-school casserole recipe that exists for a very good reason.

The hashbrown base is creamy and rich from cream of mushroom soup, sour cream, and cheddar cheese, and as the pork chops bake on top, their juices drip down into the hashbrowns and add even more flavor. The pork comes out tender and the hashbrowns underneath are soft and creamy and completely indulgent.

This is a budget-friendly dinner that absolutely does not taste like one. Pork chops are affordable, frozen hashbrowns are affordable, and the whole thing makes a meal that feels hearty and substantial without any fuss. I’ve been making this for years and it remains one of my family’s most-requested dinners.

Get the full recipe here.

Slow Cooker Pot Roast

If there’s one recipe that defines slow cooker cooking for me, it’s pot roast. A chuck roast with carrots, potatoes, and onions cooked low and slow all day in a savory broth until everything is fork-tender and the house smells like the best thing you’ve ever walked into — this is the recipe.

The key to perfect slow cooker pot roast is searing the beef first. It takes an extra five minutes but creates a crust that keeps the juices locked in and adds a depth of flavor to the braising liquid that you simply cannot get by skipping it. The resulting broth makes the most incredible natural gravy with no extra work required.

This is my Sunday dinner recipe, my cold-weather recipe, my “it’s been a rough week and we all need something warm and nourishing” recipe. It goes together in ten minutes in the morning and by dinnertime you have something genuinely beautiful on the table. One of the very best things I make, period.

Get the full recipe here.

Slow Cooker Pulled Pork

Pulled pork from the slow cooker is one of the best bang-for-your-buck meals I know. A pork shoulder rubbed with a smoky, savory spice blend and slow cooked for eight to ten hours until it’s fall-apart tender and shreds with just two forks. Make it once and eat off it for days in a completely different way each time.

The first night it’s pulled pork sandwiches with coleslaw. The second night it’s BBQ nachos or loaded baked potatoes. The third time it appears it’s in quesadillas or tacos or fried rice. One slow cooker of pork can fuel an entire week of lunches and dinners, which makes it one of the most practical things I cook.

You need very little active time for this recipe — the rub takes five minutes, then the crockpot does all the work while you live your life. The meat is incredibly flavorful and moist, and it keeps beautifully in the refrigerator all week. This is the kind of recipe that makes you feel like you really have your act together.

Get the full recipe here.

Maid Rite Recipe in the Crock Pot

If you’re from Iowa, you already know exactly what a Maid Rite is and you’re already excited. If you’re not from here, let me introduce you: a loose meat sandwich where seasoned ground beef is spooned onto a hamburger bun and eaten like a sloppy joe but without any sauce. Simple, unpretentious, and completely delicious.

This crockpot version makes it even more hands-off. The ground beef simmers all day in a simple mixture of beef broth and seasonings, developing a deep, savory flavor you just can’t get from quickly browning it on the stove. The texture is perfectly crumbly and loose, exactly the way a Maid Rite should be.

My kids have loved these since they were little. We pile them on soft hamburger buns with mustard, pickles, and onions — very Iowa style — and the table gets quiet in the best way. If you’ve never had a loose meat sandwich, this is your gateway. You’ll understand immediately why it’s a Midwest classic.

Get the full recipe here.

Slow Cooker Pork Roast Dinner Recipe

This slow cooker pork roast in a balsamic-honey glaze is what I make when I want a dinner that feels elevated and impressive but requires almost no effort at all. The combination of balsamic vinegar, honey, garlic, and thyme creates a glaze that is tangy, sweet, and deeply savory all at once — and it smells incredible.

A pork loin or pork shoulder goes in the crockpot with the glaze and slow cooks until it’s incredibly tender and infused with all those flavors. By the time it’s done, the glaze has reduced around it into something that’s almost like a concentrated sauce — rich and complex and really special on a plate.

This is the recipe I reach for when we have people over or when I want a dinner that feels like real effort on a night when I didn’t put in real effort. Serve it with mashed potatoes or roasted vegetables and the whole meal looks like something from a cooking show. The crockpot did most of the work; I just accepted the compliments.

Get the full recipe here.

Hot Ham and Cheese Rolls

These hot ham and cheese rolls are one of the easiest, most crowd-pleasing dinners in my whole collection. Hawaiian rolls stuffed with deli ham and sliced cheese, brushed with a simple butter mixture and baked until warm and golden and perfectly melty. Ten minutes of prep, twenty minutes in the oven, and everyone is extremely happy.

The butter mixture is what elevates these from just ham and cheese rolls to something really special — Dijon mustard, Worcestershire sauce, poppy seeds, and onion powder all mixed with melted butter and brushed generously over the tops before baking. As they cook, that butter soaks into the rolls and makes them rich and fragrant and impossible to resist.

My kids go absolutely crazy for these every single time. I’ve made them for regular Tuesday dinners, birthday parties, Super Bowl spreads, and potlucks, and they disappear instantly every time. If you have picky eaters in your house, make these. They will become instant fans.

Get the full recipe here.

Foil Packet Dinner: Shrimp Boil Packets

Everything you love about a shrimp boil — plump shrimp, andouille sausage, sweet corn, and red potatoes — packaged into individual foil packets and baked in the oven or on the grill. No big pot, no straining, no mess. Each person gets their own packet and the whole thing feels fun and festive even on a completely regular Tuesday.

The seasoning is everything here. Old Bay, garlic, butter, and a squeeze of lemon coat everything in the packet as it steams together. The corn absorbs the butter and seasoning, the shrimp stay perfectly tender, the sausage crisps slightly at the edges, and the potatoes cook through until soft. Every single element is exactly right.

This is a summer dinner staple at our house. I make it on the grill when the weather is nice and in the oven when it isn’t, and it’s perfect both ways. The zero cleanup is genuinely one of my favorite things about it — open the packets at the table, eat directly from them, throw away the foil. Nothing else to wash.

Get the full recipe here.

Easy Homemade Pizza Dough

Once you make your own pizza dough, going back to frozen pizza or delivery feels like a real step backward. This recipe is straightforward and reliable, and it produces a dough that bakes up with crispy edges, a chewy center, and a flavor that no frozen crust has ever come close to replicating.

Pizza night at our house has become one of my favorite family traditions, and it all started with this dough recipe. Everyone gets their own mini pizza to top however they want — which solves the “I don’t want that topping” problem permanently and makes dinner genuinely fun. Kids who help make their food eat their food, and this is the best example of that rule I know.

The dough comes together in about ten minutes and needs about an hour to rise, so plan ahead. The actual baking takes twelve to fifteen minutes at high heat, and what comes out is better than most pizza you could order. It’s one of those Friday night traditions that the whole family looks forward to all week long.

Get the full recipe here.

Homemade Baked Potato Soup Recipe

Thick, creamy, loaded baked potato soup topped with shredded cheddar, crispy bacon, sour cream, and green onions — this is the soup I make the second the temperature drops in the fall. It’s everything you want from a baked potato in a warm, comforting bowl, and I don’t stop making it until spring arrives.

The soup gets its creaminess from a combination of mashed potato chunks, heavy cream, and cheddar cheese. Some recipes come out too thin or too thick — this one hits exactly the right consistency. Creamy and velvety but still substantial enough to be a full meal rather than just a starter you eat before the real dinner.

My family requests this constantly from October through March. I serve it with warm rolls or crusty bread for dipping, and that combination is genuinely one of the coziest meals I know. If you love baked potatoes, this soup will become one of your most treasured cold-weather recipes.

Get the full recipe here.

Slow Cooker Tortilla Soup

This tortilla soup has been on my blog practically since the beginning, which tells you everything you need to know about how much I trust it. Chicken, black beans, corn, Rotel tomatoes, ranch dressing mix, and taco seasoning all dumped in the crockpot in the morning. By dinner you have a deeply flavorful, satisfying soup that tastes like way more effort than five minutes of prep.

The ranch dressing mix is what makes this recipe different from other tortilla soups. It’s not something you’d expect to see, but it works perfectly — it adds a subtle herbaceous depth to the broth that makes the whole thing taste complex and carefully seasoned even though you basically just opened some cans.

I top mine with crushed tortilla chips, shredded Monterey Jack, sour cream, and a squeeze of fresh lime juice. The toppings are part of what makes this soup great — they add texture and freshness to the warm, hearty broth underneath. Make a big pot and eat it all week. It gets better the next day.

Get the full recipe here.

There you go — 50 dinners to pull from the next time your brain goes completely blank at 4:30pm. Bookmark this page, save your favorites, and come back whenever you need a fresh idea. If you make any of these I’d genuinely love to hear about it in the comments — and if you find a new family favorite in here, even better. That’s exactly why I put this list together. Happy cooking!

40 Unforgettable Crockpot and Slow Cooker Recipes

I didn’t become a crockpot person until I was a few years into motherhood and completely drowning in the 5 o’clock chaos — you know, that window where everyone is hungry, homework needs to happen, and you haven’t even thought about dinner yet.

A friend of mine made a pot roast one winter that had been going all day in her slow cooker and I remember standing in her kitchen thinking: I need this in my life immediately.

That was the start of something beautiful. I’d be lying if I said my crockpot wasn’t the most-used appliance in my kitchen by a mile. It’s done more for my sanity as a working mom than I can even put into words. I dump stuff in before work, and dinner is just… there. Done. Like magic, except it’s not magic, it’s just low and slow heat and a little bit of planning.

I’ve made every single recipe in this roundup. Some of them I’ve been making for years. Some became instant favorites the first time I made them. I’ve pulled together 40 of my very best crockpot and slow cooker recipes including dinners, soups, sides, dips, desserts, and even a drink — so you’ve got everything you need in one spot. Bookmark this page. You’re going to come back to it a lot.

Slow Cooker Beef Recipes

Slow Cooker Pot Roast

This is the recipe that started it all for me, honestly. Chuck roast, carrots, potatoes, a couple of packets — and eight hours later you have a dinner that tastes like you spent all day in the kitchen. My husband still requests this almost every week from October through March. Get the recipe here.

Beef Stroganoff in Crock Pot Dinner Recipe

Creamy, rich, and the kind of meal that makes everyone go quiet at the dinner table because they’re too busy eating to talk. Serve this over egg noodles and just try not to go back for seconds. Spoiler: you won’t be able to. Get the recipe here.

Beef Stroganoff in Crock Pot

This is a slightly different take on my stroganoff using golden mushroom soup and cream cheese for a sauce that is just *chef’s kiss*. When I can’t decide which version to make, I honestly just make both. No regrets. Get the recipe here.

Simple Crock Pot Beef and Noodles Recipe

Growing up in the Midwest, beef and noodles is practically a love language. This version uses chuck roast cooked until it falls apart, then tossed with thick Reames egg noodles. Pure nostalgia in a bowl — and my kids devour it every single time. Get the recipe here.

Shredded Beef Enchiladas: Crock Pot Dinner

The slow cooker does 90% of the work here — all you have to do is roll the beef into tortillas and top with sauce and cheese. We make these on taco nights when I want something a little more special than the usual, and they never disappoint. Get the recipe here.

Philly Cheese Steak Crock Pot Recipe

Shredded beef, peppers, onions, provolone — all the good stuff from your favorite Philly cheesesteak, minus the trip to a restaurant. Load it onto hoagie buns and call it done. This one is a serious crowd-pleaser. Get the recipe here.

Maid Rite Recipe in the Crock Pot

If you’re from Iowa, you already know. If you’re not — a Maid Rite is a loose meat sandwich and it is everything. This crockpot version is so easy and makes a huge batch. Perfect for feeding a crowd or just feeding my family twice this week, no judgment. Get the recipe here.

French Dip Crock Pot Dinner Recipe

The au jus from this recipe alone is worth making it. Tender slow-cooked chuck roast on hoagie rolls with provolone, dipped into that savory broth — my husband says this is one of his top five dinners I make. High praise considering the competition. Get the recipe here.

Crockpot Beef Barley Soup Recipe

There’s something about beef barley soup on a cold Iowa day that just hits differently. Stew meat, barley, vegetables, and the most gorgeous rich broth — this one takes all day and is worth every hour of it. Get the recipe here.

Slow Cooker Chicken Recipes

Crockpot Hawaiian Chicken Recipe

Sweet, sticky, and the whole family fights over the last serving — this pineapple-soy glazed chicken is one of my most-made recipes, full stop. Serve it over white rice and dinner is on the table in about two minutes of actual work. Get the recipe here.

Slow Cooker Crack Chicken Pasta

It’s called crack chicken for a reason and I am not going to pretend otherwise. Cheesy, ranch-flavored, creamy chicken pasta that my kids ask for literally every week. I’ve made this more times than I can count and I still look forward to it every single time. Get the recipe here.

Crockpot Chicken Sandwiches

Ranch seasoning, cream cheese, bacon, and shredded chicken — pile it onto a bun and try to stop at one. This recipe gets made at least twice a month at our house, and for good reason. It’s easy, it’s cheap, and everyone inhales it. Get the recipe here.

Buffalo Chicken Crock Pot Sandwiches Easy Dinner Recipe

Three ingredients. That’s it. Chicken, cream cheese, and Frank’s Buffalo Sauce — and what comes out is the most insanely good shredded chicken for sandwiches, wraps, or honestly just eaten straight from the pot. No shame. Get the recipe here.

Pulled Chicken Recipe for Crockpot Shredded Chicken Tacos

My go-to for taco Tuesday when I remembered at 7am that I hadn’t planned dinner. Chicken, taco seasoning, Rotel — into the crockpot it goes. By dinner you’ve got the most flavorful shredded chicken for tacos, quesadillas, rice bowls, whatever. Get the recipe here.

Crock Pot Chicken Chili Recipe

White chicken chili with great northern beans and a creamy broth — this is one of those soups that feels lighter than regular chili but is still totally filling and satisfying. I serve it with cornbread and it’s a complete meal that everyone in my family actually likes. That alone makes it a winner. Get the recipe here.

Crock Pot Chicken Chili Dinner Recipe

Crock Pot Chicken Fajitas

Chicken, peppers, onions, taco seasoning — low and slow all day until everything is tender and fragrant and your whole house smells like a restaurant. Just warm up some tortillas and dinner is done. My kids pile these high with all the toppings. Get the recipe here.

Crockpot Pasta & Casseroles

Crockpot Lasagna Easy Dinner Recipe

I was skeptical about crockpot lasagna for an embarrassingly long time. Then I made it. No boiling noodles, no fussing with layers in a hot oven, and the result is bubbling cheesy lasagna that my family thinks I slaved over. I’ll never tell them the truth. Get the recipe here.

Crockpot Baked Spaghetti

Layers of pasta, meat sauce, cream cheese, and mozzarella all cooked low and slow together into this gloriously cheesy baked spaghetti situation. If your kids are picky eaters, make this. It works every single time. Get the recipe here.

Crockpot Ravioli Casserole Recipe

Frozen ravioli + Italian sausage + jarred pasta sauce = one of the easiest dinners you will ever put on the table. I am a big fan of recipes that require almost no brainpower, and this is absolutely one of them. Dump it in and walk away. Get the recipe here.

Slow Cooker Soups & Stews

Slow Cooker Tortilla Soup Dinner Recipe

This tortilla soup has been on my blog since basically the beginning and it has never stopped being a staple in my rotation. Chicken, beans, corn, Rotel, taco seasoning, ranch dressing mix — dump and go. The toppings are half the fun, so don’t skip the sour cream and chips. Get the recipe here.

Crockpot Enchilada Soup

Everything you love about enchiladas in soup form, with way less effort. This is one of those dinners that smells so good cooking all day that you start getting hungry for it around 2pm. Serve it with warm tortilla chips and a lime wedge. Get the recipe here.

Crockpot Side Dishes

Crockpot Cheesy Potatoes

Ask me what I bring to every potluck and holiday dinner and the answer is always going to be these cheesy potatoes. Creamy hashbrowns, cheese, sour cream — cooked in the crockpot so I’m not even stressing about oven space. They disappear before anything else on the table. Get the recipe here.

How to Make Crock Pot Baked Potatoes

I know it sounds too simple to even be a recipe, but this changed my life a little bit. Perfect fluffy baked potatoes made in the crockpot — no foil, no oven. Frees up so much space when you’re making a big dinner. Get the recipe here.

Crockpot Dips & Appetizers

Easy Queso Crockpot Dip Recipe

Hot, melty queso that stays warm all party long because it’s sitting right there in your crockpot. This is the only way I make queso for a crowd anymore. Set it out with a bag of chips and watch it disappear in about ten minutes. Get the recipe here.

Spinach and Artichoke Dip Crock Pot Recipe

My all-time favorite party dip, made even better because the crockpot keeps it perfectly warm and melty the entire time your guests are there. No more cold, congealed dip halfway through the party — just creamy, cheesy perfection from start to finish. Get the recipe here.

Slow Cooker Pork Recipes

Slow Cooker Pulled Pork

This is one of those recipes that makes you feel like a genius. A pork roast, barbecue sauce, and a handful of seasonings go into the slow cooker and come out as the most tender, flavorful pulled pork that works on sandwiches, nachos, baked potatoes, pizza — literally everything. Get the recipe here.

Slow Cooker Pork Roast Dinner Recipe

A balsamic and honey glaze makes this pork roast anything but ordinary. It’s one of those dinners that looks and tastes impressive but the crockpot did literally all the work. I love recipes that make me look like I tried harder than I did. Get the recipe here.

Pork Shoulder Slow Cooker Enchiladas with Poblano Cream Sauce

This one is a step up from your average weeknight enchilada. The pork cooks all day and practically shreds itself, and that poblano cream sauce? It’s smoky, creamy, and honestly something I could eat with a spoon. A little extra effort on the sauce is absolutely worth it. Get the recipe here.

Pork Shoulder Slow Cooker Recipe

The beauty of a good slow cooker pork shoulder is that you make it once and eat it three different ways. Tacos Monday, rice bowls Tuesday, sandwiches Wednesday. I call this “cooking once, eating like a queen all week.” Get the recipe here.

Crockpot Desserts & Candy

Two Hour Crockpot Lava Cake Dessert Recipe

Warm, gooey chocolate cake in the crockpot — two hours and it’s done. I serve this with a scoop of vanilla ice cream and everyone at the table acts like I did something extraordinary. The secret is that it basically made itself. Get the recipe here.

Crock Pot Pumpkin Dump Cake Recipe

Fall in a crockpot, basically. Pumpkin, cake mix, butter, and caramel cooked together into the coziest, most delicious warm dessert. Serve it with whipped cream and eat it outside by a fire pit if you can. If not, your couch works too. Get the recipe here.

Crock Pot Apple Crisp Recipe

Tender cinnamon apples under a buttery, golden crisp topping — this apple crisp in the crockpot is such an easy fall dessert. I make it on Sunday afternoons when the house is starting to feel like autumn and we want something warm to eat while watching football. Get the recipe here.

Crock Pot Chocolate Peanut Clusters

Three ingredients, no candy thermometer, no fuss. These chocolate peanut clusters basically make themselves in the crockpot and look gorgeous on a holiday treat tray. I make multiple batches every December and give them as gifts. People think I’m so thoughtful. I just have a crockpot. Get the recipe here.

Chocolate Turtles Crockpot Candy

Chocolate, caramel, pecans — classic turtle candy made in the crockpot. These look like they came from a fancy candy shop and they’re so easy it almost feels like cheating. Make a double batch because they will be gone faster than you think. Get the recipe here.

White Chocolate Crockpot Candy Recipe

White chocolate and peanuts melted together in the slow cooker — simple, inexpensive, and makes a massive batch. This is what I bring to every holiday cookie exchange and people always ask me for the recipe. When I tell them how easy it is, they don’t quite believe me. Get the recipe here.

Crock Pot Chocolate Almond Clusters

These are a step up from the peanut clusters — raw almonds in a three-chocolate blend that looks genuinely fancy and requires basically zero skill to pull off. A great option if you want to gift something that looks like you bought it at a chocolatier. Get the recipe here.

Crock Pot Chocolate Covered Cashew Clusters

Buttery cashews, rich chocolate, three ingredients total. My sister-in-law requested these specifically for Christmas this year and honestly I was flattered. They’re that good — and they honestly couldn’t be simpler to make. Get the recipe here.

Crockpot Candy Dr. Seuss Grinch Cookies

Green crockpot candy clusters topped with a little candy heart — the most fun holiday treat in this whole roundup, hands down. My kids make these with me every December and honestly I enjoy it just as much as they do. They look adorable on a cookie tray. Get the recipe here.

Crockpot Drinks

Crockpot Hot Chocolate

Made with real chocolate chips, sweetened condensed milk, and heavy cream — this crockpot hot chocolate is the real deal. Not a packet in sight. I make this for holiday parties and it stays warm all night in the crockpot. People have asked me if I bought it from somewhere. That’s always a good sign. Get the recipe here.

Alright, there you have it — 40 crockpot and slow cooker recipes that have all been tested in my actual kitchen, eaten by my actual family, and made over and over again because they’re just that good. Whether you’re a crockpot veteran or you just pulled yours out of the back of the cabinet after a year of ignoring it (no judgment, we’ve all been there) — I hope this list gives you plenty to work with.

If you make any of these, come find me over on Coupon please come back and let me know how it went! And pin your favorites to save for later — you’re going to want to come back to this list on a busy Tuesday when you have zero dinner ideas and a crockpot just sitting there waiting to save the day.

A Little Story

This is one of those recipes that’s been on our family’s meal plan on rotation for years. We’re big fans of fettuccine alfredo — my husband especially — and once I figured out how simple the real sauce is to make at home, jarred alfredo never made it into the cart again. Three ingredients, 15 minutes, and you have something that tastes like a restaurant made it. We’ve switched to penne over the years because it’s easier for the kids to eat, but fettuccine is still the classic and it’s genuinely hard to go wrong either way.

Ingredient Breakdown

Salted Butter (1/4 cup)

The fat base of the sauce. Use real, salted butter — not unsalted, not margarine. The salt in salted butter does the seasoning work without any measuring. Melt it on medium-low and stay close. I’ve browned butter by walking away to check on the pasta and had to start over. It only takes a minute to turn.

Heavy Whipping Cream (1 cup)

Don’t substitute half-and-half or regular milk here — this is the ingredient people swap trying to lighten the recipe and then wonder why the sauce breaks. Heavy cream has the fat content (36%+) to reduce and hold together. Thinner cream won’t thicken the same way and can curdle on you. This is not the place to cut corners.

Grated Parmesan Cheese (3/4 cup)

Skip the powdered canister parmesan. I know it’s tempting because it’s already in the pantry, but the anti-caking agents prevent it from melting smoothly and you get a grainy, chalky sauce that can’t be fixed. Freshly grated or refrigerated shredded parmesan is what makes this sauce silky. It’s worth the extra 30 seconds to grate it.

How to Make It

A key tip before you start: This sauce comes together fast. Have your pasta boiling, your chicken cooked, your table set, and everything else ready before you begin. Once the sauce is done, it needs to go directly on the pasta.

1. Melt butter in a saucepan over medium-low heat. Don’t walk away — butter goes from melted to brown fast and you’ll smell it before you see it.
2. Add the heavy whipping cream. Whisk and heat until it comes to a gentle rolling boil. It’ll take a couple minutes — you’re looking for small, steady bubbles, not a hard boil.
3. Add the parmesan cheese. Whisk consistently for about 10 minutes until the cheese has fully melted and the sauce is smooth and slightly thickened. This is the step people rush and shouldn’t — stop whisking too soon and the sauce stays thin and the parmesan can clump.
4. Remove from heat and let stand for 3-5 minutes. It will look runny right off the stove — that’s normal and it tricks people into overcooking it. Give it a few minutes and it tightens up.
5. Pour over cooked, drained pasta and toss to coat. Serve immediately.

Serving Suggestions

This sauce works on any pasta shape, but here’s what works best:

• Fettuccine — the classic; the wide noodles hold the sauce well
• Penne — our family’s current favorite; easier to serve and eat, especially for kids
• Grilled chicken on top — slice chicken breast seasoned with McCormick’s Montreal Chicken seasoning and lay it over the plated pasta
• Shrimp — sauteed shrimp with garlic and butter is the other classic pairing

Storage and Reheating

Storage: Store leftover sauce (or pasta already dressed with sauce) in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

Reheating: Warm in a saucepan over low heat with a splash of heavy cream or milk, whisking as it heats. Don’t microwave at high heat — the sauce can break and turn greasy. Low and slow with added liquid keeps it smooth.

Freezing: Not recommended. Cream-based sauces separate when frozen and thawed, leaving a broken, oily texture.

Frequently Asked Questions

Why is my alfredo sauce too thin?

Don’t panic yet — let it rest off the heat for 3-5 minutes first. It looks runny right off the stove and thickens significantly as it sits. That’s normal. If it’s still thin after resting, it didn’t reduce long enough. Put it back on low heat and whisk for another 2-3 minutes.

Why is my alfredo sauce grainy?

Almost always the parmesan. Powdered canister parmesan doesn’t melt cleanly — the anti-caking agents stay gritty no matter how long you whisk. The other cause is heat too high when you add the cheese, which makes the proteins seize. Use freshly grated or refrigerated shredded parmesan and keep the heat at medium-low.

Can I use half-and-half instead of heavy cream?

Technically yes, but I’d push back on it. Lower fat content means the sauce is thinner, more prone to breaking, and less rich. If that’s what you have, it’ll work — just keep the heat lower and expect a looser result. Heavy cream is really the right ingredient for this sauce and the difference is noticeable.

Can I add garlic?

Yes, and I often do. Saute 1-2 minced cloves in the butter before adding the cream. It’s not traditional alfredo but it’s delicious and the garlic flavor works well with the sauce. Just don’t let it brown before the cream goes in.

How much pasta does this sauce cover?

4-5 cups of cooked pasta (about 4 servings). For a bigger batch, double it — the ratios hold. One tip: save a cup of pasta water before draining. Add a splash to loosen the sauce if it thickens too fast once it hits the pasta.

Is this the same as Olive Garden’s alfredo?

Very close. Olive Garden uses the same cream-butter-parmesan base. Their version is richer because of the ratio. This gets you 90% of the way there in 15 minutes with ingredients you probably already have. My husband thinks it’s better. I’m not going to argue with him.

Related Recipes

• Chicken Bacon Fettuccine Alfredo Casserole — baked pasta with alfredo, bacon, and chicken
• Crockpot Ravioli Casserole — another easy pasta dinner, hands-off in the slow cooker
• Crock Pot Beef Stroganoff — creamy pasta-based dinner in the slow cooker
• Chili’s Chicken Crispers — great protein to slice over this pasta
• Crock Pot Beef and Noodles — another hearty pasta-style dinner on the rotation

Print

Homemade Alfredo Sauce

Simple homemade Alfredo sauce made with salted butter, heavy whipping cream, and Parmesan cheese.

Course Dinner

Prep Time 5 minutes minutes

Cook Time 10 minutes minutes

Rest Time 5 minutes minutes

Total Time 15 minutes minutes

Servings 4 servings

Author Kate Sorensen

Equipment

• Saucepan
• Whisk

Ingredients

Ingredients

• 1/4 cup salted butter
• 1 cup heavy whipping cream
• 3/4 cup grated Parmesan cheese
• cooked pasta for serving

Instructions

Instructions

• Melt the salted butter in a saucepan over medium-low heat. Stay close so it does not brown.
• Add the heavy whipping cream and whisk until it reaches a gentle rolling boil.
• Add the Parmesan cheese and whisk consistently for about 10 minutes, until the cheese has melted and the sauce is smooth and slightly thickened.
• Remove from heat and let the sauce stand for 3 to 5 minutes so it tightens up.
• Pour over cooked, drained pasta and toss to coat. Serve immediately.

Notes

Use heavy whipping cream, not milk or half-and-half, so the sauce thickens and stays smooth. Skip powdered Parmesan because it can make the sauce grainy. Have the pasta ready before starting because the sauce comes together quickly. Let the sauce stand for a few minutes off heat before judging the thickness.

A Little Story

This is one of those slow cooker dinners that surprises people who think crock pot food is somehow less than — the flavor here is deep and real, not watered down. The Italian seasoning packet is the kind of shortcut that feels like cheating but tastes like you put in real effort. I started making this in the fall when the slow cooker comes out for the season, and it’s stayed on the rotation ever since. Six sandwiches, almost no afternoon effort, and the leftovers are genuinely good the next day. Hard to argue with that.

Serving Suggestions

• French fries or potato wedges — the classic cheesesteak side; bake a frozen bag while the sandwiches are under the broiler
• Simple coleslaw — creamy coleslaw adds crunch and cuts the richness of the beef and cheese
• Soup — tomato soup or French onion alongside a half sandwich is a great cold-weather pairing

Storage and Make-Ahead

Refrigerator: Store the cooked meat and vegetable mixture (without buns or assembled sandwiches) in an airtight container for up to 4 days. Keep the buns and cheese separate.

Reheating: Warm the meat mixture in a saucepan over medium-low heat or in the microwave in 60-second intervals until hot. Assemble and broil the sandwiches fresh — don’t reheat them already built.

Freezer: The meat mixture freezes well for up to 3 months. Cool completely, then freeze in a zip-top bag with as much air removed as possible. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator and reheat before serving.

Frequently Asked Questions

Do I have to brown the meat first?

I’d push back on skipping it. The browning step takes five minutes and adds a layer of flavor — color, depth, the toasty edges that survive the long braise — that you simply don’t get from a raw roast going straight into the slow cooker. If you’re genuinely pressed for time, it still works without it. But if you have five minutes in the morning, use them here.

Can I use a different cut of beef?

Yes. Chuck roast is an excellent substitute — more fat marbling and it shreds even more easily after 8 hours. Flank steak works but cooks faster; check at 6 hours. Round steak is the original choice because it’s affordable and the long braise handles the toughness. All of them work with this seasoning.

What if I don’t have Italian dressing mix?

Make your own: 1 teaspoon each of garlic powder, onion powder, dried oregano, and dried basil, plus 1/2 teaspoon salt and 1/2 teaspoon sugar. It won’t be identical but it gets close. Ranch seasoning is also a solid substitute — changes the flavor but works well with this method.

Can I cook this on high instead of low?

Yes — cook on high for 4-5 hours. Low and slow is preferred because it gives the tough connective tissue in round steak more time to break down properly, but high for 4-5 hours works when you need dinner faster.

What cheese is most authentic?

In Philadelphia, the traditional choice is American cheese or Cheez Whiz — not provolone. American melts the smoothest and is the easiest to work with under the broiler. Provolone has become the most common home-cook choice and it’s what I use. Use whichever you prefer; the beef is the star either way.

Can I make this for a crowd?

Yes, easily. Double it and use a 6-quart or larger crock pot. Keep the meat warm on the low setting and let people assemble their own sandwiches. This is one of the best slow cooker options for game day or casual entertaining — the work is done before anyone arrives.

Related Recipes

• Crock Pot French Dip Sandwiches — another slow cooker beef sandwich, with au jus for dipping
• Crock Pot Beef Stroganoff — creamy slow cooker beef over egg noodles
• Slow Cooker Crack Chicken Pasta — cheesy ranch chicken pasta cooked entirely in the slow cooker
• Buffalo Chicken Crock Pot Sandwiches — spicy slow cooker chicken piled on buns
• Philly Cheesesteak Sloppy Joes — ground beef version of the Philly flavors, faster to make

Print

Philly Cheese Steak Crock Pot Recipe

Slow cooker sliced beef with peppers, onion, Italian dressing seasoning, provolone, and hoagie buns.

Course Dinner

Cuisine American

Keyword philly cheese steak crock pot, slow cooker cheesesteak

Prep Time 15 minutes minutes

Cook Time 8 hours hours

Total Time 8 hours hours 15 minutes minutes

Servings 6 sandwiches

Author Kate

Ingredients

• 2 1/2 to 3 pounds beef round steak sliced thin
• 2 green peppers sliced thin
• 1 onion sliced thin
• 1 envelope dry Italian dressing mix
• 2 cups beef stock
• 2 teaspoons black pepper
• 3 teaspoons garlic salt
• 6 hoagie buns
• 12 slices provolone cheese

Instructions

• Spray the crock pot with cooking spray.
• Cut beef round steak into thin slices and brown briefly in a hot pan for color.
• Add browned beef, green peppers, onion, beef stock, garlic salt, black pepper, and Italian dressing mix to the crock pot. Stir to combine.
• Cover and cook on Low for 8 hours, until beef is tender.
• Line a baking sheet with foil or parchment.
• Spoon the beef and vegetable mixture onto sliced hoagie buns.
• Top each sandwich with 2 slices of provolone cheese, overlapping as needed.
• Bake at 350°F or broil on low for a few minutes, just until the cheese melts.
• Serve warm.

Notes

Brown the beef briefly before slow cooking if you have time; it adds more flavor than adding raw beef straight to the crock pot. Use a slotted spoon when filling buns so they do not get soggy. The beef mixture can be made a day ahead and reheated before assembling sandwiches. Leftovers keep refrigerated for up to 4 days.

I’ve made this on busy weeknights, before sports practices, and on days when I just don’t want to think about dinner at all. It works every time because it’s simple. No extra steps. No guesswork.

This is also one of those meals you can throw together when people are coming over and you forgot to plan. It fills everyone up. You’ll see people go back for seconds, especially the cheesy top layer.

If you’ve got picky eaters, this usually gets a pass. It’s basically lasagna without the work. That’s the whole point.

A Little Story About This One

The first time I made this, I honestly didn’t expect it to be that good. I was putting together something fast because I had almost nothing prepped and too much going on. A bag of frozen ravioli, a jar of sauce I had in the pantry, leftover sausage from the weekend, and the rest of a bag of mozzarella. I layered it in and figured it would be fine.

It was better than fine. My family went back for seconds and asked what I did differently. I told them I just threw stuff in the crockpot. That was the whole thing. That’s when I knew this was staying in the rotation.

Now it’s one of those recipes I genuinely keep ingredients for on purpose. The frozen ravioli lives in my freezer. The jarred sauce is always in the pantry. Knowing it’s there means dinner is always covered.

How to Make Crockpot Ravioli Casserole

Brown the sausage in a skillet first. Break it up as it cooks so you don’t end up with big chunks in the layers. Drain the grease well — if you skip that, the whole casserole ends up greasy.

Spray the crockpot insert before you start layering. This matters. Melted cheese sticks hard, especially around the edges. Greasing it first makes cleanup so much easier.

Add a thin layer of sauce to the bottom — just enough to lightly cover it. This keeps the ravioli from sticking and gives the bottom layer moisture right away.

Add half the frozen ravioli in an even layer. It doesn’t have to be perfect, but try not to pile it all in one spot or the center won’t cook as evenly. Then top with half the sausage and a layer of mozzarella.

Repeat the layers one more time: sauce, ravioli, sausage, cheese. Put the lid on and cook on low for 3.5 hours or high for 1 hour 45 minutes. Start checking toward the lower end of that range if your crockpot tends to run hot.

You’re looking for ravioli that’s tender, cheese that’s fully melted, and layers that look set when you scoop into it. When you lift the lid and the cheese on top is bubbling at the edges and fully melted through — that’s ready. Let it sit about 10 minutes before serving — it firms up and scoops much more cleanly after a few minutes of rest.

Serving Suggestions

This is a solid standalone meal, but it goes really well with garlic bread or crusty rolls to scoop up the sauce. A simple green salad on the side balances the richness without adding much work. That’s usually all I do, and dinner feels complete.

If you want to stretch it for a bigger crowd, add a Caesar salad and a second side like steamed broccoli or roasted green beans. It looks like you planned more than you did, and that’s kind of the whole appeal of this recipe.

This is also a great recipe to take to someone. After a new baby, a surgery, or a rough week — this travels well, feeds a family, and doesn’t need explaining. Just include a loaf of bread and you’re good.

Variations and Substitutions

Add spinach. Frozen chopped spinach is the easiest way to work in a vegetable without changing the recipe. Thaw it first and squeeze out the water completely. If you skip that step, it’ll water down the whole casserole.

Swap the protein. Ground beef, ground turkey, or shredded rotisserie chicken all work. Rotisserie chicken is a great shortcut — it just won’t add as much flavor as sausage, so lean on a good sauce. Ground beef or turkey should get Italian seasoning and garlic powder to make up the difference.

Make it meatless. Leave the meat out and add extra cheese, or use a spinach-and-cheese ravioli. It’s still filling and still works as a full dinner.

Mix up the cheese. Part mozzarella, part provolone melts really well and gives the top an incredible cheese pull. It’s especially good if you’re serving this for a casual family dinner with bread on the side.

Make it creamier. Stir a couple tablespoons of cream cheese into the sauce before you layer it. It makes the whole thing richer and more like baked pasta. Good for cold nights when you want something extra comforting.

Storage and Make-Ahead Tips

Store leftovers covered in the fridge for up to 3 days. It makes a great lunch the next day — the flavor actually gets a little better after sitting overnight.

To reheat individual portions, the microwave works well. Add a small spoonful of sauce or a splash of water before heating if it looks dry — it loosens back up quickly. For a larger portion, cover with foil and warm in the oven at 350°F until heated through.

You can assemble this ahead of time, but keep the ravioli frozen as long as possible. If it sits fully assembled in the fridge for hours before cooking, the pasta softens early and the texture isn’t as good when it finishes. Layer it right before it goes in the crockpot for best results.

What to Do with Leftovers

If you’ve got leftovers, the next-day lunch is my favorite use. Reheat a portion with a splash of water or extra sauce and it’s almost as good as fresh. I’ve served it straight from the fridge to skeptical kids and gotten zero complaints.

Turn it into a baked pasta. Scoop leftovers into an oven-safe dish, add a little extra sauce and mozzarella on top, and bake at 375°F for about 20 minutes. It gets crispy around the edges and feels like a whole new dinner.

Stuff it into a bell pepper. Cut a pepper in half, fill each side with leftover ravioli casserole, top with cheese, and bake until the pepper is tender. A surprisingly good way to use up the last bit of the batch.

Add broth and make it a soup. Scoop leftovers into a pot, pour in some chicken or beef broth, and warm it on the stove. Toss in a handful of spinach or some extra diced tomatoes. What was a casserole becomes a thick, hearty pasta soup. My kids actually request it this way sometimes.

The Gear That Makes This Even Easier

A 6-quart slow cooker is the sweet spot for this recipe — big enough to fit two full layers without squishing everything, and the right size to cook it evenly. Crock-Pot’s 6-quart programmable model is what I use — you set it and it automatically switches to warm when the cook time is done, which is helpful if you’re not always home exactly on time.

For the sauce, the brand matters more than it might seem in a four-ingredient recipe. Rao’s Homemade marinara is thicker and more flavorful than most jarred options, and that thickness is exactly what keeps this casserole from going watery. It’s the one upgrade that makes a real difference in the final result.

Lighter Version

If you want to lighten this up without losing what makes it good, a few small swaps go a long way.

Swap the Italian sausage for lean ground turkey and season it yourself with Italian seasoning, garlic powder, and a pinch of fennel seed. You won’t miss the sausage as much as you’d think, and it cuts the fat significantly.

Use part-skim mozzarella instead of whole milk. It still melts and still gives you that cheesy top — just with a little less fat per serving.

Adding a layer of frozen spinach (thawed and squeezed dry) between the layers gets more vegetables in without changing the flavor much. It’s an easy add for anyone trying to work in more greens on a busy weeknight.

Frequently Asked Questions

Can I use fresh ravioli instead of frozen?

I’d skip it. Fresh ravioli gets too soft in the crockpot and tends to fall apart before the casserole is done. Frozen holds up much better through the cooking time.

Do I have to brown the sausage first?

Yes. It needs to be fully cooked before it goes into the crockpot. Otherwise you end up with uneven texture and extra grease sitting in the casserole.

Can I make this ahead?

Sort of. You can prep the sausage ahead and refrigerate it. But assemble the layers right before cooking — if the frozen ravioli sits in the sauce too long before it cooks, it softens before it should.

Can I cook this on high instead of low?

Yes. Cook on high for 1 hour 45 minutes or low for 3.5 hours. I prefer low when I have the time — better texture. But high works when you need dinner faster.

Why is my casserole watery?

Usually one of two things: the sauce was too thin, or the ravioli thawed before it went in. Use a thicker jarred sauce and keep the ravioli frozen right up until layering.

Can I double this recipe?

Only if your crockpot is large enough. A 6-quart fits this recipe perfectly. Don’t overfill it or the center won’t cook evenly.

More Recipes You’ll Love

Lazy Crock Pot Lasagna — another slow cooker pasta dinner that’s every bit as easy and just as comforting.

Crock Pot Goulash — a hearty, cheesy ground beef pasta that’s ready in a few hours with almost no hands-on time.

Funeral Potatoes — the ultimate cheesy potato side dish for when you need something that makes people happy without a lot of work.

Crock Pot Beef and Noodles — tender beef slow-cooked until it falls apart, tossed with egg noodles for a dinner the whole table will love.

Print

Crockpot Ravioli Casserole

Lazy slow cooker ravioli casserole layered with frozen ravioli, browned Italian sausage, pasta sauce, and mozzarella cheese.

Course Dinner

Cuisine American

Prep Time 15 minutes minutes

Cook Time 3 hours hours 30 minutes minutes

Rest Time 10 minutes minutes

Total Time 3 hours hours 40 minutes minutes

Servings 6 servings

Author Kate Sorensen

Equipment

• Slow cooker
• Skillet

Ingredients

Ingredients

• 20 ounces frozen ravioli
• 24 ounces pasta sauce
• 1 pound ground Italian sausage
• 4 cups shredded mozzarella cheese

Instructions

Instructions

• Brown the Italian sausage in a skillet, breaking it into crumbles. Drain well.
• Spray the slow cooker insert with cooking spray.
• Spread a thin layer of sauce in the bottom of the slow cooker.
• Layer half the frozen ravioli, half the sausage, sauce, and mozzarella. Repeat layers one more time.
• Cover and cook on low for about 3 1/2 hours or high for about 1 hour 45 minutes, until ravioli is tender and cheese is melted.
• Let sit for about 10 minutes before serving so the layers scoop cleanly.

Notes

Use frozen ravioli, not fresh, so it holds up in the slow cooker. Brown and drain the sausage first so the casserole does not get greasy. Grease the crockpot insert because melted cheese sticks around the edges. Rest briefly before serving for cleaner scoops.

A Maid Rite is a loose meat sandwich. Seasoned ground beef, slow-cooked until it’s tender, juicy, and almost impossibly fine in texture. It piles onto a soft hamburger bun with mustard, ketchup, and pickles. That’s it. No tomato sauce, no peppers, no onion soup mix shortcut. Just deeply seasoned beef that doesn’t need anything to hide behind.

There’s an actual Maid Rite restaurant chain that’s been an Iowa institution since 1926. The original recipe is a closely guarded secret — the company has never published it, franchisees sign NDAs, and Iowans have been trying to reverse-engineer it for decades. This crockpot version is my best attempt, and after years of making it, I think it’s as close as a home cook is going to get without working the counter at the Marshalltown location.

Loose Meat vs. Sloppy Joe: Not the Same Thing

If you’ve never had a loose meat sandwich before, the most common mistake is thinking it’s just a sloppy joe without the sauce. It’s not. A sloppy joe is sweet and tomato-forward — the sauce is the whole point. A loose meat sandwich is about the meat. The texture, the seasoning, the way it’s been cooked low and slow so every tiny crumble is saturated with flavor.

The other key difference is texture. Sloppy joes are often chunky — the beef is browned and sauced but still has some bite to it. Maid Rite-style loose meat is genuinely loose. The goal is a fine, almost fluffy crumble where no piece is bigger than a small pea. It sounds fussy, but it happens naturally when you cook the raw beef slowly in liquid and break it up continuously as it cooks. The meat essentially braises apart.

And because there’s no sauce holding it together, the meat does fall off the bun. That’s not a flaw. That’s the whole thing. Iowans eat Maid Rites with a fork or just lean over the wax paper wrapper. It’s chaotic and perfect.

Why This Recipe Works

• The combination of beef and chicken base is the key. Using both gives the meat that layered, savory depth that one-note recipes miss. Don’t substitute regular bouillon cubes if you can avoid it — the paste-style base gives you more control over the salt level and dissolves more evenly into the liquid.
• Brown sugar and vinegar balance the savory. Just a little sweetness and a little acid rounds out the flavor. It’s what keeps this from tasting like basic seasoned ground beef — there’s something going on underneath that you can’t quite name, and it’s these two.
• Cooking with the lid off concentrates everything. After the first hour covered, you remove the lid so the liquid can evaporate. The meat braises in its own juices and gets more flavorful as it goes. This step is non-negotiable.
• It scales up easily. Double everything for a crowd. This is genuinely one of the best make-for-a-party meals — keep it in the slow cooker on warm and let people serve themselves. I’ve made quadruple batches for graduation parties and never had leftovers.

Ingredient Notes: What Each Element Does

Every ingredient in this recipe is doing a specific job. Here’s what you need to know before you start:

Ground Beef

Use lean — 90/10 or 93/7. I know, I know, fat equals flavor. But here’s the problem: when you cook fatty ground beef in a slow cooker for three-plus hours, you end up with a pool of rendered grease sitting in the cooking liquid. That grease doesn’t cook off the way it does in a skillet — it just sits there and makes the meat feel greasy instead of juicy. Lean beef gives you moisture from the braising liquid without the grease problem.

The beef goes in raw and uncooked — no browning first. This is intentional. Browning creates a crust, and a crust is the opposite of what you want here. You want the beef to break down slowly in the liquid, not maintain a seared exterior.

Beef Base AND Chicken Base

This is the move that most copycat recipes miss. Using only beef base gives you a one-dimensional savory — rich, yes, but kind of flat. Adding chicken base lightens it slightly and adds a brightness that makes the overall flavor more complex. Together, they create something that tastes layered and almost restaurant-quality without any extra effort.

Better Than Bouillon is sold near the broths — the beef base and chicken base are what make this taste layered instead of flat. Get the low-sodium versions if you can find them — the regular versions can make the finished meat salty once the liquid cooks down and concentrates. If your store only carries regular, just hold back on any extra salt until you taste it at the end.

Apple Cider Vinegar

A tablespoon and a half of vinegar sounds like a lot, but after three-plus hours of cooking it mellows way out. What it does is cut through the richness of the beef and the savory of the bases so the whole thing doesn’t feel heavy. It’s the same reason you put a squeeze of lemon on braised meats — it brightens without being identifiable. Nobody’s going to take a bite of this and think “vinegar.” They’re going to think “this is really good, why is this so good?”

Brown Sugar

The brown sugar works with the vinegar to create balance. A little sweet, a little acid, a lot of savory — that combination is what makes food taste complex instead of one-note. It also helps the meat develop a slightly deeper color as it cooks, especially during the uncovered phase. Don’t skip it, and don’t substitute white sugar — the molasses in brown sugar adds a subtle depth that white sugar doesn’t have.

Worcestershire and Soy Sauce

Both of these are umami bombs, but they bring different things. Worcestershire has a tangy, slightly fermented depth. Soy sauce is more straightforwardly savory and salty. Together with the beef and chicken base, they layer the savory flavor so it’s coming from multiple directions at once — you can’t taste any one of them specifically, but you’d definitely notice if one was missing.

Dried Minced Onion

Fresh onion would work, but dried minced onion rehydrates slowly in the cooking liquid and essentially disappears into the meat. You get the flavor without any visible chunks of onion — which matters because the goal here is an even, uniform texture throughout. If you use fresh onion, mince it very fine.

What to Know Before You Start

I use a 6-quart Crockpot for this — it gives the meat room to cook evenly without being cramped. Two pounds of beef in a 4-quart slow cooker works but it’ll be crowded, and it’ll be harder to stir and break up the meat during the uncovered phase. If you’re doubling the recipe, go to at least a 6-quart.

Plan for about 3–4 hours total cook time: 1 hour covered on high, then 2½–3 hours on low with the lid off. This is an active-enough slow cooker recipe that you want to be home and able to stir it occasionally and break up any remaining chunks. It’s not a “set it and forget it for 8 hours” situation.

The meat is done when the liquid has cooked down significantly and the beef is in a fine, uniform crumble with just enough moisture to hold together when you scoop it onto a bun — but not so much that it’s soupy. If it still looks like it has too much liquid after 3 hours uncovered, give it another 30 minutes. If it looks too dry, add a tablespoon or two of warm water and stir.

Ingredients

• 2 lbs lean ground beef, uncooked
• 1 cup warm water
• ¾ tablespoon dried minced onion
• 1½ tablespoons light brown sugar, packed
• ¾ teaspoon low-sodium beef base (like Better Than Bouillon)
• ¾ teaspoon low-sodium chicken base
• 1½ tablespoons apple cider vinegar
• 1½ tablespoons Worcestershire sauce
• ¾ tablespoon low-sodium soy sauce
• 8 hamburger buns
• Ketchup, mustard, pickles for serving

How to Make It

Set up the slow cooker: Set your slow cooker to high. Add the ground beef and break it up into smaller chunks as you add it — you don’t need to fully crumble it yet, but you want to break up that big solid chunk so the seasoning liquid can get around the meat. Think golf ball-sized pieces.

Mix the seasoning liquid: In a measuring cup or small bowl, combine the warm water, dried onion, brown sugar, beef base, chicken base, apple cider vinegar, Worcestershire, and soy sauce. Stir until the bases are dissolved and the sugar is mixed in. Pour over the beef and stir to combine — the meat should be completely coated in the liquid.

Cook covered on high for 1 hour: Put the lid on and walk away. After an hour, the beef will have cooked through and turned grayish-brown throughout. It’ll still be in larger pieces at this point — that’s fine. The liquid will be simmering and fragrant. This is when you do the first big break-up.

Break it up: Remove the lid and use a meat chopper or a firm spatula to break the meat into very small, fine crumbles. A ground beef chopper tool is genuinely useful here — those fan-shaped choppers make it fast and easy to break the meat into a uniform crumble without leaving chunks. Work through the entire batch, breaking up anything larger than a small pea. This step takes 2–3 minutes but it’s what gets you to that authentic loose-meat texture.

Cook uncovered on low for 2½–3 hours: Turn the slow cooker to low, leave the lid OFF, and let the magic happen. The liquid will slowly evaporate while the meat continues to cook in the reducing broth. Stir every 30–45 minutes and break up any clumps that have reformed. As the liquid cooks down, you’ll notice the meat starting to look more concentrated and deeply colored — that’s exactly what you want. By the end, the beef should be in a fine, uniform crumble with just a glossy sheen of moisture. If you press a spoonful against the side of the slow cooker, it should hold its shape briefly before falling apart — that’s perfect.

Serve: Spoon a generous heap onto a warm bun — be generous, this is Iowa, not a diet plate. Top with mustard, ketchup, and pickles. That’s the traditional way. Some people add chopped raw onion. A cold pickle on the side is mandatory as far as I’m concerned.

Helpful Tips

• Use lean beef. 90/10 or 93/7 is ideal. Fattier beef releases too much grease into the cooking liquid and makes the meat greasy instead of juicy. If you accidentally use 80/20, you can spoon off some of the fat during the first break-up step.
• Don’t skip the lid-off phase. Keeping the lid on the whole time leaves you with too much liquid and the meat tastes boiled. The uncovered cook-down is what makes the flavor concentrate and what gives you that properly loose, slightly sticky (in the best way) texture.
• Stir every 30–45 minutes during the uncovered phase. This helps the liquid evaporate evenly and keeps the meat from sitting in liquid on one side while the other side dries out. It also gives you a chance to break up any clumps that have formed since your last stir.
• Warm your buns. Wrap them in a damp paper towel and microwave for 20 seconds, or split and toast them lightly in a skillet or toaster oven. A warm, slightly toasty bun holds up to the meat better and makes the whole sandwich feel more intentional.
• Keep it warm for a crowd. Once the meat is done, switch the slow cooker to warm and leave it. It holds perfectly for hours, which is why this is such a great party food. Have buns, toppings, and napkins nearby and let people serve themselves.
• Taste before serving. Once the liquid has cooked down, give the meat a taste and adjust. Sometimes it needs a tiny pinch of salt, sometimes a small splash more of Worcestershire. The bases vary in saltiness by brand, so always taste at the end.

Serving Suggestions

In Iowa, a Maid Rite comes on a plain white hamburger bun with yellow mustard, ketchup, and dill pickles. That’s not a suggestion — that’s the canon. But if you want to branch out:

• Classic Iowa style: Yellow mustard, ketchup, dill pickles. End of list.
• Add raw onion: Finely diced white onion is traditional at some locations. It adds a sharp crunch that plays nicely against the soft meat.
• Cheese: A slice of American cheese melted over the meat takes it in a cheeseburger direction. Not traditional but absolutely not wrong.
• Pretzel bun: The slightly salty, chewy pretzel bun is a great upgrade from a plain bun — it holds up to the meat without getting soggy as fast.
• Open-faced: Pile the meat on a single slice of toasted bread and eat it with a fork. Especially good for lunch leftovers.

On the side: crinkle-cut fries, potato chips, coleslaw, or a simple green salad. At Maid Rite restaurants, a chocolate shake is the traditional accompaniment. I’m not going to talk you out of that.

Storage and Make-Ahead

Refrigerator: Store leftover meat in an airtight container for up to 4 days. Reheat in a skillet over medium-low with a splash of water or beef broth to loosen it back up — the microwave works but tends to dry it out a bit. Add the liquid and stir as it heats.

Freezer: The cooked meat freezes beautifully. Let it cool completely, then store in freezer-safe bags or containers for up to 3 months. Flatten the bags so they stack easily. Thaw in the fridge overnight and reheat on the stove with a splash of broth. It comes back to life almost exactly as it was.

Make-ahead: This is genuinely one of the best make-ahead crowd meals. Make it the day before, refrigerate the meat in the slow cooker insert, and reheat on low for a couple of hours the next day. It might taste even better the second day — the flavors meld overnight and the seasoning seems more cohesive. I make this for every large family gathering and always make it the day before.

Frequently Asked Questions

What is a Maid Rite exactly?

Maid Rite is an Iowa-based restaurant chain that’s been around since 1926, founded in Muscatine, Iowa by Fred Angell, who reportedly developed the recipe by accident. The loose meat sandwich became a regional institution — at its peak, there were over 400 Maid Rite locations, mostly in the Midwest. Today there are fewer locations, but the ones that remain are busy and beloved. The actual recipe is a closely guarded secret — employees sign confidentiality agreements and the beef is seasoned off-site at a central facility. The key difference from a sloppy joe is that there’s no tomato sauce at all. It’s all about the seasoned meat itself, served on a plain bun with mustard, ketchup, and pickles.

Why does my Maid Rite still have too much liquid after 3 hours uncovered?

Every slow cooker runs differently — some run hotter and faster, some are gentler. If yours still has significant liquid at the 3-hour mark, simply keep it going. Check every 30 minutes. You can also turn the heat back to high (with the lid still off) for the last 30–60 minutes to speed up evaporation. The finished product should be moist but not soupy — think of it like ground beef that’s been braised until just barely saucy, not swimming in liquid.

Can I use a different type of meat?

Ground turkey works and is a bit lighter, though the flavor is noticeably different — less rich. If you use turkey, you may want to add a tiny extra splash of Worcestershire to compensate for the milder flavor. Ground pork makes a richer, slightly fattier version that’s also good. Whatever you use, go lean — the recipe is designed around lean beef and excess fat will pool in the liquid rather than absorbing into the meat.

I can’t find beef or chicken base — can I substitute?

Yes, but scale back the salt elsewhere. Use 1 beef bouillon cube and 1 chicken bouillon cube dissolved in the cup of warm water. Standard bouillon tends to be saltier than base, so skip adding any extra salt and taste it at the end before deciding if it needs anything. The flavor won’t be quite as rich as with a paste-style base, but it’ll still be good. If you find Better Than Bouillon at a larger grocery store or online, it’s worth tracking down — it keeps in the fridge for months and the quality difference is real.

How many does this serve?

Two pounds of beef makes about 8 generous sandwiches — the kind where the meat is heaped up, not scraped thin. For a party of 15–20, I’d triple the recipe. The slow cooker handles it well if you have a 7 or 8-quart model, or split between two slow cookers. The proportions scale directly, no adjustments needed.

Can I make this in an Instant Pot or on the stovetop?

Stovetop works — brown the beef in a large skillet, drain excess fat, then add the seasoning liquid and simmer uncovered over medium-low heat for 30–45 minutes until the liquid reduces. Stir frequently and break up the meat as you go. The texture will be similar, just faster. I haven’t made this in an Instant Pot because the pressure cooking environment doesn’t allow liquid to evaporate the way this recipe needs — you’d end up with too much liquid and a more stew-like consistency.

Do I really have to use both beef and chicken base?

Technically no, but yes. I’ve made this with just beef base and with just chicken base. Neither is as good as both together. The beef base alone is too heavy. The chicken base alone is too light. Together they hit a balance that tastes like something took time and skill, even though it didn’t. It’s one of those recipe moves that seems unnecessary until you do a side-by-side comparison and immediately understand.

Related Recipes

• Crockpot Cheesy Potatoes
• Slow Cooker Pulled Pork
• Crockpot Enchilada Soup

Print

Crock Pot Maid Rites

Iowa-style loose meat sandwiches made in the slow cooker with finely crumbled seasoned ground beef.

Course Dinner

Cuisine American

Keyword crock pot maid rites, loose meat sandwich, maid rite recipe

Prep Time 10 minutes minutes

Cook Time 4 hours hours

Total Time 4 hours hours 10 minutes minutes

Servings 8 sandwiches

Author Kate

Ingredients

• 2 pounds lean ground beef uncooked
• 1 cup warm water
• 3/4 tablespoon dried minced onion
• 1 1/2 tablespoons packed light brown sugar
• 3/4 teaspoon low-sodium beef base
• 3/4 teaspoon low-sodium chicken base
• 1 1/2 tablespoons apple cider vinegar
• 1 1/2 tablespoons Worcestershire sauce
• 3/4 tablespoon low-sodium soy sauce
• 8 hamburger buns
• Ketchup mustard, and pickles, for serving

Instructions

• Set slow cooker to High. Add ground beef and break it into smaller chunks.
• In a measuring cup, combine warm water, dried onion, brown sugar, beef base, chicken base, apple cider vinegar, Worcestershire, and soy sauce. Stir until dissolved.
• Pour seasoning liquid over the beef and stir until the meat is coated.
• Cover and cook on High for 1 hour.
• Remove lid and break the meat into very small crumbles with a meat chopper or firm spatula.
• Turn slow cooker to Low and cook uncovered for 2 1/2 to 3 hours, stirring occasionally and breaking up any clumps.
• Continue cooking until most liquid has evaporated and the beef is finely crumbled with a glossy sheen.
• Serve a generous spoonful on warm hamburger buns with ketchup, mustard, pickles, or other toppings.

Notes

Use lean ground beef, ideally 90/10 or 93/7, so the meat stays juicy without getting greasy. Do not skip the uncovered cook-down because that step concentrates the flavor and creates the loose meat texture. Leftover meat keeps refrigerated for up to 4 days or frozen for up to 3 months. Reheat with a splash of broth or water.

A Little Story

I first had this chili at a work retreat in Galena, Illinois — cold November, sometimes snow. The boss’s wife made a giant pot and everyone stood around ladling into bowls while they talked. I recreated it when I got home and have been making it ever since. It’s become my go-to for using up Thanksgiving turkey.

Ingredient Breakdown

Turkey (1 lb, ground or shredded)

Ground turkey is the easiest weeknight option — brown it in the pot first, then add everything else. But this is also a perfect recipe for leftover Thanksgiving turkey. Just shred and add directly; the long simmer absorbs the flavor either way. One note: ground turkey breast is leaner and can turn dry — regular ground turkey (not breast-only) holds up better through a two-hour simmer.

Great Northern White Beans (2 cans, drained and rinsed)

Mild, creamy texture that suits white chili perfectly. Drain and rinse to remove excess sodium. They’ll break down slightly during the simmer, which naturally thickens the broth — that’s a feature, not a mistake.

Chicken Broth (4 cups)

The liquid base. Use low-sodium for more control — the green chilies and seasoning already add saltiness. Four cups gives you a broth-forward chili; reduce to 3 cups for a thicker version.

Green Chilies (7 oz can, chopped)

Mild, slightly smoky heat that’s different from cayenne. Don’t skip them — they’re what makes this taste like chili and not just turkey soup with beans. I’ve made it without in a pinch, and you can tell the difference.

Spices: Cumin, Oregano, Cayenne, Black Pepper

Cumin (2 tsp) is dominant and gives the chili its warm, earthy flavor. Oregano (1 tsp) adds a herby note. Cayenne (1/2 tsp) gives a noticeable kick — reduce to 1/4 tsp for heat-sensitive crowds, but don’t cut it entirely or the chili tastes flat. Black pepper (1/4 tsp) rounds it out.

Onion and Garlic

Half an onion chopped and 3 cloves of garlic minced. Don’t rush this step — giving the onion 2-3 minutes to soften before adding the liquid builds the base flavor and you’ll taste the difference.

Sour Cream (1/2 cup)

Added at the very end, just before serving. This is the step people rush and shouldn’t — add it after the pot is off the heat or the crock pot is turned off. Sour cream will curdle if it boils. You’ll know you’ve done it right when the broth goes from golden to pale and silky.

Serving Suggestions

Set out toppings and let everyone customize: shredded Monterey Jack or pepper jack, Fritos or tortilla chips, sliced jalapenos, extra sour cream, cilantro and lime, cornbread on the side.

Storage and Reheating

Refrigerate up to 4 days. The chili thickens as it sits — add a splash of chicken broth when reheating. Don’t bring to a full boil after the sour cream has been added. Freezer: freeze before the sour cream is added, up to 3 months. Stir in fresh sour cream after reheating from frozen.

Frequently Asked Questions

Can I use chicken instead of turkey?

Yes — this is essentially white chicken chili. Use 1 lb boneless chicken breast or thighs. Thighs are better here than breasts — they stay more tender through the long simmer. Or use rotisserie chicken added at the end.

Can I make this in the crock pot?

Yes. Combine everything except sour cream and cook on low 6-8 hours or high 3-4 hours. Stir in sour cream before serving with the heat off. That’s the one rule you can’t break with this recipe — the broth goes grainy in about 30 seconds of boiling after sour cream is added.

Is it spicy?

Mildly, yes — and that kick is essential to it tasting like chili. The 1/2 teaspoon cayenne gives a noticeable warmth. Reduce to 1/4 tsp for milder, or serve sliced jalapenos on the side so each person controls their own heat level.

Why does my white chili turn out watery?

Usually the beans weren’t drained well enough, or the simmer time was too short. Make sure to drain and rinse the beans thoroughly. If still too thin after two hours, mash a cup of the beans and stir them back in — it’s the fastest thickener you have and doesn’t change the flavor at all.

Why shouldn’t I boil the chili after adding sour cream?

High heat causes the proteins in sour cream to break down and separate, leaving a grainy, curdled broth. It looks wrong and tastes off. Add it at the very end with the heat off, stir it in, and serve immediately.

Related Recipes

• Crockpot Ravioli Casserole — another hands-off dinner that practically makes itself
• Crock Pot Beef and Noodles — hearty slow cooker dinner for cold nights
• Crock Pot Spinach and Artichoke Dip — great party appetizer in the slow cooker

Print

White Bean Turkey Chili

White bean turkey chili with onion, garlic, green chiles, cumin, oregano, cayenne, chicken broth, northern beans, and sour cream.

Course Soup

Cuisine American

Keyword turkey chili, white bean turkey chili

Prep Time 15 minutes minutes

Cook Time 2 hours hours

Total Time 2 hours hours 15 minutes minutes

Servings 8 servings

Author Kate

Ingredients

• 1/2 onion chopped
• 3 garlic cloves minced
• 1 pound shredded or cooked turkey or ground turkey
• 2 teaspoons ground cumin
• 1 teaspoon ground oregano
• 1/2 teaspoon cayenne pepper
• 1/4 teaspoon pepper
• 1 7- ounce can chopped green chiles
• 4 cups chicken broth
• 2 cans Northern white beans drained and rinsed
• 1/2 cup sour cream
• Jack cheese Fritos, and jalapeños, for serving

Instructions

• Combine onion, garlic, turkey, cumin, oregano, cayenne, pepper, green chiles, chicken broth, and drained beans in a pot or slow cooker.
• Simmer on the stove for 2 hours, or cook in the slow cooker on Low for 4 hours.
• Just before serving, stir in sour cream.
• Do not boil after adding sour cream.
• Serve with Jack cheese, Fritos, and jalapeños on the side.
• Keep warm in the slow cooker or on Low on the stove.

Notes

Do not bring the chili to a full boil after adding sour cream or it can separate. The chili thickens as it sits; add a splash of chicken broth when reheating. Freeze before adding sour cream for the best texture, then stir in fresh sour cream after reheating. Refrigerate leftovers up to 4 days.

A Little Story

I used to think biscuits and gravy was complicated — one of those diner things that required some special knowledge to pull off at home. Turns out the gravy is just flour, milk, and sausage cooked together in a skillet. You have those things in your kitchen right now. It takes maybe 10 minutes to come together.

The casserole version came about because I wanted to make it for a group without standing over the stove doing individual servings. Put everything in a pan, bake it, put it in the middle of the table and let people dig in. It’s one of those recipes that looks and tastes more impressive than the effort it actually takes — which is always what you want when you’re feeding people.

Why This Recipe Works

From-scratch gravy that actually tastes like something. This isn’t a gravy-packet situation. You’re cooking the sausage, sprinkling flour directly over the meat to build a roux, then adding whole milk and simmering until thick. The result is a rich, creamy, deeply savory gravy that a packet could never replicate.

The two-layer biscuit method matters. Putting the bottom biscuits in the oven for a few minutes before adding the gravy gives them a head start so they cook through instead of sitting raw and doughy. Top biscuits go on after the gravy and get the rest of their bake time to turn golden. Two layers, two textures, one pan.

Cayenne is the secret. Just a pinch of cayenne in the gravy gives it a little warmth without making it spicy. It’s the difference between gravy that tastes fine and gravy that tastes like something you’d order at a restaurant.

Minimal cleanup. One skillet for the gravy, one baking dish for the casserole. That’s it.

Ingredients You’ll Need

1 lb breakfast sausage — This is your gravy base and your protein. Get it from the meat counter if you can — sage breakfast sausage from the butcher counter has the best flavor. Tubes of Jimmy Dean original or hot work well too. If you want more heat, spicy breakfast sausage is an easy swap. I’d avoid anything labeled “mild Italian” — the fennel throws the flavor off in a way that doesn’t work here.

3 tablespoons all-purpose flour — This is what thickens the gravy into that classic, spoon-coating consistency. You cook it with the sausage for just a minute — this toasts the flour slightly and gets rid of the raw taste. Don’t rush this step and don’t skip it; raw flour flavor in gravy is unmistakable and not in a good way.

2½ cups whole milk — Don’t swap for skim or 2% if you can avoid it. Whole milk gives the gravy its richness and creaminess. Thinner milk means thinner gravy that won’t coat the biscuits the same way. If you have to use 2%, it will still work — just not as rich.

Pinch of cayenne pepper — This is the ingredient people skip and then wonder why the gravy tastes flat. You won’t taste heat — it just wakes everything up. Don’t leave it out.

Kosher salt + freshly ground black pepper — Season this gravy aggressively. Biscuits and gravy needs bold salt and a lot of black pepper — that cracked pepper flavor is part of what makes it taste like biscuits and gravy. Don’t be shy. Taste it before you pour it into the dish.

1 can (16 oz) Pillsbury flaky biscuits — Each biscuit gets cut into quarters or sixths before layering. Flaky layers work really well here because they separate slightly as they bake. Buttermilk biscuits work too. Grands are a good choice if you want a heartier, thicker biscuit layer. I wouldn’t use crescent rolls — they go too soft and lose their structure once the gravy hits them.

2 tablespoons melted butter — Brushed over the top biscuits before the final bake. This is what gives the top layer that golden, shiny, diner-quality look. It’s a 30-second step and it matters.

How to Make Biscuits and Gravy Casserole

Step 1: Brown the Sausage

Preheat your oven to 375° and spray a large baking dish with cooking spray. In a large skillet over medium-high heat, cook the sausage until it’s browned all over, breaking it up as it cooks. You want actual browning here — not just gray. If there’s a lot of excess grease in the pan, drain some off — you want a little fat left to help the roux, but not a puddle.

Step 2: Make the Gravy

Sprinkle the flour over the browned sausage and stir to coat, cooking for about a minute — it’ll look pasty and clumped, and that’s exactly right. This is your roux building. Add the cayenne, salt, and a generous amount of cracked black pepper. Then pour in the milk all at once, stirring constantly. Bring it to a boil, then reduce the heat and simmer for about 5 minutes, stirring frequently, until the gravy is thick enough to coat a spoon. This is the step people rush and shouldn’t — give it the full 5 minutes and you’ll know it’s ready when a spoon dragged across the bottom of the skillet leaves a clear trail. Remove from heat.

Step 3: Pre-Bake the Bottom Biscuits, Then Add the Gravy

Cut each biscuit into quarters or sixths. Arrange half the biscuit pieces in a single layer on the bottom of your prepared baking dish. Put the dish in the oven for 3–4 minutes — the edges will just barely start to puff and look set, which is what you want. Don’t skip this step; if you skip it, the bottom biscuits end up steamed-doughy instead of baked. Pull the dish out and pour the sausage gravy over the biscuits, spreading it evenly.

Step 4: Top With Biscuits and Bake

Scatter the remaining biscuit pieces over the top of the gravy. Brush generously with melted butter. Bake at 375° for 17–18 minutes, until the top biscuits are deep golden brown and the gravy is bubbling at the edges — you’ll be able to hear it. Check that the bottom biscuits are cooked through — they should feel set, not squishy, when you press gently with a spoon. If they give too much, cover with foil and give it another 5 minutes.

Tips for the Best Biscuits and Gravy Casserole

• Season your gravy boldly. Underseasoned gravy is the most common mistake with this recipe. Biscuits and gravy needs salt and a lot of black pepper. Taste the gravy before you pour it in and adjust.
• Don’t skip the pre-bake on the bottom biscuits. Even just 3–4 minutes in the oven before you add the gravy makes a big difference. It’s the only way to ensure those bottom pieces cook through instead of staying doughy.
• Use whole milk. The gravy really does come out better with whole milk. It’s thicker, richer, and coats the biscuits properly.
• Don’t skip the butter brush on top. It’s a small step but it makes the top biscuits look golden and gorgeous instead of pale and flat.
• Let it rest 5 minutes before serving. The gravy firms up slightly as it sits and makes cleaner servings.

Serving Suggestions

This casserole is a natural centerpiece for weekend brunch. It works for:

• Holiday mornings — Christmas morning, Easter brunch, Mother’s Day — it’s impressive without being complicated
• Feeding a crowd — one pan feeds 6–8 people comfortably
• Brunch potlucks — it travels in the pan, reheats well, and one pan goes a surprising distance
• Dinner for breakfast — zero judgment; this is filling enough for any meal of the day

For a full spread, add scrambled eggs, a simple fruit salad, or crispy hashbrowns alongside. If it’s just your family, this is plenty on its own.

Storage and Make-Ahead

Refrigerator: Leftovers keep covered in the fridge for up to 3 days. The biscuits will continue to absorb the gravy as they sit, getting softer — which some people actually prefer.

Reheating: Microwave individual portions covered for 2–3 minutes, or reheat the whole pan in a 325° oven for 10–12 minutes covered with foil.

Make-ahead option: Make the sausage gravy the night before and refrigerate it in a container. In the morning, cut your biscuits and assemble the casserole fresh — you’re really only talking about 5 minutes of morning prep. If the cold gravy has thickened up overnight, stir in a small splash of milk while reheating it on the stovetop to loosen it back up before pouring.

Can You Freeze This Casserole?

I don’t recommend freezing the fully assembled and baked casserole — the biscuits don’t hold up well after being frozen and thawed. The texture gets soggy and falls apart.

However, you can freeze the sausage gravy on its own. Let it cool completely, freeze flat in a zip bag or container, and thaw in the fridge overnight. Then assemble the casserole fresh in the morning with new biscuits. Works great as a freezer-prep strategy.

Variations and Substitutions

Spicy version: Use hot breakfast sausage and add extra cayenne or a few dashes of hot sauce into the gravy. This is my personal preference.

Cheesy biscuits and gravy casserole: Stir ½ cup shredded sharp cheddar into the gravy before assembling, or sprinkle cheese over the top layer of biscuits before the final bake. Or both.

Breakfast casserole version: Scramble 3–4 eggs and layer them in with the gravy between the biscuit layers. Adds protein and makes it even more of a complete one-dish breakfast.

Lighter version: Use turkey breakfast sausage, 2% milk, and drain all the fat. You lose some richness but it’s still a solid breakfast casserole.

Biscuit swap: Any refrigerated biscuit works — Grands buttermilk, store-brand, or even canned crescent roll dough cut into chunks for a slightly different texture.

Add vegetables: Diced jalapeños or green chiles stirred into the gravy add heat and color. Diced sautéed onion and bell pepper add bulk and flavor.

What to Do With Leftovers

Leftover biscuits and gravy casserole reheats really well and is arguably better the next day once everything has melded together. Microwave it covered for 2–3 minutes, or warm portions in a skillet over low heat.

If the leftovers seem a little dry after sitting in the fridge, stir a small splash of milk into your portion before reheating to bring some creaminess back.

Leftover gravy on its own is excellent over toast, biscuits, scrambled eggs, or a bowl of mashed potatoes. It’s a great base for other things and keeps well for 3 days refrigerated.

A Few Things That Make This Even Better

Two things genuinely move the needle on this recipe:

A good cast iron skillet for the gravy. The sausage browns more evenly, fond builds up properly, and the gravy develops a depth of flavor you just don’t get from a thin pan. A Lodge 12-inch cast iron skillet handles the whole gravy start to finish — stovetop to table in one pan.

Quality breakfast sausage. The gravy takes on all the flavor from the sausage, so this is not the place to grab the cheapest tube on the shelf. Jimmy Dean Original is consistently good, or pick up bulk sage breakfast sausage from the butcher counter if you have access to it. Hot or spicy varieties work beautifully here too.

Frequently Asked Questions

Can I use homemade biscuits instead of canned?

Yes. If you have a go-to homemade biscuit recipe, use it. Just give the bottom layer a short pre-bake before adding the gravy so they don’t end up underdone. Honestly, canned Pillsbury biscuits are genuinely good here — the flaky layers hold up well in the casserole — so don’t feel like you have to make them from scratch to get a great result. But if you’re going homemade, they’ll be excellent.

Can I skip draining the sausage fat?

You can — it makes the gravy even richer. But if your sausage releases a lot of grease, draining most of it gives you a cleaner-tasting gravy that isn’t greasy on the tongue. I leave a tablespoon or so in the pan for flavor and drain the rest. It’s a judgment call, but if you see more than a quarter inch of fat pooled in the pan, drain it.

Can I double this recipe?

Yes. Use a 9×13 or larger baking dish and double every ingredient. Add a few extra minutes to the bake time and check for doneness — a bigger casserole holds more heat in the center, so the bottom biscuits may need that extra time to cook through. Check them before you pull the pan.

What if my bottom biscuits aren’t cooked through?

This almost always means the pre-bake was too short. Three to four minutes is the minimum — if your oven runs cool, go 5. If you pull the final casserole and the bottom is still doughy, cover the pan tightly with foil and give it another 5 minutes. The foil traps the steam and helps the bottom cook through without burning the top biscuits.

Can I use a different kind of meat?

Ground turkey sausage works well for a leaner version — just make sure it’s seasoned breakfast sausage and not plain ground turkey, which won’t have enough flavor on its own. Crumbled bacon is also fantastic in the gravy if you want a smokier version. I wouldn’t use ground beef here — it doesn’t have the right spice profile for a gravy that’s supposed to taste like breakfast.

More Breakfast Recipes to Try

• Sausage and Egg Breakfast Casserole
• Easy Bacon and Egg Breakfast Casserole
• Easy Breakfast Pizza

Print

Biscuits and Gravy Casserole

This biscuits and gravy casserole is absolutely fantastic. America's most indulgent hearty and classic breakfast in breakfast casserole form.

Course Breakfast

Cuisine American

Keyword Biscuits and Gravy Casserole

Prep Time 15 minutes minutes

Cook Time 20 minutes minutes

Total Time 35 minutes minutes

Servings 8 servings

Calories 500kcal

Ingredients

• 1 lb. breakfast sausage*
• 3 tbsp. all-purpose flour
• 2 1/2 c. whole milk
• Pinch cayenne pepper
• salt to taste
• Freshly ground black pepper
• 1 16 oz. can Pillsbury flaky biscuits each biscuit cut into quarters or sixths
• 2 tbsp. butter melted
• * I get this from the meat counter (sage breakfast sausage)

Instructions

• Preheat oven to 375° and spray a large baking dish with cooking spray.
• In a large skillet cook sausage until browned all over.
• If there is a lot of grease, drain if desired and sprinkle flour all over the sausage, cooking for just a minute longer.
• Season with cayenne, salt and freshly cracked black pepper.
• Pour milk over mixture, constantly stirring while bringing the mixture to a boil.
• Reduce heat and simmer about 5 minutes until thick.
• Remove from heat.
• Place half your diced biscuits onto the bottom of your baking dish, bake those for a few minutes in the oven, remove from oven and pour gravy mixture on top.
• Top with the remaining biscuits and brush with butter.
• Place in the oven to bake 17-18 minutes, until biscuits are golden and sausage mixture is bubbling making sure that biscuits in the bottom of the casserole dish are baked through as well.
• Enjoy!

If you make this biscuits and gravy casserole, I’d love to hear how it turned out! Leave a comment below — and if you made any tweaks (extra spice, added cheese, used different sausage), let me know what you did. It always helps other readers too.

Kindle Unlimited Deals

Signing up for a full year of anything feels like a commitment — especially when you’re used to the flexibility of month-to-month.

But if you’re a regular reader, the math on Kindle Unlimited’s 12-month membership is hard to argue with. The question isn’t really whether it’s a good deal. It’s whether it’s the right deal for you.

This post covers exactly that: what you get, what it costs, who should actually buy it, and the current deals available for both new and existing members.

See Current Kindle Unlimited Deals Here

What You Actually Get With Kindle Unlimited 12-Month Membership

Kindle Unlimited gives you unlimited access to over 5 million ebooks, thousands of audiobooks, and popular magazines — all for one flat monthly rate. The 12-month membership locks in a discounted rate compared to paying month-to-month.

Here’s what the pricing looks like right now:

• Monthly plan: $11.99/month — cancel anytime, no commitment
• 6-month gift plan: $65.95 ($10.99/month) — saves about $6 vs monthly over 6 months
• 12-month gift plan: $131.89/year ($10.99/month) — saves about $12 vs paying monthly all year
• 24-month gift plan: $263.78 for 2 years ($10.99/month) — same per-month rate, just paid further in advance

The savings vs monthly aren’t dramatic, but that’s not really the point. When you’ve already paid for the year, you actually use the subscription. You explore more. You try genres you’d never spend $14.99 testing. You get your money’s worth instead of second-guessing it every 30 days.

New member deal right now: If you’ve never tried KU, Amazon is currently offering 2 months for $0.99 total (limited time, eligibility varies). That’s basically free. Check if you qualify here.

The value really shows up when you compare it to buying books outright. Two full-price ebooks a month typically runs $20–$30. If Kindle Unlimited replaces even half of those purchases, the annual plan pays for itself in about four months.

Check If You Qualify for a Free Trial

Who Should Actually Buy the Annual Plan

Not everyone needs to lock in for 12 months — and that’s okay.

The annual membership makes sense if you’re a consistent reader who goes through at least 2–3 books per month. If you’re the type who downloads something, forgets about it for six weeks, and then feels guilty about wasting money, the monthly plan gives you more flexibility to pause when life gets busy.

You’re a great fit for the 12-month plan if:

• You read across multiple genres and love discovering new authors without financial risk
• You’re trying to cut your book budget but refuse to sacrifice your reading habit
• You have kids who tear through chapter books and middle-grade series (KU has tons of family content)
• You listen to audiobooks during commutes, workouts, or while doing housework
• You hate the mental load of deciding which book is “worth” buying

Honest advice: if you’re on the fence, try the monthly plan for two or three months first. Track how many books you actually finish. If you’re consistently reading at least two per month, the annual plan will save you money and decision fatigue.

The Hidden Perks Nobody Talks About

Beyond the obvious unlimited books thing, there are some genuinely useful benefits that don’t get enough attention.

Audiobook access is included. Not every title has audio, but way more than you’d expect. You can switch between reading and listening on the same title, which is a lifesaver on busy days when sitting down to read feels impossible.

You can borrow up to 20 titles at once. This is huge if you’re a mood reader. Keep a mix of genres downloaded so you can switch between a thriller, a romance, and something practical depending on what you feel like that day.

The catalog includes a lot of current content. Yes, you’ll find indie and self-published titles, but you’ll also find backlist titles from major authors, complete series from bestselling writers, and books that were on the New York Times list a year or two ago.

A few other wins worth noting:

• Popular magazines are included — Real Simple, People, National Geographic — without separate subscriptions
• Your account syncs across every device (Kindle, phone, tablet)
• No late fees, no return deadlines — return books when you’re done to make room for new ones
• The guilt-free DNF: if a book isn’t working by page 50, return it and move on without losing a dime

What’s Actually in the Kindle Unlimited Library

Here’s where people get surprised: Kindle Unlimited is not the same as having access to every book on Amazon. The catalog is huge, but it’s curated.

You won’t find every current bestseller or brand-new release from major publishers. Big Five publishers tend to keep their newest titles out of KU. But the catalog is deep enough that most readers never run out of things to read.

What you’ll find plenty of:

1. Romance novels — This genre dominates KU. Contemporary, historical, rom-coms — it’s all here.
2. Thrillers and mysteries — Tons of page-turners from both indie authors and established names.
3. Self-help and business books — Practical guides on productivity, personal finance, parenting, and growth.
4. Kids’ books — Chapter books, early readers, and middle-grade series.
5. Sci-fi and fantasy — Especially series. If you love epic fantasy or space opera, there’s a deep bench here.

What’s harder to find: literary fiction from major publishers, brand-new releases from household-name authors, and niche academic non-fiction. If your list is primarily Pulitzer winners and Oprah Book Club picks, KU will feel limited. The workaround most readers use: KU for genre fiction and fun reads, the library for the literary stuff.

You can browse the full catalog here: Kindle Unlimited library

Monthly vs Annual vs 24-Month: The Real Cost Comparison

Let’s run the actual numbers.

Plan	Total Cost	Per Month	Best For
Monthly	$11.99/mo	$11.99	Testing it out
6-Month Gift	$65.95	$10.99	Short commitment
12-Month Gift	$131.89	$10.99	Regular readers
24-Month Gift	$263.78	$10.99	Set it and forget it

All the gift plans work out to the same $10.99/month — about $12/year less than paying month-to-month. The real advantage of going annual or longer isn’t the per-month savings, it’s removing the monthly “should I keep this?” decision from your life entirely.

Here’s another way to think about it: two traditionally published ebooks per month runs $20–$30. If KU replaces even half of those purchases, the annual plan pays for itself in about four months. Everything after that is pure savings.

Get the Kindle Unlimited 24-Month Plan Here

Current Deals for New Members

If you’ve never tried Kindle Unlimited before, you may qualify for a free 30-day trial. New subscribers can check eligibility here:

Check If You Qualify for a Free Kindle Unlimited Trial

This is what you’ll see if you’re eligible for the free month:

Kindle Unlimited Deals for Existing and Returning Members

Already used Kindle Unlimited before? You may still be eligible for a promotional deal. Past members have been offered 3 months of Kindle Unlimited for as low as $0.99 when Amazon runs a win-back promo.

Log into your Amazon account here to see if a returning member deal has been applied to your account.

Pro tip: Watch for promotional pricing during Prime Day, Black Friday, and the holiday season. Amazon frequently discounts KU memberships during these windows — sometimes as low as $4.99–$5.99/month even on longer plans.

The Biggest Complaints (And Whether They’re Deal-Breakers)

No subscription is perfect. Here’s what you should know upfront:

Not every book is included. Newer releases from Big Five publishers are almost never in KU. If you want to read a specific bestseller the week it drops, you may have to buy it separately. Most readers find this easy to work around by using the library for those titles.

Self-published quality varies. You’ll find incredible indie authors alongside books that needed another round of editing. Check ratings and reviews before diving in — a 4.5-star average with thousands of reviews is usually a safe bet.

You don’t own the books. When you return a title, it leaves your library. If you want to revisit it, you borrow it again. For books you know you’ll re-read, buying them outright makes more sense.

The 20-book borrow limit. You can have 20 titles checked out at once. For most readers this is plenty. If you’re a serial book hoarder, it takes some adjustment.

No prorated refunds on the annual plan. If you pay for 12 months and cancel after three, you won’t get the difference back automatically. Amazon customer service has made exceptions in some cases, but it’s not guaranteed. Don’t go annual unless you’re confident you’ll use it for at least six months.

Kindle Unlimited vs Prime Reading: What’s the Difference?

Amazon has a few different reading options and they’re easy to confuse.

Kindle Unlimited is a standalone subscription — $11.99/month or the annual/gift plans above. Over 5 million titles, audiobook access, magazines. Available to anyone regardless of Prime membership.

Prime Reading is included free with Amazon Prime. Much smaller catalog (around 3,000 titles). If you already have Prime, you get this automatically at no extra cost.

The difference comes down to catalog size. Prime Reading is fine for casual readers who go through one or two books a month. But if you’re a regular reader who loves digging into full series or exploring genres, Kindle Unlimited is the upgrade worth paying for. The catalog is exponentially larger, and the audiobook access alone adds significant value.

Read our full comparison: Kindle Unlimited vs Prime Reading

Best Tips to Get the Most Out of Your Membership

• Build your reading queue before you subscribe. Don’t open the app and hope something catches your eye. Use Goodreads or book blogs to build a list of titles you actually want to read.
• Use the “Read for Free” filter on Amazon. When browsing books, filter by Kindle Unlimited eligibility to surface current and popular titles that are included.
• Keep 20 books downloaded in different genres. That way you can mood-read without waiting for a download.
• Return books as soon as you finish (or give up on them). No penalty. Return and move on — it keeps your queue fresh.
• Download the Kindle app on your phone. Even with a dedicated Kindle device, having the app on your phone means you can read anywhere — carpool line, waiting rooms, whenever.
• Download audiobooks before trips. Load up offline content before a flight or road trip.
• Watch for promos before you go annual. Prime Day and Black Friday regularly bring discounted KU memberships. If you’re not in a rush, a little patience can save an extra $20–$30.

Get the Kindle Unlimited 24-Month Plan (Best Rate)

Frequently Asked Questions

How much is Kindle Unlimited per month?

The standard Kindle Unlimited price is $11.99 per month when you pay month-to-month, with no contract and the ability to cancel anytime.

How much is a year of Kindle Unlimited?

The 12-month Kindle Unlimited gift membership is $131.89/year, which works out to $10.99/month — saving about $12 compared to paying monthly all year. See the current annual plan here.

Is there a Kindle Unlimited 2-year subscription?

Yes. You can get a Kindle Unlimited 24-month gift membership for $263.78 at Amazon’s gift landing page. It works out to $10.99/month and can be gifted to someone else or to yourself.

Is there a Kindle Unlimited free trial?

New Kindle Unlimited customers may qualify for a free 30-day trial. Click here to check if you’re eligible. If you’ve used Kindle Unlimited before, you may still see a promotional rate for returning members — log in here to check your account.

Is Kindle Unlimited worth it?

Kindle Unlimited is worth it if you read at least 2–3 books per month. At $11.99/month, a single full-price ebook barely breaks even. But if you’re regularly going through 3+ books a month across any genre, the math works strongly in your favor — especially on the 12 or 24-month plan.

Is Kindle Unlimited free with Amazon Prime?

No. Kindle Unlimited is a separate subscription from Amazon Prime. Prime members do get access to Prime Reading at no extra cost, but Prime Reading has a much smaller catalog (roughly 3,000 titles) compared to KU’s 5 million+. See the full comparison here.

Are there Kindle Unlimited deals for existing customers?

Yes, periodically. Past members have been offered 3 months of Kindle Unlimited for as low as $0.99 as part of Amazon’s win-back promotions. Log into your Amazon account here to see if a returning member deal is available for you.

What happens if I cancel my Kindle Unlimited annual plan?

If you cancel an annual plan early, Amazon does not automatically prorate a refund. You’ll keep access through the end of your paid period. Amazon customer service has made exceptions on a case-by-case basis, but a refund is not guaranteed — so only go annual if you’re confident you’ll use it for at least six months.

Can I do Kindle Unlimited audiobooks?

Yes. Many titles in the Kindle Unlimited library include Audible narration, letting you switch between reading and listening on the same book. When browsing the library, look for the headphone icon on a title to confirm audiobook access is included.

Get Kindle Unlimited Here

A Little Story

This dip has been my go-to party appetizer for years. I’ve brought it to Super Bowl parties, family holiday gatherings, and neighborhood cookouts, and it’s never come home with leftovers. The first time I made it, three people texted me asking for the recipe before they even left. I couldn’t believe it — I thought they’d had it somewhere before. Turns out nobody had. It’s just that good, and it’s that simple.

Ingredient Breakdown

Cream Cheese (two 8 oz packages, softened)

This is your base. Softened is non-negotiable — cold cream cheese won’t mix smoothly and you’ll end up with lumps that won’t cook out. I’ve tried to shortcut this and regretted it every time. Leave it out for 30 minutes, or microwave in 10-second bursts. Full-fat or Neufchatel both work. Skip fat-free — it doesn’t melt right and the texture goes off.

Mayonnaise (1 cup)

Mayo loosens the cream cheese so the dip is scoopable instead of stiff. Use regular full-fat mayo. Light mayo works but the dip comes out noticeably thinner and less rich — you can tell. Don’t skip it thinking you’ll save calories; without it the texture is dense and the chips struggle.

Green Chilies (4 oz can, chopped, drained)

Mild, earthy pepper flavor with a little smokiness and barely any heat. Drain them well — extra liquid makes the dip runny. This is the ingredient people skip when they can’t find it, and you can taste the difference. If you must skip them, add more jalapenos, but you’ll lose the mellow depth that balances the heat.

Jalapenos (4 oz can, diced, or 1/2 cup fresh, finely chopped)

This is where the heat comes from — don’t skimp if you want it to taste like a jalapeno popper. Canned are convenient and consistent; fresh taste sharper but the heat level varies wildly pepper to pepper. I use canned unless I have fresh ones on hand. Either way, drain them well or the dip gets watery.

Parmesan Cheese (1 cup, grated)

Skip the powdered canister parmesan — this is the one ingredient worth buying right. The anti-caking agents in pre-shredded and powdered parmesan prevent clean browning. You want freshly grated or refrigerated shredded. That’s what gives you the golden, slightly crispy crust that makes this dip look as good as it tastes.

How to Make It

1. Preheat oven to 400 degrees F. Get this going first so it’s hot when your dip is prepped.
2. Mix cream cheese and mayo. Blend softened cream cheese and mayo with a spoon, spatula, or hand mixer until creamy and lump-free. If you see chunks of cream cheese, keep mixing. They won’t disappear in the oven — what you see in the bowl is what you get in the dish.
3. Stir in the peppers. Drain both cans well, then fold them into the bowl. You want peppers spread throughout — not random pockets of plain cream cheese.
4. Spread into an 8×8 baking dish. Smooth the top into an even layer. Uneven spots mean uneven browning — the thin parts cook faster and can get dry.
5. Top with parmesan. Sprinkle evenly over the whole surface and press it down lightly so it sticks. Don’t be shy — full coverage is what gives you that golden crispy top everywhere. Bare patches stay pale and soft.
6. Bake 15-20 minutes. You’re looking for two things: bubbles breaking the surface around the edges, and the parmesan turning golden brown. At 15 minutes, check it. If it’s bubbly but not browned, give it 3-5 more. The edges should look a little darker than the center — that’s right.
7. Rest 2-3 minutes, then serve. The dip is molten right out of the oven — it needs a few minutes to tighten up slightly. Skip the rest and the first scoop comes out soupy. Serve straight from the baking dish.

Serving Suggestions

Chips and crackers: Tortilla chips are the classic — sturdy enough to scoop without breaking, and the corn flavor doesn’t compete with the dip. Lime-flavored tortilla chips add a nice citrusy pop. Corn chips (Fritos) bring extra salt and crunch. For crackers: Ritz, Wheat Thins, Triscuits, or pita chips all work.

Sides: Fresh veggies like celery, bell peppers, or cucumber give guests a lighter option. This dip holds its own — it doesn’t need much company.

Storage and Make-Ahead

Fridge: Let cool, cover tightly, and refrigerate for 3-4 days. The flavors actually improve after a day as everything melds together.

Reheating: Cover with foil and reheat in a 350 degree F oven for about 15 minutes, or microwave individual portions for 30-45 seconds. If it seems too thick after reheating, stir in a spoonful of mayo or sour cream to loosen it up.

Freezing: Not recommended. Cream cheese and mayo can separate and get grainy when frozen and thawed.

Make ahead: Mix the entire dip (without the parmesan topping) up to 24 hours in advance. Cover and refrigerate. Add parmesan right before baking. This is actually how I prefer to do it for parties — the flavors meld overnight and it goes straight into the oven when guests arrive.

Frequently Asked Questions

Can I make this less spicy?

Yes, and it’s still worth making. Cut the jalapenos in half or leave them out entirely and just use the green chilies. The dip still has flavor — you just lose the kick. I’ve made it this way for family gatherings where half the table doesn’t do spicy and nobody complained.

Can I use fresh jalapenos instead of canned?

Yes — use about 1/2 cup finely chopped. The flavor is sharper and brighter, but the heat level varies wildly pepper to pepper. I’ve had fresh jalapenos that were nearly sweet and ones that were genuinely hot. Canned are consistent, which matters when you’re making this for a crowd. If you go fresh, taste one first and adjust the amount.

Can I substitute the parmesan?

Technically yes, but I’d push back on it. Pepper jack or cheddar on top will melt instead of crisp — you lose the whole golden crust that makes this dip look as good as it tastes. If you’re in a pinch, do it. But parmesan is what makes the top layer worth fighting over.

What size baking dish do I need?

An 8×8 square dish or a 9-inch pie plate. You want it deep enough to stay creamy in the middle. A larger dish spreads the dip too thin — it’ll cook faster, dry out at the edges, and there’s less depth to scoop from. The 8×8 is the right call.

Can I serve this cold?

You can, but I don’t think it’s the move. Cold, it’s dense and a bit stiff — the mayo and cream cheese firm up in the fridge. Baked is where this dip is at its best. That said, leftovers spread cold on a toasted bagel or crackers are genuinely good the next day.

How do I know it’s done baking?

Two things: bubbles around the edges, and the parmesan turning golden brown. Not pale, not just melted — golden brown. If it’s 15 minutes and bubbly but still pale on top, give it 3-5 more minutes. That extra time is the difference between a good dip and a great one.

Related Recipes

• Crock Pot Spinach and Artichoke Dip — another hot party dip, hands-off in the slow cooker
• Baked Crab Rangoon Dip — baked dip with a crispy homemade wonton chip
• Seven Layer Dip — cold, no-bake crowd-pleaser
• Taco Dip — another cold layered dip that always disappears fast
• Crab Dip with Cream Cheese — no-bake, 24-hour rest, deli-style cold dip

Print

JALAPENO POPPER DIP

I made this dip for a family gathering last month, and three family members asked me to text them the recipe before they even left. THREE. That's when I knew I had a winner. It's quick—no hovering over the stove, no wondering if anyone's actually going to want it. Just creamy, spicy, cheesy goodness that works every single time.

Course Appetizer

Cuisine Mexican

Keyword jalapeno popper dip

Prep Time 20 minutes minutes

Cook Time 20 minutes minutes

Total Time 40 minutes minutes

Servings 16 servings

Calories 231kcal

Author Kate Sorensen

Equipment

• Mixing Bowl
• Baking Dish 1 ½ to 2 quarts size
• Spatula
• Can Opener

Ingredients

• 2 8 oz packages cream cheese, softened
• 1 cup mayonnaise
• 1 4 oz can chopped green chilies, drained
• 1 4 oz can diced jalapeños (or ~½ cup fresh, finely chopped)
• 1 cup grated parmesan cheese

Instructions

• Preheat your oven to 400°F. Get this going first so it's hot and ready when your dip is prepped. If your oven runs cool, bump it up to 425°F.
• Mix the cream cheese and mayo until smooth. In a bowl, combine the softened cream cheese and mayo. Use a spoon, spatula, or hand mixer to blend until creamy and lump-free. About a minute by hand, or 30 seconds with a mixer. If you see chunks of cream cheese, keep mixing.
• Stir in the green chilies and jalapeños. Drain both cans well, then add them to the bowl. Fold everything together with a spatula until the peppers are spread throughout. You want every scoop to have peppers, not random pockets of plain cream cheese.
• Spread into a baking dish. Use your spatula to scrape the dip into an 8x8 pan (or similar) and smooth the top into an even layer. This helps it bake evenly.
• Top with parmesan. Sprinkle the parmesan evenly over the whole thing. Don't be shy—you want full coverage so you get that golden, crispy top everywhere. Press it down lightly so it sticks to the dip and doesn't slide off when you scoop.
• Bake for 15 to 20 minutes. Slide it into the oven and set a timer. You're looking for the dip to bubble around the edges and the parmesan to turn golden brown. If it's bubbly but not browned after 15 minutes, give it another 3 to 5 minutes. If it's browning too fast, tent it loosely with foil. When the top is golden and you can see bubbles breaking the surface, it's done.
• Let it cool for 2 to 3 minutes, then serve. This dip is molten when it first comes out. Let it sit for just a couple minutes so it thickens slightly and people don't burn their mouths. Serve straight from the baking dish with tortilla chips, corn chips, sturdy crackers, or even sliced baguette.

Notes

• Adjust heat: reduce or increase jalapeños depending on preference.
• This recipe makes about 4 cups of dip.
• Fresh jalapeños cost less and taste sharper than canned.
• Can be prepped ahead (without parmesan topping); bake before serving.
• Stores 3–4 days in fridge; reheat covered.
• This dip is molten when it first comes out—let it cool a few minutes before serving so people don't burn their mouths.
• Don't have a hand mixer? A fork and patience work just fine.
• No small baking dish? Use a slightly larger one, but watch it since the dip will spread thinner and might cook faster.
• Got an oven-safe skillet? That works too.

 

If you’ve ever wished you could bottle up the magic of a cotton candy carnival and sip it guilt-free, well, you’re in for a treat. This cotton candy flavored water is like a party in your mouth without all the sugar (I’ve been trying to cut back on sugary drinks, so if you appreciate this recipe, let me know, I’ll share more of my favorites!!)

Made with just a couple of Starburst drink mix packets and some ice-cold water, it’s sweet, refreshing, and tastes just like those nostalgic pink and blue spun sugar clouds that our daughter obsesses over anytime we see them.

And best of all? It’s a non-alcoholic cotton candy drink you can enjoy anytime.

Poolside. At a kid’s party.

Or just because Tuesday was a little too Tuesday, ya know?

Before we go too much into this recipe (can I even call it that, it’s SO easy!), let me mention that you can find this water mix recipe on this free printable with 144 water mix flavor combinations!

Get your free list of 144 flavored water recipes here! 

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

• Tastes like cotton candy without the sticky fingers (hello, mamas … #winning!)
• Only 3 ingredients
• Perfect for summer and full of cotton candy aesthetic vibes
• Customizable sweetness with just water
• Keep you moving towards those hydration goals (and hydrated skin!)

Ingredients

• 1 Starburst Blue Raspberry Drink Mix Packet
• 1 Starburst All Pink Drink Mix Packet
• 20 ounces of cold water
• Ice
• Extra water (optional, to taste)

Instructions

1. Pour both Starburst drink mix packets into a blender bottle or large cup.
2. Add 20 ounces of cold water and shake (or stir) until dissolved.
3. Pour over ice in a glass.
4. Taste and add more water if needed for your preferred sweetness level.

Tips for the Best Cotton Candy Drink

• Use very cold water so it’s instantly refreshing, unless you have time for it to chill out in the fridge, then by all means, start with warm water!
• Let the flavors sit for a minute or two for better blending.
• Add a sugared rim, paper straw, or cotton candy garnish for party flair if you’re using this cotton candy drink recipe for a party!

Variations

• Fizzy version: Use sparkling water instead of regular water.
• Mocktail: Add lemon-lime soda and garnish with candy.
• Adult cocktail: Add vodka for a fun blue cotton candy cocktail.

Serving Suggestions

• Serve in clear cups or mason jars to show off the pink & blue swirl.
• Garnish with cotton candy or rock candy for aesthetics.
• Perfect for pool parties, baby showers, or a girl’s night in.

Storage and Reheating

This drink is best fresh but can be made in advance and kept in the fridge for up to 24 hours. Stir before serving.

Nutrition Information (Approx. Per Serving)

• Calories: 10
• Sugar: 0g
• Carbs: 0g
• Fat: 0g
• Protein: 0g

*Nutrition may vary depending on the brand of mix used.

FAQs

Is drinking water with flavor packets good for you?

Yes, most flavor packets like Starburst are sugar-free and low-calorie, making them a great option if you’re trying to drink more water. Just check the ingredients for artificial sweeteners if you’re watching those.

How to add flavoring to water?

You can use powdered drink mixes, fruit slices, infused cubes, or herbs. This recipe uses flavor packets for max impact with zero effort.

Is flavored water good for your kidneys?

In general, yes. As long as you’re not consuming too many artificial additives, flavored water can be just as hydrating as plain water. If you have health concerns, consult your doctor.

Try Agency Skincare free and receive a personalized skincare plan tailored by dermatology providers. Agency products are created with research-backed ingredients and guided by licensed medical providers who understand your skin concerns.

For a limited time, new customers can sign up for a free 30-day trial skin care set — you just cover shipping.

If you’ve been searching for a way to try premium skincare without a long-term commitment, this Agency Skincare free trial offer is your best option – and I am SO excited to try it too!

What’s in the Free Trial Set of Agency Skincare?

When you start your Agency free trial, your shipment includes:

• One custom treatment bottle based on your skin concerns and skin goals
• Instructions showing the correct order to use skin care products in your daily skincare routine
• Online access to your dermatology provider for treatment adjustments
• Free support throughout your 30-day trial period

The trial may include products such as the Future Formula or Cloud Care Duo, which use active ingredients like tretinoin, niacinamide, azelaic acid, and tranexamic acid to target dark spots, fine lines, and acne.

You’ll also receive essentials like the cream oil cleanser and the weightless whipped moisturizer to help protect your moisture barrier and keep your skin nourished and balanced.

[socialpug_tweet tweet=”Is your skin a mess with the change of seasons?? Here’s the secret to get a FREE Agency Skincare set!” display_tweet=”Is your skin a mess with the change of seasons?? Here’s the secret to get a FREE Agency Skincare set!”]

You can see what’s in the free Agency Skincare Box here!

Why Try Agency Skincare Free?

• Access to dermatologist-designed products tailored to your skin’s precise needs
• Experience personalized prescription skincare from your own home
• Each custom cream is developed using your medical history and reviewed by a licensed provider
• No need for a clinic visit or ongoing subscription unless you choose to continue

Here’s how to get your Agency Skincare free trial step-by-step:

1. Start the skin quiz to share your main concern and skin background
2. Receive a personalized formula with an rx formula tailored for unique skin types
3. Confirm your shipping info
4. Pay only shipping and receive your Agency Skincare box within days

Results and Expectations – Before and After

Many users report noticeable results during the 30-day trial. Curious about Agency Skincare before and after photos?

It’s normal to experience peeling, dryness, or a temporary adjustment period with some prescription products like topical tretinoin. But many users see subtle changes in just a few weeks and see significant changes with a couple of months of regular use.

This skincare agency trial offer is ideal for trying before committing long-term.

Who Should Sign Up for Agency Free Trial?

The free trial for skincare agency users is designed for:

• First-time customers interested in custom treatments for hyperpigmentation, wrinkles, or melanin-related concerns
• People who want to test Agency skincare products before buying
• Shoppers searching for how to get free skincare products
• Visitors comparing plans and exploring Agency Skincare plans tailored to their skin tones

This offer suits anyone ready to try Agency Skincare free before making a commitment.

Frequently Asked Questions

Q: Is the Agency free trial really free?
Yes, the trial set is free. You only pay for shipping. No ongoing subscription is required unless you decide to continue.

Q: Do I need an Agency Skincare promo code?
No promo code is necessary. You’ll be directed to the correct page automatically.

Q: Can I cancel after the trial?
Yes, you can cancel before your next billing cycle from your account dashboard. Refills are always optional, and your medical team will continue to offer tips and support.

Limited-Time Agency Free Trial – Don’t Miss Out

This limited-time Agency free trial is available only while supplies last. Start your Agency skincare journey here!

One honest note before you get started: the chicken won’t come out with those gorgeous char marks you’d get from a cast iron skillet. That’s just not what a slow cooker does. But what it does do is give you impossibly juicy, pull-apart chicken that soaks up every bit of seasoning — and that’s a different kind of good. If the char matters to you, a quick 2-minute broil at the end fixes that.

Why This Recipe Works

Slow cooker recipes live and die by one thing: moisture management. Chicken breasts release a lot of liquid as they cook, and if you’re not thoughtful about the layering, you end up with watery fajita filling that makes your tortillas soggy before you even get to the table. This recipe puts the peppers and onions on the bottom — they release their moisture first and essentially create a steaming environment for the chicken to cook in without sitting in pooled liquid.

The seasoning blend gets applied directly to the chicken before it goes in, so it clings to the meat the entire cook time rather than washing off into the liquid. And salsa — not canned tomatoes, not broth — is the liquid here because it adds body, acidity, and built-in seasoning all at once. There’s a reason this combination keeps showing up on dinner tables: it works.

Using a quality slow cooker makes a real difference here. If your crock pot runs hot (older models often do), check the chicken at the 3.5-hour mark on low rather than waiting the full 4. Overcooked chicken in a slow cooker turns stringy in an unpleasant way, not just dry. A programmable slow cooker with a warm setting is worth every penny if you’re not home to check it — it automatically drops to warm when the cook time is up so you’re not stressing about timing.

What You Need to Know Before You Start

A few things that will save you from the most common slow cooker fajita mistakes:

Chicken Breasts vs. Chicken Thighs

Both work, but they behave differently. Chicken breasts shred cleanly and have a leaner texture — they’re what most people picture when they think of fajitas. Chicken thighs are more forgiving if your slow cooker runs hot; they stay juicy even if you go a little long. Either way, use boneless skinless pieces so you’re not dealing with bones or excess fat at the end.

Bell Pepper Color

You can use any color bell pepper, but there’s a real taste difference. Green peppers are sharper and slightly bitter — some people love that contrast with the chicken. Red, yellow, and orange peppers are sweeter and mellow out even more during the long cook. I like a mix of red and green for both color and flavor range, but this is genuinely a personal preference call.

The Liquid Amount Matters

Don’t add water or broth. The chicken and vegetables release plenty of moisture as they cook, and the salsa adds all the additional liquid you need. Adding extra liquid turns this into soup, not fajita filling. Stick to the ½ cup of salsa called for and trust the process.

Cook Time Windows

On low: 4 to 5 hours. On high: 2 to 3 hours. Thicker chicken breasts need more time; thinner ones less. If you’re cooking from frozen, add 1 to 1.5 hours on low. Check with a meat thermometer — you want 165°F internal temperature.

Ingredients

Here’s what you’ll need for 4 to 6 servings:

For the Fajita Filling

• 2 lbs boneless skinless chicken breasts (about 3–4 medium)
• 3 bell peppers, sliced (any color combination — I use 2 red, 1 green)
• 1 large yellow onion, sliced into half-rings
• ½ cup salsa (use your favorite jarred variety or homemade)
• 3 tablespoons fajita seasoning (store-bought packet or homemade — recipe below)
• 2 tablespoons olive oil
• Juice of 1 lime
• 3 garlic cloves, minced
• 1 teaspoon salt (reduce if your seasoning blend is already salty)

Homemade Fajita Seasoning (optional, makes about 3 tablespoons)

• 1 tablespoon chili powder
• 1 teaspoon cumin
• 1 teaspoon smoked paprika
• ½ teaspoon garlic powder
• ½ teaspoon onion powder
• ½ teaspoon oregano
• ¼ teaspoon cayenne (optional, for heat)
• ¼ teaspoon black pepper

If you make your own blend often, a good fajita seasoning blend from the store is convenient, but making it yourself means you control the salt level — which matters when you’re also adding salsa.

For Serving

• 8–10 flour tortillas (6-inch or 8-inch, depending on how loaded you like them)
• Shredded Mexican cheese blend
• Sour cream
• Guacamole or sliced avocado
• Fresh cilantro
• Lime wedges
• Pico de gallo or extra salsa
• Jalapeño slices (optional)

How to Make Crock Pot Chicken Fajitas

Step 1: Layer the Vegetables

Place the sliced bell peppers and onion in the bottom of your slow cooker. Drizzle with 1 tablespoon of the olive oil and toss lightly to coat. Spreading them in an even layer helps them cook uniformly and gives the chicken something to rest on rather than sitting directly on the crock surface.

Step 2: Season the Chicken

In a small bowl, combine the fajita seasoning, remaining tablespoon of olive oil, minced garlic, and lime juice. Stir into a loose paste. Coat the chicken breasts on all sides with this mixture. Don’t rush this step — thorough coating means every bite has good seasoning, not just the outside.

Step 3: Add Chicken and Salsa

Place the seasoned chicken breasts on top of the vegetables. Pour the salsa over everything. Put the lid on and resist the urge to lift it while cooking — every time you remove the lid, you add roughly 20 minutes to the cook time.

Step 4: Cook

Cook on LOW for 4 to 5 hours or HIGH for 2 to 3 hours. Start checking the chicken at the earlier end of the range. You want it to reach 165°F at the thickest part and shred easily with two forks. If it’s pulling apart but still looks a little wet, remove the lid for the last 20 minutes to let some moisture escape.

Step 5: Shred and Mix

Remove the chicken to a cutting board and shred with two forks, then return it to the slow cooker and stir everything together. The chicken will absorb the cooking liquid and seasoning as it sits. Taste and adjust salt and lime juice at this point.

Step 6 (Optional): Broil for Texture

If you want some caramelization and texture on the peppers and chicken, spread the filling on a foil-lined baking sheet and broil for 3 to 5 minutes. Watch it closely — you want some browning, not charring. A cast iron skillet also works great here — heat it until very hot and cook the filling in batches for 1 to 2 minutes to get that quick sear. Either method takes the slow cooker version from good to genuinely restaurant-quality.

Step 7: Warm the Tortillas and Serve

Warm your tortillas directly over a gas burner for about 30 seconds per side, in a dry skillet, or wrapped in a damp paper towel in the microwave for 30 seconds. Cold tortillas crack when you fold them; warm tortillas are pliable and actually taste like something. Pile on the filling and add your toppings.

Tips for the Best Slow Cooker Chicken Fajitas

Don’t Skip the Lime

The lime juice does two things: it brightens the overall flavor and it helps the seasoning cling to the chicken. Bottled lime juice works in a pinch, but fresh lime has noticeably more flavor. Squeeze it right before you use it — lime juice oxidizes quickly and loses its punch within a few hours.

Slice the Peppers and Onions Thicker Than You Think

Thin slices will turn to mush after 4+ hours in the slow cooker. Aim for ½-inch strips. They’ll still soften considerably, but they’ll hold their shape enough that you get real texture in the filling rather than a uniform, soft mass.

Make It Spicier (or Milder)

For more heat, use a hot salsa, add ¼ to ½ teaspoon cayenne to your seasoning, or throw in a seeded jalapeño with the vegetables. To keep it mild, use a mild salsa and omit the cayenne. The base recipe as written is kid-friendly heat-wise.

Use Salsa You’d Actually Eat with Chips

This sounds obvious, but since salsa is the primary liquid in this recipe, its flavor carries through to the final dish. If you wouldn’t eat it straight, don’t cook with it. Chunky salsas work fine; they just break down during cooking and become part of the sauce.

Fajita Seasoning Quality Varies Widely

Some store-bought packets are mostly salt and fillers. If you’re using a packet rather than making your own, taste the filling before adding more salt at the end. Some packets have 400–500mg of sodium per serving, which adds up quickly. Making your own blend with the recipe above takes about 3 minutes and gives you control over every component.

Meal Prep This

This filling holds beautifully in the fridge for 4 days. Make a double batch on Sunday and you’ve got lunches and dinners covered through Wednesday with no additional effort. It also freezes well — freeze flat in zip bags and thaw overnight in the refrigerator.

What to Serve with Crock Pot Chicken Fajitas

The filling stands on its own in tortillas, but if you’re feeding a crowd or want to round out the meal:

• Mexican rice — makes the meal more substantial and soaks up the extra juices
• Refried beans or black beans — add protein and make it more filling
• Cilantro lime rice — the acidity plays well against the smoky seasoning
• Simple green salad — a light counterpoint to the rich filling
• Corn on the cob or elote — turns this into a full summer spread
• Chips and guacamole — because you already have everything out for toppings anyway

Low-Carb and Dairy-Free Options

The filling itself is naturally gluten-free and dairy-free — all the adjustments happen at the serving stage. For low-carb: serve over cauliflower rice or in lettuce wraps instead of tortillas. For dairy-free: skip the sour cream and cheese, and use a dairy-free guacamole or just sliced avocado. For gluten-free: use certified gluten-free tortillas or corn tortillas, and check your fajita seasoning packet for any wheat-based fillers (some have them).

Storage and Reheating

Refrigerator

Store the filling (without tortillas and toppings) in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. The flavors actually develop a bit more overnight, so day-two leftovers are genuinely good.

Freezer

Freeze in zip-top bags laid flat for up to 3 months. Label with the date. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight. The peppers will be softer after freezing but the flavor holds well. Don’t freeze with tortillas or toppings — those don’t survive the freeze-thaw cycle.

Reheating

Microwave in 1-minute intervals, stirring between, until heated through. Or reheat in a skillet over medium heat for 3 to 4 minutes — this method evaporates excess moisture and gives you a better texture. Add a splash of water or chicken broth if it looks dry.

Frequently Asked Questions

Can I use frozen chicken in the slow cooker?

Technically yes, though the USDA recommends thawing first for food safety reasons (frozen chicken spends more time in the temperature danger zone). If you do cook from frozen, add at least 1 to 1.5 hours to the cook time and verify the internal temperature reaches 165°F before eating. For best results, thaw overnight in the refrigerator.

Can I make this with chicken thighs instead of chicken breasts?

Yes, and many people prefer thighs for slow cooker recipes because they’re harder to overcook. Boneless skinless thighs work exactly the same way — same cook time, same seasoning, same layering method. The end result is a bit richer and slightly more tender.

My filling is too watery. How do I fix it?

Remove the lid for the last 20 to 30 minutes of cooking to let steam escape. Or after shredding, transfer the filling to a skillet and cook over medium-high heat for a few minutes to reduce the liquid. A small amount of liquid is normal and keeps the chicken juicy; a lot of liquid usually means you added extra water or broth that wasn’t needed.

Can I cook this on HIGH to save time?

Yes. Cook on HIGH for 2 to 3 hours. The trade-off is that you have less margin for error — chicken breasts on HIGH can go from done to rubbery faster than on LOW. Start checking at the 2-hour mark if you’re using smaller chicken breasts. Thighs are more forgiving on HIGH.

What tortillas are best for fajitas?

Flour tortillas are traditional for fajitas — they’re pliable and hold up to a loaded filling. Corn tortillas have more flavor but crack more easily and are smaller, so you get less filling per tortilla. For gluten-free, look for flour-style GF tortillas rather than corn if you want a sturdier wrap. Whatever you use, warm them first — a cold tortilla cracks and doesn’t taste as good.

If you make fajitas regularly, a good set of quality flour tortillas in the freezer is worth it — they thaw quickly and are usually better than the ones that have been sitting in the bread aisle for a week.

Can I add corn or black beans to the slow cooker?

Yes, with a caveat. Canned black beans (drained and rinsed) can go in for the last hour of cooking — adding them earlier makes them mushy. Canned or frozen corn can go in for the last 30 minutes, or stir it in right at the end so it just heats through. Both additions make the filling more substantial and stretch it further.

How do I keep the chicken from drying out?

The two main culprits are cooking too long and cooking on HIGH when your slow cooker runs hot. Use a meat thermometer and pull the chicken the moment it hits 165°F. Also, don’t drain the cooking liquid before shredding — return the chicken to the juices so it reabsorbs moisture as it sits. A fast-read meat thermometer is the single most useful tool for slow cooker chicken — it takes the guesswork out completely.

More Slow Cooker Dinner Recipes

If you liked this recipe, here are a few more slow cooker favorites worth trying:

• Related Recipe 1
• Related Recipe 2
• Related Recipe 3

These are not fancy brownies. They are the kind you make on a weeknight with a bowl and a wooden spoon, and they turn out better than anything from a mix. The candy adds pockets of caramel, peanut butter, crispy wafer, or chocolate depending on what you have — and every pan comes out a little different. That is the point.

Why This Recipe Works

Most brownie recipes call for specific mix-ins — chocolate chips, nuts, a certain kind of candy. This one is built to be flexible. The base batter is rich and fudgy on its own, which means it can handle a wide variety of candy additions without the texture falling apart. Whether you throw in chopped Snickers, broken Kit Kats, M&Ms, Reese’s Cups, Milky Ways, or a combination of all of them, the batter holds everything together and bakes into a dense, chewy bar.

The fat-to-flour ratio here leans higher than a cakey brownie, which keeps the crumb tight and fudgy even with all the extra candy mixed in. If you use candy bars with caramel (Snickers, Milky Way, Twix), you’ll get ribbons of gooey caramel running through the bars. If you use Reese’s, you get soft pockets of peanut butter. Kit Kats add a little crunch to an otherwise soft texture. There is no wrong combination.

One honest note: candy with a lot of caramel can make the brownies stickier and harder to cut cleanly. If you want neat bars, let them cool completely — at least two hours — before cutting. If you cut them warm, they will be delicious and messy. Both are fine depending on what you’re going for.

What You Need to Know Before You Start

This recipe does not require a mixer. A large bowl, a whisk or wooden spoon, and a standard 9×13 baking pan are all you need. If you want thicker brownies, use an 8×8 or 9×9 pan and add about 10 minutes to the bake time.

The candy should be chopped into rough pieces — not powder, not huge chunks. Aim for pieces about the size of a chocolate chip or slightly larger. If you leave candy too large, it can create uneven spots in the brownie that don’t bake through properly.

Do not overmix once you add the flour. Overmixing develops gluten and makes brownies cakey and tough instead of fudgy. Stir until the flour is just incorporated and stop there.

Use parchment paper in your pan if you want to lift the brownies out cleanly for cutting. A well-greased pan works too, but parchment makes everything easier. Precut parchment sheets are genuinely one of those kitchen products worth keeping on hand — they fit standard pans and save a lot of fussing.

Ingredients

For the Brownie Batter

• 1 cup (2 sticks) unsalted butter
• 2 cups granulated sugar
• 4 large eggs
• 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
• 1 cup all-purpose flour
• ¾ cup unsweetened cocoa powder
• ½ teaspoon salt
• ½ teaspoon baking powder

For the Mix-Ins

• 2 to 2½ cups chopped Halloween candy (any combination — see notes below)
• Optional: ½ cup semi-sweet chocolate chips (adds extra chocolate depth)

Candy Combination Ideas

Use whatever you have. Here are combinations that work especially well:

• All chocolate bars: Snickers + Milky Way + 3 Musketeers — rich, caramelly, very fudgy
• Peanut butter heavy: Reese’s Cups + Reese’s Pieces + Butterfingers — nutty and dense
• Crunchy mix: Kit Kats + Butterfingers + M&Ms — some texture contrast in an otherwise soft brownie
• Everything bowl: Whatever is left — mixed candy works just as well as a curated combination

Avoid: gummy candy, hard candy, anything with a strong mint flavor (York Peppermint Patties will make the whole batch taste like mint), and candy with wrappers still on. Check your pieces before chopping.

How to Make Halloween Candy Brownies

Step 1: Prep Your Pan and Oven

Preheat your oven to 350°F. Line a 9×13 inch baking pan with parchment paper, leaving enough overhang on the sides to lift the brownies out after baking. Alternatively, grease the pan generously with butter or non-stick spray. Set aside.

Step 2: Melt the Butter

In a large microwave-safe bowl, melt the butter in 30-second increments, stirring between each, until fully melted. You can also do this in a saucepan on the stovetop over low heat. Let the melted butter cool for about 5 minutes — you don’t want it hot enough to scramble the eggs when you add them.

Step 3: Mix Wet Ingredients

Add the sugar to the melted butter and whisk until combined. The mixture will look grainy — that is normal. Add the eggs one at a time, whisking after each addition. Add the vanilla and whisk until the batter is smooth and slightly glossy. A good-quality balloon whisk makes this step faster and easier than a fork.

Step 4: Add Dry Ingredients

Sift the cocoa powder, flour, salt, and baking powder directly into the bowl. Stir with a wooden spoon or rubber spatula until just combined — stop as soon as you no longer see dry streaks of flour. Do not overmix.

Step 5: Fold In the Candy

Reserve about ¼ cup of the chopped candy to press onto the top. Fold the remaining candy into the batter with a few gentle strokes. The batter will be thick — that is correct.

Step 6: Bake

Spread the batter into the prepared pan. It will be thick and may need some coaxing to reach the corners — use an offset spatula or the back of a spoon. Press the reserved candy pieces onto the top of the batter. Bake at 350°F for 28 to 34 minutes, until a toothpick inserted in the center comes out with moist crumbs (not wet batter). The edges will look set; the center may look slightly underdone — it firms up as it cools.

Step 7: Cool and Cut

Let the brownies cool in the pan for at least 30 minutes before attempting to lift them out. For clean cuts, cool completely (1–2 hours) before slicing. Use a sharp knife and wipe it between cuts for the neatest edges.

Tips for Better Results

Use Room-Temperature Eggs

Cold eggs can cause the melted butter to seize slightly, making the batter look broken or lumpy. Set your eggs out for 20–30 minutes before baking, or do a quick warm-up by placing them (in the shell) in a bowl of warm water for 5 minutes.

Don’t Skip the Cooling Time

Fudgy brownies need time to set after baking. Cutting into them too early gives you a gooey mess that falls apart. If you are making these to serve at a party or bring somewhere, bake them the night before and refrigerate overnight — they cut cleanly and the texture is even better cold.

Make Brownie Bites Instead

For a party-friendly presentation, use a mini muffin tin instead of a baking pan. Grease the tin well, fill each cup about ⅔ full, press a small piece of candy on top, and bake at 350°F for 12–15 minutes. You get individual brownie bites that are easy to pick up and serve. This is also a great option for kids’ parties where everyone wants their own piece without sharing a cut pan.

Check Candy for Wrappers

It sounds obvious, but when you are working fast and chopping through a pile of Halloween candy, it is easy to miss a wrapper. Go through your candy before you chop it. Stray wrappers in the batter are not fun to find.

Adjust Sweetness Based on Candy Type

If your candy is very sweet (mostly milk chocolate, caramel-heavy bars), you can reduce the sugar in the batter by ¼ cup without affecting the texture noticeably. If you are using darker chocolate candy or more bittersweet mix-ins, keep the full amount of sugar.

The Right Pan Makes a Difference

Light-colored aluminum pans bake brownies more evenly than dark pans, which can cause over-browning on the edges before the center is done. If you only have a dark pan, check them 5 minutes earlier than the recipe suggests. A good 9×13 aluminum baking pan is one of those workhorses worth having in your kitchen — it is what most professional bakers use for brownies.

How to Store Halloween Candy Brownies

Room Temperature

Store in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 4 days. Layer them with parchment paper if stacking so the tops don’t stick together. A good airtight storage container keeps them from drying out faster than they should.

Refrigerator

Refrigerated brownies last up to a week. The texture gets firmer and denser when cold — some people prefer this. Let them sit at room temperature for 10–15 minutes before eating if you want them closer to room-temperature texture.

Freezer

Brownies freeze well. Cut into individual bars, wrap each one in plastic wrap, and place in a freezer bag or container. Freeze for up to 3 months. Thaw at room temperature for 30–60 minutes, or microwave for 20–30 seconds if you want them warm.

Frequently Asked Questions

Can I use any type of Halloween candy in this recipe?

Chocolate-based candy works best — Snickers, Reese’s, Kit Kats, M&Ms, Milky Way, 3 Musketeers, Butterfingers, Twix, Baby Ruth. Avoid gummy candy, hard candy, anything with a strong mint flavor, and candy like Skittles or Starburst, which are fruit-based and don’t bake well in brownies. When in doubt, if it is chocolate, it works.

How much candy should I use?

2 to 2½ cups of chopped candy is the right range for a 9×13 pan. Less than that and you lose the candy impact; more than that and the batter has trouble holding together. If you have a lot of candy to use up, you can push it to 3 cups, but the brownies will be stickier and harder to cut cleanly.

Can I make these from a boxed brownie mix?

Yes. If you want to shortcut the batter, use your favorite boxed brownie mix prepared according to package directions, then fold in the chopped candy before baking. The from-scratch batter in this recipe produces a denser, richer result, but a boxed mix works in a pinch and comes together faster.

My brownies came out cakey instead of fudgy. What went wrong?

A few things cause cakey brownies: too much flour (measure by spooning into the measuring cup and leveling, not scooping), overmixing after adding the flour, or baking too long. Fudgy brownies should come out of the oven looking slightly underdone in the very center. They firm up as they cool. Trust the toothpick with moist crumbs — not clean, moist crumbs — and pull them at that point.

Can I make these gluten-free?

You can substitute a 1:1 gluten-free flour blend for the all-purpose flour. The texture may be slightly different — a little more dense or crumbly depending on the blend — but it works. Also check your candy: some candy bars contain gluten in the cookie or wafer layers (Kit Kats are not gluten-free, for example). Read labels if gluten-free is a requirement.

Can I double the recipe?

Yes. Double everything and bake in two 9×13 pans. Do not try to bake a doubled batch in one pan — it will be too thick to cook through without overbaking the edges. Bake time stays the same when using two separate pans.

How do I know when they are done?

Insert a toothpick into the center of the pan. For fudgy brownies, it should come out with moist, fudgy crumbs clinging to it — not wet batter, but not clean either. The edges will look set and the center will look slightly soft. That is exactly where you want them. Pull them out and let the carryover heat finish the job while they cool in the pan.

Recipe Card

Related Recipes

If you liked these Halloween candy brownies, here are a few more ways to use up extra candy or satisfy a chocolate craving:

• Halloween Candy Cookies — same concept, cookie format, great for bake sales
• Chocolate Fudge — a no-bake option when you want something fast
• Peanut Butter Bars — if you have a lot of Reese’s to use up, these are the move
• Chocolate Bark — the fastest leftover candy recipe, no baking required

Why This Pumpkin Pie No Bake Recipe Works

A lot of no bake pumpkin desserts end up with a filling that’s too soft, too sweet, or weirdly gummy. This one avoids all of that because of a few specific things happening in the recipe.

First, the filling uses cream cheese as a base rather than relying purely on whipped topping. Cream cheese adds structure and a slight tang that cuts through the sweetness of the pumpkin and sugar. Without it, you end up with something that tastes more like sweetened foam than pie filling.

Second, canned pumpkin — not pumpkin pie filling — is the right call here. Pumpkin pie filling already has sugar and spices added, which means you lose control over the flavor balance. Plain canned pumpkin puree lets you dial in exactly how sweet and how spiced you want it.

Third, time in the refrigerator does the work that the oven usually does. Two to three hours minimum — overnight is better. Skipping that chill time is the most common mistake people make, and it results in a filling that slides when you cut it. Give it the full chill and you’ll get clean slices.

The graham cracker crust is pressed, not baked, which keeps the texture slightly crumbly in a good way — it’s got enough butter to hold together when chilled but doesn’t turn into a hard brick the way baked crusts sometimes do.

What You Need to Know Before You Start

A few things worth knowing before you start mixing:

Cream cheese temperature matters. Use room temperature cream cheese. Cold cream cheese does not beat smooth — it leaves lumps in the filling that don’t go away no matter how long you mix. Pull it out of the fridge 45 minutes to an hour before you plan to start.

Canned pumpkin brands vary. Libby’s is the most consistent in terms of moisture content. Some store-brand canned pumpkins are wetter, which can make the filling looser. If yours looks watery, blot it briefly with a paper towel before mixing.

The crust needs to be packed firmly. Use the flat bottom of a measuring cup or a drinking glass to press the crust down hard. A loosely pressed crust will crumble when you serve it. This is the one step where extra pressure is genuinely useful.

Whipped topping (Cool Whip) vs. fresh whipped cream. Cool Whip holds its shape for days in the fridge. Fresh whipped cream tastes better but weeps after about 24 hours. For a dessert you’re making ahead or serving over multiple days, Cool Whip is the practical choice. For same-day serving, fresh whipped cream is worth it.

This is a make-ahead dessert by design. It needs at least 2 hours of refrigerator time, preferably overnight. Build that into your planning — it’s not a last-minute situation.

Ingredients

For the Graham Cracker Crust

• 1 1/2 cups graham cracker crumbs (about 12 full crackers)
• 1/3 cup granulated sugar
• 6 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted

For the Pumpkin Filling

• 8 oz cream cheese, softened to room temperature
• 1 cup canned pumpkin puree (not pumpkin pie filling)
• 1 cup powdered sugar
• 1 teaspoon pumpkin pie spice
• 1/2 teaspoon ground cinnamon
• 1/4 teaspoon ground nutmeg
• 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
• 8 oz whipped topping (Cool Whip), thawed

For Topping (Optional)

• Additional whipped topping
• A light dusting of ground cinnamon or pumpkin pie spice
• Crushed graham crackers

Equipment You’ll Need

You don’t need anything fancy, but having the right tools makes the process smoother. A standard 9-inch pie dish is the right size for this recipe — deeper dishes will give you a thinner filling layer, and shallower dishes may overflow. I use a glass pie dish so I can see the crust layer from the side.

A hand mixer is the most useful tool here — it beats the cream cheese smooth in about two minutes and incorporates everything evenly. You can do it by hand with a lot of elbow grease, but the filling will likely have some lumps. For a dessert that looks as good as it tastes, a hand mixer is worth the few minutes of cleanup.

• 9-inch glass pie dish — lets you see the crust from the side; glass holds temperature well when chilling
• Electric hand mixer — essential for getting the cream cheese filling completely smooth without lumps
• Mixing bowls with lids — useful for both mixing and covering the pie while it chills without the plastic wrap slipping
• Pie carrier with lid — if you’re bringing this to a potluck or holiday dinner, a pie carrier protects the top and makes transport easy

How to Make Pumpkin Pie No Bake Dessert

Step 1: Make the Graham Cracker Crust

In a medium bowl, stir together the graham cracker crumbs and granulated sugar. Pour in the melted butter and mix until the crumbs are evenly coated and the mixture looks like wet sand. It should clump when you press it between your fingers — if it’s still dry and crumbly, add another teaspoon of melted butter.

Transfer the crumb mixture to your pie dish. Use your fingers to spread it across the bottom and up the sides of the dish. Then use the flat bottom of a measuring cup or a smooth drinking glass to press it down firmly and evenly. Pay extra attention to the edges where the bottom meets the sides — that’s where crusts tend to crumble first.

Place the crust in the refrigerator while you make the filling. Chilling it for at least 15 minutes helps it firm up so it holds shape when the filling goes in.

Step 2: Beat the Cream Cheese

In a large mixing bowl, beat the softened cream cheese with your hand mixer on medium speed until it’s completely smooth — no lumps, no chunks. This takes about 2 minutes. If you’re seeing chunks that won’t break up, your cream cheese is still too cold. Stop, let it sit for 15 more minutes, and try again.

This step determines the texture of the entire filling, so don’t rush it. A smooth cream cheese base means a smooth final filling.

Step 3: Add the Pumpkin and Spices

Add the canned pumpkin puree to the beaten cream cheese and mix on low speed until combined. Then add the powdered sugar, pumpkin pie spice, cinnamon, nutmeg, and vanilla extract. Increase the speed to medium and mix until the filling is smooth and uniform in color — about 1 to 2 minutes.

Taste the filling at this point. This is your one chance to adjust. Want more spice? Add another 1/4 teaspoon of pumpkin pie spice. Too sweet? A small pinch of salt (1/8 teaspoon) will balance it without changing the flavor profile dramatically.

Step 4: Fold in the Whipped Topping

Switch from the mixer to a rubber spatula. Add the thawed Cool Whip to the pumpkin filling and fold it in gently — use slow, wide strokes from the bottom of the bowl up and over. Don’t stir or beat it in. Folding preserves the lightness of the whipped topping; stirring deflates it and makes the filling denser.

Fold until just combined — a few light orange streaks are fine. Overmixing at this stage is more of a problem than undermixing.

Step 5: Fill and Chill

Retrieve your chilled crust from the refrigerator. Spoon the pumpkin filling into the crust and spread it evenly with a spatula. Cover the pie loosely with plastic wrap or a pie cover (don’t let it touch the filling surface) and refrigerate for at least 2 hours — 4 hours is better, and overnight is best.

The filling firms up significantly as it chills. A pie that seems a bit wobbly after 2 hours will be fully set after 4. If you’re serving this for a holiday dinner, make it the night before.

Step 6: Top and Serve

Just before serving, add your toppings if using. A dollop of whipped topping on each slice looks clean and intentional. A light dusting of cinnamon or pumpkin pie spice over the entire top takes about five seconds and makes the pie look like it came from a bakery. Use a sharp knife wiped clean between cuts for the cleanest slices.

Tips for the Best Results

On the Crust

Pre-made graham cracker crusts from the store work fine and save about 5 minutes, but the homemade crust holds together better because you control the butter ratio. Store-bought crusts also tend to be shallower, so you may end up with leftover filling. If you use a store-bought crust, keep the leftover filling in a small ramekin in the fridge — it’s good as a dip for apple slices.

If you want a gingersnap crust instead of graham cracker, use the same ratio — 1 1/2 cups gingersnap crumbs, 1/3 cup sugar, 6 tablespoons butter. The ginger adds a nice bite that works well with pumpkin spice.

On the Filling

Powdered sugar dissolves completely into the cream cheese without any graininess, which is why it’s used here instead of granulated. Don’t substitute granulated — the texture will be noticeably grainy, especially when the pie is cold.

If you want a denser, richer filling, reduce the whipped topping to 6 oz instead of 8. If you want a lighter, fluffier texture, use the full 8 oz. Both work — it’s a preference call.

On Serving

This pie slices most cleanly when it’s very cold — straight from the refrigerator, not after sitting on the counter for 20 minutes. If you’re transporting it, keep it cold until the last possible moment. Warm filling gets soft and slides off the crust.

A thin spatula or pie server works better than a wide one for getting the slices out without the crust crumbling. Slide it under the crust and lift cleanly rather than scooping.

Storage Instructions

This pumpkin no bake dessert stores well, which is one of its practical advantages over baked pies.

Refrigerator: Cover tightly and refrigerate for up to 5 days. The crust will soften slightly over time as it absorbs moisture from the filling — by day 3 or 4 it’s noticeably softer, which some people actually prefer. The filling stays good throughout.

Freezer: This pie freezes well. Wrap it tightly in plastic wrap and then in foil, or use a pie carrier and freeze for up to 1 month. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator — don’t try to thaw at room temperature, as the filling can get watery. The texture holds up well after freezing; the crust gets a bit more compact but still tastes good.

Individual slices: Slice before freezing for easy grab-and-go portions. Wrap each slice individually in plastic wrap. They thaw in the refrigerator in about 3 to 4 hours.

If you’re planning to freeze part of the pie, skip the whipped topping on top — add it fresh after thawing. Frozen whipped topping gets watery as it thaws.

Variations Worth Trying

Chocolate Graham Cracker Crust

Use chocolate graham crackers or Oreo crumbs (with the filling scraped out) for the crust. The chocolate-pumpkin combination is underrated and works especially well if you want a less traditional take on this recipe.

Individual Cups

Press the crust into the bottom of individual Mason jars or dessert cups and layer the filling on top. This format skips the slicing entirely and makes it easy to serve at parties or pack for lunches. Press about 2 tablespoons of crust per jar, then fill with 1/3 cup of filling.

Maple Pumpkin Version

Replace 1/4 cup of the powdered sugar with 2 tablespoons of real maple syrup. The maple flavor is subtle but adds a warmth that pairs naturally with the pumpkin spice. Use grade B (dark) maple syrup if you can find it — the flavor is stronger.

Cream Cheese-Free Version

For a lighter version, replace the cream cheese with an equal amount of Greek yogurt (full-fat works best). The texture will be softer and the flavor tangier, and it won’t slice as cleanly — but it’s a workable substitution if dairy sensitivity or preference is a factor.

Frequently Asked Questions

Can I use pumpkin pie filling instead of plain pumpkin puree?

Technically yes, but the result will be sweeter and more heavily spiced than intended, and you lose control over the flavor balance. If you use pumpkin pie filling, reduce the powdered sugar to 1/2 cup and skip the added spices — then taste and adjust from there. The filling won’t be quite as smooth, since pie filling sometimes has a slightly different texture than plain puree.

Why is my filling not setting up?

The most likely cause is not enough chill time. Two hours is the minimum; four is more reliable. A second possibility is that the cream cheese was too warm when you mixed it, which can make the filling looser. A third cause is watery canned pumpkin — if your pumpkin puree had a lot of liquid, it can prevent the filling from firming up properly. Give it more time in the fridge before concluding there’s a problem.

Can I make this a day ahead?

Yes, and it actually turns out better when made a day ahead. The filling has more time to set and the flavors meld together more fully overnight. Add any toppings the day you’re serving — not the day before. This is genuinely one of the best recipes to make ahead because there’s no quality loss and it reduces day-of work.

Can I use a pre-made graham cracker crust from the store?

Yes. A 9-inch pre-made graham cracker crust works fine and saves a few minutes. The main trade-off is that store-bought crusts are shallower, so you may not fit all the filling — put the extra in ramekins. The homemade crust also holds together slightly better because of the higher butter content, but the store-bought version is a reasonable shortcut.

Can I freeze the whole pie?

Yes. Wrap it well (plastic wrap then foil) and freeze for up to one month. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator. Skip the whipped topping before freezing — add it fresh after thawing. The texture after freezing and thawing is very close to fresh, with the crust being slightly more compact than when it was first made.

What can I use instead of Cool Whip?

Fresh whipped cream works and tastes better, but it won’t hold up as long in the refrigerator — expect it to start weeping after about 24 hours. Use 1 1/2 cups of heavy whipping cream beaten to stiff peaks in place of the 8 oz Cool Whip. If you’re serving the pie same-day, fresh whipped cream is the better choice. If you’re making it ahead or keeping it for several days, Cool Whip is more practical.

How do I get clean slices?

Three things help: (1) Make sure the pie is fully chilled — slice it straight from the refrigerator. (2) Use a sharp knife. (3) Wipe the blade clean with a damp cloth between each cut. The filling sticks to the blade and drags on the next cut if you don’t wipe it. A thin, flexible spatula gets each slice out without breaking the crust.

Pumpkin Pie No Bake Dessert Recipe

More No Bake Desserts You’ll Want to Try

If this pumpkin pie no bake dessert is a hit, these are worth bookmarking for the rest of the season. No bake desserts are genuinely useful when the oven is already running for the main dish or when you need something that can be made two days ahead without any quality loss.

• No Bake Cheesecake — The same cream cheese and whipped topping base, without the pumpkin. Endlessly customizable with different toppings: strawberry, blueberry, caramel, or plain.
• No Bake Chocolate Peanut Butter Bars — An oat-and-peanut-butter base pressed into a pan, topped with a chocolate layer. Sets in the freezer and cuts into bars. A crowd favorite at bake sales.
• Pumpkin Cream Cheese Dip — A simplified version of this filling without the crust. Serve it with graham crackers, apple slices, or vanilla wafers. Ready in 10 minutes, no chilling required.
• No Bake Pumpkin Balls — The filling rolled into bite-sized pieces and coated in crushed graham crackers or powdered sugar. Good for parties where slicing and plating isn’t practical.

Fall desserts don’t have to mean hours in the kitchen. This pumpkin pie no bake recipe is proof that a genuinely good dessert can come together with 20 minutes of active time and the patience to let the refrigerator do the rest of the work.

The honest version of this story: I made it once thinking it was going to be a side dish, and it became the main event. People stop talking when this comes out of the oven. That’s the best endorsement I can give any recipe.

Why This Works

Most hot dips are either too greasy or too bland. This one threads the needle by layering the ingredients the same way you’d layer a pizza — sauce on the bottom, cream cheese for body, mozzarella on top to form that pull-apart cheese crust, and pepperoni scattered across so the edges get a little crispy in the oven. That textural contrast — creamy underneath, slightly caramelized on top — is what makes people go back for a third scoop.

The cream cheese base is the structural key. It keeps the dip from separating or getting oily, and it carries the garlic and Italian seasoning through every bite. Without it you’d have a watery, greasy mess. With it, you get something that holds together on a chip or a piece of bread without sliding off.

Pizza sauce matters more than people expect. The jarred marinara that’s thin and herb-forward tends to make the dip too loose. A thicker, concentrated pizza sauce — or a good quality crushed tomato with added seasoning — gives you the right consistency and the right punch of flavor. I’ll note my specific recommendation in the ingredients section.

What to Know Before You Start

This is a genuinely easy recipe, but there are a couple things worth knowing upfront so you don’t run into issues at party time.

Cream cheese needs to be softened

Cold cream cheese does not spread smoothly, and it will leave lumps in the base layer. Pull it out of the fridge 30–45 minutes before you start. If you forget, cut it into chunks and microwave in 15-second bursts until it’s soft enough to stir.

Don’t drain the grease from the pepperoni mid-bake

As the pepperoni renders in the oven, it releases some oil. That’s normal and actually flavors the dip. If you’re concerned about it looking greasy, blot the top very gently with a paper towel right before serving — but don’t do it mid-bake or you’ll disturb the cheese layer.

The dip needs to rest for 5 minutes before serving

Right out of the oven the center is lava-hot and hasn’t fully set. Five minutes of rest makes scooping much cleaner and saves guests from burning their mouths. Set a timer — it’s worth it.

Scale it based on crowd size

This recipe fills a standard 9×13 baking dish and serves 10–14 people as an appetizer. For a smaller gathering of 4–6, halve the recipe and use an 8×8 or 9×9 dish. Baking time stays approximately the same — check for bubbly edges and a golden top.

Ingredients

Here’s everything you need for the full 9×13 version that serves a crowd.

For the cream cheese base

• 2 packages (8 oz each) cream cheese, softened to room temperature
• 1 teaspoon garlic powder
• 1 teaspoon Italian seasoning
• ½ teaspoon onion powder
• ¼ teaspoon crushed red pepper flakes (optional, for heat)
• Salt and black pepper to taste

For the layers

• 1½ cups pizza sauce (see note below)
• 2 cups shredded mozzarella cheese
• ½ cup shredded Parmesan cheese
• 1 package (3.5 oz) pepperoni slices
• ½ cup sliced black olives (optional)
• ¼ cup diced green bell pepper (optional)
• ¼ cup diced onion, finely minced (optional)

For serving

• Toasted baguette slices or crostini
• Sturdy tortilla chips or pita chips
• Sliced veggies (celery, bell pepper strips) for a lighter option

On pizza sauce: I use Rao’s Pizza Sauce when I can find it — it’s thicker than most and has a concentrated tomato flavor that holds up in the oven. If you’re using jarred marinara instead, simmer it in a small saucepan for 5–10 minutes to reduce and thicken before adding it to the dish. Thin sauce = watery dip. That’s the one place where the quality of your ingredient genuinely changes the result. Browse pizza sauces on Amazon if you want to compare options.

How to Make Pepperoni Pizza Dip

This comes together in about 35–40 minutes total — 10 minutes of prep and 25–30 minutes in the oven.

Step 1: Preheat and prep your baking dish

Preheat your oven to 375°F. Lightly spray a 9×13 baking dish with nonstick cooking spray. You can also use a deep-dish pie pan or a large oval casserole — just make sure the sides are at least 2 inches tall so the layers don’t bubble over.

Step 2: Mix the cream cheese base

In a medium bowl, beat the softened cream cheese with the garlic powder, Italian seasoning, onion powder, red pepper flakes, salt, and pepper. You can use a hand mixer on low speed or just a sturdy spatula — the goal is a smooth, fully-combined mixture with no lumps. Taste it at this point and adjust seasoning. The base should taste slightly over-seasoned on its own because the sauce and cheese will dilute it.

Step 3: Spread the cream cheese layer

Spread the cream cheese mixture evenly across the bottom of the prepared baking dish. Use the back of a spoon or an offset spatula to get it into the corners and create an even layer. This is the foundation — take 30 seconds to do it right.

Step 4: Add the pizza sauce

Spoon the pizza sauce over the cream cheese layer and spread it gently, leaving about a ½-inch border around the edges so the cream cheese peeks out slightly. This prevents the sauce from bubbling up and over the sides. Go slowly here — you don’t want to drag the cream cheese layer up into the sauce.

Step 5: Add toppings and cheese

If you’re using optional vegetables (bell pepper, onion, olives), scatter them over the sauce now. Then add the shredded mozzarella in an even layer. Follow with the Parmesan scattered over the top of the mozzarella. Finally, arrange the pepperoni slices in a single layer over the cheese — slightly overlapping is fine, but try to cover most of the surface so every scoop gets pepperoni.

Step 6: Bake

Bake uncovered at 375°F for 25–30 minutes, until the cheese is fully melted, the edges are bubbling, and the pepperoni has started to curl and darken slightly at the edges. If the cheese isn’t browning enough for your taste by the 28-minute mark, switch to broil for 2–3 minutes — watch it closely, it can go from golden to burnt fast under the broiler.

Step 7: Rest and serve

Remove from the oven and let it rest for 5 minutes before serving. Set it on a trivet or folded towel — the dish will be very hot. Serve directly from the baking dish with your choice of dippers alongside. I recommend setting out a few different options so people can choose — bread for scooping, chips for crunch, veggies for anyone who wants a lighter vehicle.

Tips for the Best Result

Use block mozzarella, not pre-shredded

Pre-shredded mozzarella is coated in anti-caking agents (usually cellulose) that prevent it from melting as smoothly. If you have an extra 3 minutes, buy a block of low-moisture mozzarella and shred it yourself. The difference in melt quality is noticeable — it gets stretchier, gooier, and the cheese pulls rather than clumps. A box grater makes this easy.

Add a layer of Italian sausage for a meat lovers version

Brown ½ pound of Italian sausage (drained) and scatter it over the sauce layer before adding the cheese. This makes the dip more substantial and adds a different texture than just pepperoni. Crumbled sausage + pepperoni slices is the combination I’d recommend if you’re feeding serious meat eaters.

Make it ahead and refrigerate before baking

You can fully assemble the dip up to 24 hours in advance, cover it tightly with plastic wrap, and refrigerate. When you’re ready to bake, let it sit at room temperature for 20–30 minutes before putting it in the oven, then bake as directed — it may need an extra 5 minutes since it’s starting cold. This is genuinely useful for parties: assemble it the night before and just bake it when guests arrive.

Caution: don’t over-fill the dish

This is the one genuine caution I have for this recipe. If you’re doubling it or using a shallower dish, the bubbling cheese and sauce can spill over the sides and smoke up your oven. Either use a dish with higher sides or put a sheet pan on the rack below to catch drips. I learned this the hard way during a party and spent 20 minutes cleaning the oven while guests waited.

Keep it warm with a slow cooker

If you’re setting this out for a longer party, transfer the baked dip to a small slow cooker set on Warm. It stays at the right temperature for 2–3 hours without drying out. Stir gently every 45 minutes or so. This is especially useful if you’re doing a big spread and people will be grazing over several hours rather than eating all at once.

Adjust heat level to your crowd

The base recipe is mild — kid-friendly, broad-audience. For a spicier version, add ½ teaspoon of red pepper flakes to the cream cheese base and swap regular pepperoni for hot or spicy pepperoni. You can also add a drizzle of hot honey over the top right before serving, which sounds unusual but works well against the savory cheese and tomato.

What to Serve With Pepperoni Pizza Dip

The dipper matters more than people give it credit for. You want something sturdy enough to hold a scoop of this dip without breaking — it’s thick and heavy and will snap a thin chip in half.

Best dipper options

• Toasted baguette rounds: Slice a baguette thin, brush with olive oil, and bake at 400°F for 8–10 minutes. Holds up perfectly and gives a neutral base that lets the dip shine. This is my first recommendation.
• Pita chips: Thick, sturdy, and widely available. The slight saltiness works well. Buy the thick-cut variety — the thin ones still break.
• Naan bread, torn into pieces: A softer option that’s good for people who want something bread-like without the crunch.
• Tortilla chips: Works, but go for a thicker restaurant-style chip. Thin chips are a liability with this dip.
• Celery and bell pepper strips: Genuinely good here — the crunch and mild flavor of raw vegetables cuts through the richness of the dip. A nice contrast if you want something that isn’t starchy.
• Pretzel bites: The saltiness of pretzels against the cheesy dip is a combination that works well. Warm soft pretzel bites are especially good.

For serving, I like having a set of appetizer plates or dip serving sets on the table so people aren’t double-dipping from the same chip. It’s a small thing, but it makes the spread look more intentional and guests appreciate having a plate to set their dipper on.

Storage and Reheating

Refrigerating leftovers

Cover the baking dish tightly with plastic wrap or transfer the leftovers to an airtight container. Refrigerate for up to 4 days. The cream cheese base tends to firm back up in the fridge, which is fine — it reheats well.

Reheating

Oven: Cover with foil and reheat at 350°F for 15–20 minutes until warmed through. Uncover for the last 5 minutes to re-melt and brown the cheese on top.

Microwave: Transfer a portion to a microwave-safe dish and heat in 30-second intervals, stirring between each, until hot. The microwave works but doesn’t give you the same crispy pepperoni edges. Good for a quick lunch from leftovers — not ideal for re-serving to guests.

Freezing

You can freeze the unbaked assembled dip, tightly wrapped, for up to 2 months. Thaw overnight in the fridge and bake as directed, adding 5–10 extra minutes. I don’t recommend freezing the baked dip — cream cheese-based dips tend to separate and get grainy after being frozen and thawed once already cooked.

Frequently Asked Questions

Can I make this in a slow cooker instead of the oven?

Yes, with adjustments. Soften the cream cheese and spread it in the slow cooker insert. Add the sauce, cheese, and pepperoni in layers. Cook on High for 1.5–2 hours or Low for 3–4 hours until the cheese is fully melted. You won’t get the browned, bubbly top you get from the oven — the pepperoni stays soft rather than crisping up. But it’s a good option if oven space is limited or you want it ready and warm when guests arrive. Keep it on Warm for serving.

Can I use marinara instead of pizza sauce?

Yes, but reduce it first. Simmer the marinara over medium heat for 8–10 minutes, stirring occasionally, until it thickens noticeably. Thin sauce makes the dip watery and the layers don’t hold. Pizza sauce is thicker by design because it’s made to go on dough without soaking through — that’s the same reason it works better in this dip.

What if I don’t have cream cheese?

Neufchâtel cheese (the lower-fat version sold next to cream cheese) works well and behaves almost identically. Ricotta can work as a substitution, but the texture will be looser and grainier — not my recommendation for a party dip. Mascarpone is richer and will work, but the dip becomes very heavy. Cream cheese is worth picking up specifically for this recipe.

Can I make a vegetarian version?

Absolutely. Skip the pepperoni and load up on vegetables instead: diced mushrooms (sauté them first to remove moisture), sliced black olives, diced green pepper, roasted red peppers, and artichoke hearts all work well. The base recipe stays the same. You’ll lose the crispy topping element that the pepperoni provides, so consider adding a sprinkle of panko breadcrumbs mixed with a little olive oil across the top before baking — it gives you crunch and golden color.

How long does this last at a party before it dries out?

At room temperature, it stays good for about 2 hours before the edges start to dry and the center cools to a less-than-ideal temperature. After 2 hours, move leftovers to the fridge. If you’re planning a longer event, the slow cooker trick mentioned in the tips section is the right move — it keeps everything at serving temperature without drying out.

Can I use different meats?

Yes. Italian sausage (browned and drained), cooked and crumbled bacon, diced ham, or Canadian bacon all work here. You can mix and match — a combination of pepperoni and crumbled Italian sausage is probably the most popular variation. Whatever you use, if it’s a raw meat, cook it fully before adding it to the dip. The bake time isn’t long enough to cook raw protein safely.

Is this gluten-free?

The dip itself is gluten-free — cream cheese, mozzarella, pizza sauce, and pepperoni don’t contain gluten (check your specific brand labels to confirm, as some pepperoni and pizza sauces contain additives). The dippers are where gluten comes in. Serve with gluten-free tortilla chips, rice crackers, or vegetable dippers for a fully gluten-free spread.

Recipe Card

Related Recipes

If you like this kind of hot, cheesy party appetizer, here are a few more in the same direction:

• Buffalo Chicken Dip — Same cream cheese base, same party-ready format, different flavor profile. The shredded chicken and hot sauce version that’s been at every Super Bowl party for the last 15 years for a reason.
• Spinach Artichoke Dip — Vegetarian, rich, and equally crowd-proof. The spinach cuts the richness in a way this pizza dip doesn’t, so it’s a good complement if you’re doing a dip spread.
• Crab Dip — A step up in richness and a little more of a splurge ingredient. Impressive if you’re doing a fancier spread rather than a casual game day situation.
• Queso Fundido — Melted cheese with chorizo and roasted peppers, served straight from the skillet. Different from pizza dip but hits the same craving: hot, cheesy, dipper-required.
• Jalapeño Popper Dip — If you liked the cream cheese base here and want something with more heat, this is the next recipe to try. Cream cheese, mayo, and chopped jalapeños — straightforward and reliably gone within 20 minutes.

Print

Ocean Water Drink

Course drink

Cuisine American

Keyword ocean water drink

Prep Time 5 minutes minutes

Total Time 5 minutes minutes

Servings 6 servings

Ingredients

• 4 tablespoons white sugar
• 4 tablespoons water
• 24 ounces lemon-lime soda chilled
• 1 1/2 teaspoons coconut extract
• 3 drops blue food coloring
• Ice for serving

Instructions

• In a small saucepan, combine the sugar and water. Heat over medium heat, stirring constantly, until the sugar dissolves.
• Remove the simple syrup from the heat and let it cool.
• In a large pitcher, combine the cooled simple syrup, lemon-lime soda, coconut extract, and blue food coloring.
• Stir gently until combined.
• Pour over ice in individual glasses and serve right away.

Notes

You can substitute Torani Coconut Syrup or sugar-free coconut syrup for the sugar, water, and coconut extract.

Keep the soda cold and add it close to serving time for the best fizz.

Measure the coconut extract carefully because a little goes a long way.

If you’ve ever ordered an Ocean Water at Sonic and thought “I need to be able to make this at home,” you’re not alone. It’s just lemon-lime soda, coconut flavor, and blue food coloring — but somehow that combination hits different on a hot afternoon. The bright blue color is half the fun, and the coconut-citrus flavor is genuinely good.

This recipe uses a quick simple syrup to carry the coconut extract, which gives you better flavor distribution than just dumping extract into soda. I’ll also walk you through the Torani shortcut (my personal preference), the sugar-free version, and a few ways to make it look like something you’d actually want to photograph.

Helpful Tips

Ice Matters More Than You’d Think

Sonic’s Ocean Water is served with their signature pebble ice (also called nugget ice or pellet ice), and it genuinely changes the drinking experience. The ice absorbs the flavor of the drink, so every chew or sip through a straw hits differently than regular cubes. If you have a countertop nugget ice maker, this is absolutely the moment to use it. If not, crushed ice is the next best thing — regular cubes work, but they melt faster and dilute the drink more quickly.

Use Clear Glasses

The color is a big part of the appeal here. Tall, clear glasses — a pint glass, a mason jar, or even a plastic cup — show off the blue color in a way that a colored or opaque cup doesn’t. If you’re making this for kids, a clear plastic cup with a lid and a straw is the most practical option.

Adjust the Color to the Occasion

Three drops of blue food coloring gives a medium blue — similar to what Sonic serves. If you want something lighter and more tropical-looking, go with 1–2 drops. If you’re going for a deep ocean look, add a fourth drop. The food coloring doesn’t affect flavor, so adjust it purely based on what looks right to you.

The Torani Shortcut Is Worth It

I mentioned this in the ingredients section, but it’s worth repeating: if you can find Torani Coconut Syrup (most grocery stores carry it near the coffee supplies, or you can order it on Amazon), it replaces the entire simple syrup step. Use 2–3 tablespoons per batch, add your blue food coloring, pour in the soda. Done. The flavor is slightly more complex and a little less sharp than coconut extract alone.

Make the Syrup Ahead

The simple syrup keeps in the fridge for up to two weeks in a sealed jar. If you’re making Ocean Water for a party, make a bigger batch of syrup the night before. Day-of, all you need to do is pour and add soda.

Variations and Flavor Options

Sugar-Free Ocean Water

Use diet lemon-lime soda (Diet Sprite, 7UP Zero, or Sierra Mist Zero) and swap the simple syrup for Torani Sugar-Free Coconut Syrup. The sugar-free Torani actually tastes close to the regular version — it’s one of the better sugar-free syrups out there. This is a legitimately good version, not just a watered-down substitute.

Ocean Water with Lemonade

Replace half the lemon-lime soda with lemonade. The extra tartness cuts through the sweetness and gives it a slightly more grown-up flavor profile. This works especially well if you’re serving it at a backyard party alongside food — it’s less sweet-forward and more refreshing.

Sparkling Water Version

Swap the soda for plain sparkling water to reduce the sweetness significantly. You’ll want to increase the simple syrup slightly to compensate, but the result is lighter and more like a spa water than a copycat Sonic drink. Good if you want the coconut flavor without as much sweetness.

Layered Blue Gradient

Make two small batches: one with 1 drop of blue food coloring, one with 4–5 drops. Fill your glass halfway with the lighter batch over ice, then slowly pour the darker batch down the inside of the glass using a spoon to slow it down. You’ll get a two-tone blue effect that looks more complicated than it is.

Party Punch Version

Scale the recipe up to a full batch for a punch bowl: 6x the syrup recipe (or about ¾ cup of Torani syrup), 2 liters of lemon-lime soda, and 8–10 drops of food coloring. Add a block of ice or a ring of frozen lemonade to keep it cold without diluting it too fast. Frozen blueberries or blue raspberry sherbet can float on top if you want the presentation to be a moment.

Garnish Ideas

• Lime wedge on the rim — the green against the blue is a good color combo
• Maraschino cherry — Sonic does this, it works
• Fresh mint sprig — adds a little visual interest without changing the flavor much
• Striped paper straws — purely aesthetic, but they photograph well
• Frozen pineapple chunks — for a more tropical look and a slight flavor addition as they thaw

Recommended: Nugget Ice Maker

If pebble ice is what makes a Sonic drink feel like a Sonic drink, a countertop nugget ice maker makes sense if you drink a lot of iced beverages. The GE Profile Opal Nugget Ice Maker is the one I’d look at — it makes genuine pebble-style ice and fits on a countertop. If that’s out of budget, a standard countertop ice maker won’t make pebble ice but it does make ice faster than your freezer, which helps when you’re making drinks for a group.

Frequently Asked Questions

What is Ocean Water at Sonic?

Sonic’s Ocean Water is their signature blue drink — it’s a coconut-flavored lemon-lime soda colored blue. Sonic uses their own proprietary coconut flavoring syrup, which is why the Torani coconut syrup copycat version tastes closer to the original than using plain coconut extract. The drink is served over Sonic’s pebble ice, which is a big part of its appeal.

Can I make Ocean Water without coconut extract?

Yes — this is actually when Torani Coconut Syrup comes in. It replaces both the simple syrup and the extract in one step. If you have neither, you could try a splash of coconut-flavored drink mix or a small amount of cream of coconut (the sweet, thick kind used in piña coladas), though both will change the texture and sweetness level significantly. The extract-plus-syrup method is the most reliable if you’re starting from scratch.

Why does my Ocean Water taste flat?

A few likely causes: the syrup was still warm when you added the soda (warm liquid destroys carbonation), you stirred too vigorously after adding the soda, or the soda was already partially flat when you opened it. Always start with a fresh, cold can and let the syrup cool completely before combining. Pour the soda gently down the side of the pitcher rather than straight down into the liquid.

How far in advance can I make this?

The simple syrup can be made up to two weeks ahead and kept in the fridge. The finished drink, however, should be made right before serving — soda loses carbonation once mixed, and the drink flattens within an hour or two, especially once ice starts melting into it. If you’re making this for a party, set up a self-serve station with the cold syrup, food coloring, and chilled soda cans so people can mix their own.

Can kids make this themselves?

The soda-mixing part is very kid-friendly. The simple syrup step involves a hot stovetop, so that part needs adult supervision. If you make the syrup ahead and let it cool, older kids (10+) can put the whole drink together themselves without any help. It’s a good one for kids to “make” for guests because it looks impressive with very little actual work involved.

Does the blue food coloring affect the taste?

No. Food coloring is flavorless at the amounts used here. Three to five drops in a 24 oz drink is a negligible quantity — it’s purely visual. If you prefer to skip the coloring, the drink tastes identical; it just looks like regular soda. Gel food coloring is more concentrated than liquid, so you’ll need fewer drops to get the same intensity of blue.

Related Recipes

• Shirley Temple Drink — another classic mocktail that’s easy to make at home and a hit with kids
• Copycat Sonic Drinks — more Sonic-inspired drinks you can make yourself
• Watermelon Agua Fresca — a light, fresh drink that’s great for summer gatherings
• Homemade Lemonade — the base you can mix with almost anything for a quick flavored drink

Fruit-infused water, also known as detox water or flavored water, is a delicious and healthy alternative to sugary drinks.

By simply adding a variety of fresh fruits, herbs, and even vegetables to water, you can create refreshing beverages that not only taste great but also offer numerous health benefits.

Whether you’re looking to stay hydrated, aid digestion, or just enjoy a tasty drink without the added calories, fruit-infused water is a fantastic option.

One of the main reasons people turn to fruit-infused water is its ability to make hydration easier. Many people struggle to drink enough water throughout the day, myself included! But adding natural flavors can make it so much easier!

And, another bonus, the vitamins and minerals found in fruits can seep into the water, providing a subtle but beneficial boost to your daily nutrient intake. Drinking enough water is essential for health and well-being. It helps maintain the balance of bodily fluids, supports kidney function, and can even improve skin complexion.

With fruit-infused water, you get the added advantage of antioxidants, vitamins, and other nutrients that can enhance the benefits of staying hydrated.

Benefits of Fruit-Infused Water

Staying properly hydrated is crucial for maintaining optimal health.

Water plays a vital role in various bodily functions, including regulating body temperature, transporting nutrients, and removing waste products.

When you are well-hydrated, you may notice improvements in energy levels, cognitive function, and overall physical performance.

25 Fruit-Infused Water Combinations Here

Specific Benefits of Adding Fruits to Water

Adding fruits to your water can significantly enhance its flavor and nutritional value. Here are some specific benefits:

• Improved Digestion: Many fruits, such as lemon and ginger, have natural digestive properties that can help soothe the stomach and promote better digestion.
• Enhanced Flavor: Infusing water with fruits makes it more flavorful, encouraging you to drink more and stay hydrated throughout the day.
• Additional Nutrients: Fruits are rich in vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants. When infused in water, some of these nutrients are released, providing a subtle but beneficial boost to your diet.
• Weight Loss, Detoxification, and Overall Well-Being: Fruit-infused water can support weight loss by providing a low-calorie alternative to sugary drinks. The natural sweetness of fruits can help curb cravings for unhealthy snacks.

Additionally, ingredients like cucumber and mint can have a mild diuretic effect, aiding in detoxification and reducing bloating.

Moreover, drinking fruit-infused water can contribute to well-being by providing hydration, essential nutrients, and antioxidants.

This can lead to improved skin health, increased energy levels, and a strengthened immune system.

Even More Fruit-Infused Water Benefits

Adding fruits to your diet, especially through fruit-infused water, is a fantastic way to boost your health.

Fruits are loaded with essential vitamins, minerals, antioxidants, and fiber, all of which are super important for keeping your body in tip-top shape.

They can help boost your immune system, aid digestion, and even improve your skin. Plus, fruit-infused water is a delicious and hydrating way to enjoy these benefits.

Take citrus fruits, for example. Lemons, limes, and oranges are packed with vitamin C, which is great for your immune system. Vitamin C helps your body fight off infections and keeps your skin healthy by helping produce collagen. The natural acidity of these fruits also aids digestion and helps detoxify your body, making them perfect for fruit-infused water.

Berries like strawberries, blueberries, and raspberries are another awesome addition. They’re high in antioxidants, which help combat free radicals and reduce inflammation. These antioxidants protect your cells from damage and promote heart health. Plus, berries add a sweet and tangy flavor to your water, making it even more enjoyable to drink.

Tropical fruits like pineapple and mango are not only tasty but also packed with nutrients. Pineapple has bromelain, an enzyme that aids digestion and reduces inflammation. Mangoes are rich in vitamins A and C, which boost your immunity and improve eye health. Adding these fruits to your water can create a refreshing and nutritious tropical drink.

Herbs like mint, basil, and ginger can also enhance the benefits of fruit-infused water. Mint and basil add a refreshing taste and help with digestion, while ginger is great for relieving nausea and reducing inflammation. Mixing these herbs with fruits in your water creates a flavorful and healthy drink that you can enjoy all day.

Incorporating a variety of fruits and herbs into your water not only makes it more fun to drink but also helps keep you healthy and hydrated.

So go ahead and experiment with different combinations to find your favorite flavors!

Best Practices for Infusing Water

• Use Fresh Fruits: For the best flavor and maximum nutrient retention, opt for fresh fruits. Wash them thoroughly before adding them to your water. Fresh fruits are not only more flavorful but also provide more vitamins and antioxidants compared to dried or frozen options.
• Cut Fruits Into Small Pieces: Slicing or chopping fruits into smaller pieces increases the surface area, allowing the flavors and nutrients to infuse into the water more effectively. Aim for thin slices or small chunks for optimal infusion.
• Let It Infuse for the Right Amount of Time: The infusion time can vary depending on the fruits and your taste preference. Generally, letting your fruit-infused water sit in the refrigerator for 2-4 hours is sufficient for a mild flavor. For a stronger taste, you can let it infuse overnight. Citrus fruits and herbs like mint and basil can be left to infuse for longer without becoming overpowering.

Tips for Storing and Serving Fruit-Infused Water

• Use a Glass Pitcher or Jar: A glass pitcher or jar is perfect for infusing water because it allows you to see the colorful fruits and herbs. It’s also non-reactive, which helps maintain the flavor and freshness of your water.
• Keep It Cold: Store your fruit-infused water in the refrigerator to keep it refreshing and cool. This also helps the flavors develop more fully. You can prepare a large batch and keep it in the fridge for up to 2-3 days.
• Use a Strainer or Infuser: If you prefer not to have bits of fruit floating around, use a strainer or an infuser bottle. This makes it easy to pour and drink without having to sift through the fruit pieces.
• Serve with Ice: For an extra chill, add some ice cubes to your infused water. You can also freeze leftover fruit or herbs in ice cube trays to add a fun twist and keep your drink cold without diluting the flavors.

Creative Combinations and Experimenting with Different Flavors

• Mix and Match Fruits: Don’t be afraid to get creative with your fruit combinations. Try mixing strawberries with basil, cucumber with mint, or pineapple with ginger. The possibilities are endless! Here are some tasty combinations to start with:
  • Citrus Splash: Lemon, lime, and orange slices.
  • Berry Delight: Strawberries, blueberries, and raspberries.
  • Tropical Paradise: Pineapple chunks, mango slices, and a few mint leaves.
  • Refreshing Cucumber Mint: Cucumber slices and fresh mint leaves.
  • Watermelon Basil: Watermelon cubes with fresh basil leaves.

• Add Herbs and Spices: Herbs and spices can take your infused water to the next level. Try adding a sprig of rosemary, a few leaves of cilantro, a slice of ginger, or a pinch of cinnamon. These additions can add depth and a unique flavor profile to your drink.
• Experiment with Vegetables: Vegetables can also be great in infused water. Try adding slices of cucumber, celery, or even a few pieces of bell pepper. These can give your water a refreshing and slightly savory twist.
• Try Seasonal Flavors: Use seasonal fruits and herbs. In the summer, use berries and watermelon. In the fall, go for apples and cinnamon. Winter is perfect for citrus fruits and pomegranate, while spring is great for fresh herbs like mint and basil.

By following these tips, you can create a variety of delicious and refreshing fruit-infused waters that will keep you hydrated and satisfied. Feel free to experiment and find your favorite combinations!

Friend after friend has tried Hello Fresh family meals delivered to their front door.

I have three friends in particular who have mentioned that they’re actively subscribing to the Hellofresh family plan and have given me their Hello Fresh reviews.

And what’s nuts is that these three friends have almost nothing in common.

What’s even more crazy is that right now you can get Hello Fresh FREE MEALS! Keep reading …

Hello Fresh Reviews from Friends:

Friend #1: 45 and 44-year-old empty nesters, but demanding jobs cooking dinner for two.

They love to eat out at restaurants but recognize that when they dine out, they overeat and splurge on calories. Plus, my friend doesn’t love cooking and has never been a “good cook” as she calls herself, so making the Hello Fresh family fresh meals has given her a sense of accomplishment in the home.

She came across the 18 Hello Fresh Free Meals offer here (Hello Fresh free meals coupon code: HELLOFRESH18) and couldn’t turn it down.

She has raved about the Hello Fresh meal plans popular family meal delivery service for a few years and urged me to try it out early in its popularity.

I resisted (more on that later) She loves the fact that she can upgrade the meals so that they can enjoy steak once or twice a week, but also eat smart with the calorie smart dinner choices.

And, bless her heart – she loves that the meals look like the food in the picture on the recipe card when dinner is ready. She has said time and time again that they look fancy and she loves that she did it herself.

Friend #2: Late thirties couple with a ten-year-old daughter and eight-year-old son.

Again, these friends both have really demanding jobs and found themselves eating Costco prepared meals every night, and takeout a few nights a week as well.

This friend loves that she and her husband, and even the kids will join in on making the Hellofresh family meals together. And, we know that having kids help out in the kitchen makes them much more willing to try new foods – check out this article on why cooking kits for kids and kids helping cook makes a difference.

She admits that the kids don’t always love their dinner from every HelloFresh menu, but she loves that she gets time with her family and a good, healthy meal on the table a few nights a week.

Friend #3: Family of five, husband travels four nights a week and her job is very demanding.

14-year-old daughter, twelve-year-old son and five-year-old daughter. The family is for sure the most spread out in age, but has the best palettes as far as taste goes.

I am amazed at what their kids will eat – compared to most kids their age. This is outstanding because their kids are so spread out in age – rarely will a 5-year-old be content with a 14-year-olds dinner choice, but HelloFresh must be just that good!

Or, Hello Fresh has made it fun to try new things…. My friend loves HelloFresh meals because of the bond that it makes for she and their 14-year-old daughter.

My friend lets her daughter pick the menu items from HelloFresh and her daughter even makes the HelloFresh meals… Yep! How cool is that??? This teaches the 14-year-old how to cook and how to be independent all in one. Bonus: Dinner is made!

Whether you resonate with my friends described above, or you’re in a league of your own, here is how to get signed up for this full-of-taste, yet kid-friendly meal delivery service:

Trying Hello Fresh for the first time (My First Box!):

I imagine you’re wondering with all of these glowing Hello Fresh reviews why I haven’t tried Hello Fresh family meal plans yet …. the ultimate reason is that I really do enjoy making new recipes and new dinners and seeing my family’s eyes light up when I’ve come up with the best way to make a casserole, goulash, side salad or soup.

In reality though – I have been running myself ragged trying to always make new meals, and try new dinners. And, if there’s help (and a Hello Fresh free trial) why shouldn’t I take advantage??

Plus, I know that I have several readers that spend lots of time on the internet looking for new recipe ideas, so if Hello Fresh family recipes appeal to them, I want to give it an honest review and try it out for myself.

So, that’s exactly what I did! When Hello Fresh 14 free meals promo came out, I hopped on the opportunity to try it out for less — so glad I did, too!

How to order Your 1st Box of HelloFresh Family Box:

1. 1.  Sign in to Hello Fresh here (especially if you want the discount)
   2. Choose your menu preferences
   3. Enter promo code HELLOFRESH18
   4. Select how many people you are cooking for
   5. How many Hello Fresh recipes do you want to make per week?

Once you create your Hello Fresh username, the rest will be smooth sailing from there. I took screenshots as I was going through the HelloFresh signup to get our family meals delivered.

It’s as simple as 1-2-3. You can see the steps for ordering Hello Fresh for two people below.

1. Personalize your Hello Fresh plan:

For my first order I decided to go with a calorie smart menu for two people because I wanted our first try of the meal delivery service to be just my husband and I. Since we’re trying to eat low calorie, I figured this is the perfect way to try out Hello Fresh, get the kids noticing some new foods and see if the family fresh meals could work for all of us.

Plus, I have been wanting to get our ten-year-old daughter more involved in the kitchen, so this seemed like the perfect way: making dinner for mom and dad, with no knives involved.

2.Choose your meal delivery day of the week:

I ended up changing my delivery day to Monday as that gave me fresh items for dinners for the week. On the weekends, I find that I don’t cook sit-down dinners. It’s more pizza, sandwiches, burgers, etc.

You’ll notice my initial five free meals plus free shipping that you get as a new customer in the screenshot below. That makes eight meals just $35.89 shipped to my front door!

3.Choose Payment

4. Change meals in your Hello Fresh Menu (if you wish)

The first image is what was chosen for me and the second image is what I ended up deciding on.

To change out the meals on Hello Fresh you simply press the minus sign to take out a meal and choose the plus sign to add in a different meal.

The Hello Fresh meal delivery process was so much easier than I thought it would be!

Those One-Pan Portabella & Poblano Fajitas are screaming my name! I also love that during the Hellofresh meal selection process, each meal has labels on them. You can see the labels on my meal choices above.

5. Skip upcoming weeks (if you wish)

As you can see, skipping a week of Hello Fresh is super easy. I can’t wait to try out our first Hello Fresh meal delivery! I am actually excited for the entire family! Now … it’s time for where the rubber hits the road … what do I think??

My Hello Fresh Review & First Time Preparing a Meal with Hello Fresh:

Ok … I am 100% blown away at Hello Fresh. I am floored. I didn’t expect to love it, and as I said above – I enjoy cooking. I started by taking everything out of the Hello Fresh Box.

It was packed really nicely.

One bag for each recipe and two packages of meat – one chicken, and one beef. I decided to start with the recipe that said it took the longest to prepare in an effort to see how annoying it would be. It was a) NOT annoying and b) it smelled – and ultimately TASTED FANTASTIC!

Here are a few pictures of the process – it took me exactly one hour from opening the bag of ingredients until my kitchen was picked up and all dishes were hand washed. OK – THAT in itself is amazing!

  Just keepin’ it real …. after I was finished cooking this was my mess. That’s not much of a mess if you ask me! It helps that since everything is preportioned there weren’t leftover ingredients everywhere to have to put away!

Finished product:

Even the kids were raving about how good this meal smelled while it was cooking! And, as a HUGE bonus, we got four dinners out of this meal! I usually add a lettuce salad to dinners, so that gave us plenty of food!

Is Hello Fresh Right For Your Family?

If you can get 14 free HelloFresh meals plus free shipping like they’re offering right now here then I say it’s 100% worth atleast giving the Hellofresh family box meals a try.

For three calorie smart meals for two people I ended at $35, which is a great price, considering that everything will come prepped and ready to throw together saving me time looking for recipes, time at the grocery store, and time in the kitchen cutting, dicing and measuring all of the ingredients.

For me, that’s the worst part of cooking dinner!

Now let’s talk the most frequently asked questions. How does this all really come together?

How hard is it to skip a week of Hello Fresh?

If you’re wondering how hard it is to skip a week of Hello Fresh – it is not hard at all! Follow these steps:

1. Sign in to your Hello Fresh account

2. Click on the week that you want to skip for your family meal boxes

3. Press edit delivery

4. Press skip this week

Look at the images above.

It really is so simple to cancel a week, or two, or even three weeks. Or, you can cancel your membership all together if you wish!

Do you get free meals with HelloFresh?

Yes! You get Hello Fresh free meals when you redeem a special offer like the one I am offering here (use coupon code HELLOFRESH18 here)

Can Hello Fresh feed a family of six?

To feed a family of six on Hello Fresh simply make two deliveries.

Do one for four people and one for two.

Can I do HelloFresh for one person?

You can do Hello Fesh for 1 person, but you’ll have a leftover meal.

I highly recommend choosing three meals for the week and that way you would have six dinners, or a combo of six dinners and lunches.

This is a great way to have healthy, quick and filling meals for one person!

What do you get with a HelloFresh purchase subscription?

With your Hello Fresh subscription, you will get a box delivered to your front door that has everything portioned out and ready to prepare.

It is important to note that Hello Fresh recipes are not oven-ready.

Rather, they are prep ready. Everything will be portioned out and ready to cut, mix together and then cook.

Are Hellofresh meal kits worth the money?

When you can get free meals in your Hello Fresh delivery they are worth the money.

Another time the Hello Fresh meals are worth the money is when you’re busy and want the groceries delivered to your front door.

The third reason that Hello Fresh might be a benefit is when you’re burnt out of coming up with meal ideas (that’s me right now!) and nothing sounds good.

Just a little dinnertime inspiration can go a long ways for us moms!

Are there Hello Fresh Vegetarian Meals? Yes, yes, yes! Hellofresh vegetarian meals are awesome, too! I can’t wait to try our two vegetarian meals in my first Hello Fresh meal delivery!

I would’ve never put those on my menu but I am thrilled to try them out from Hello Fresh!

One of the best ways to mitigate these costs and make life just a little bit easier is to be on the hunt for free baby samples. The good news is that you’re in the right place to find all sorts of baby samples and free baby stuff in the mail, too!

Below, I’ll share some of the best strategies for getting free baby sample kits by mail, and even share a printable letter that you can use today to request free baby samples by mail.

First Free Baby Sample Box to Request:

Before you start looking for free baby products, the most logical place is Amazon, the world’s largest baby product retailer. 

They will send you a free baby box, just head here and start your registry to get a jump on your free baby samples for new moms. 

Amazon.com Free Baby Box Here

Why Should You Request Free Baby Samples?

When you’re expecting a baby, or if you already have your new bundle of joy, it’s easy to feel overwhelmed with all that you have to do, and all the items that you need to keep your home stocked with.

From diapers to free baby bottle samples to baby formula and so much more… the list of things your baby needs goes on and on! And wouldn’t it be nice if you didn’t have to pay for some of those items?

This is where free baby samples can really come in handy!

Top 9 Best Free Baby Samples: 

1. Amazon Baby Registry Welcome Box
2. Walmart Baby Registry Welcome Box
3. Buy Buy Baby Free Goody Bag
4. Target Welcome Kit
5. Babylist Registry Hello Baby Box
6. Free Maternity Clothes (See #7 Below!)
7. Enfamil Family Beginnings Pack
8. Pampers Club Rewards Program
9. Huggies Rewards+ Program

First, off, though, I feel it necessary to share a great article on 10 Things New Moms Should Not Worry About.

Although having diapers, bottles and a feeding plan are pretty necessary, there are things that aren’t and that article does a pretty good job of teaching, or even reminding new moms what’s important and frankly, what’s not as important.

What is important, though is to be sure that you’re an informed consumer, which is why I wrote this article on things that you can snag completely free, at no cost to you, just offered simply as free baby samples (by mail) of course, because we just don’t want to leave the house when we’re super pregnant, am.i.right? ????

The mistake most expecting and new moms make is not realizing that they can request free baby samples. But you can! Here are the main reasons why you should request free baby samples:

• Save money – The obvious reason to request free baby samples from companies is that you’ll be able to save money on essentials for baby. And who doesn’t like saving money?
• Find new products that you love – When you’re a new mom, you rely on the recommendations of friends, family and medical professionals, as well as the occasional Google or Pinterest search to figure out which brands and products you should purchase. When you request free baby samples, you’re opening the door to a new brand or product, which you may very well fall in love with (and may not have discovered otherwise)!
• Make life easier – Above all else, requesting free baby samples can help make your life a lot easier! Doing a little bit of work up front to request free baby samples by mail will set you up to receive goodies and helpful items in the mail. Can you imagine a day in your future where you’re too busy to run to the store to get some new baby formula… and then a package of free formula samples that you requested a few weeks ago magically shows up at your door? It may sound too good to be true, but it’s not! You just need the tools to help you request these free samples for baby, which I’m going to share with you now.  

How to Request Free Baby Samples from Baby Companies that Send Free Stuff

Now that you know why it’s helpful to request free baby samples, here are some ways that you can get yourself on the list for free baby sample kits by mail from baby companies that send free stuff – lickety split!

1. Ask for Baby Kits and Coupons by Mail

For starters, make a list of all of the baby product companies and sample baby offers that you can think of to contact them for coupons, free diaper samples by mail, free pregnancy stuff by mail, and even free baby bottle samples.

I have had new moms-to-be ask me for a list of “companies to send baby shower invites to for free stuff” and “what companies give free baby samples”. These are the 16 companies that I recommend writing to get free baby stuff by mail.

The key is trying to get free baby samples by mail without surveys, though.

TOP 16 Baby Companies That Send Free Stuff:

1. Enfamil Baby Formula
2. Cetaphil
3. Eucerin
4. Gerber Baby Foods
5. Huggies Diapers Rewards Program
6. Luvs Diapers
7. Orajel
8. Pampers baby samples for free by mail
9. Pampers Kandoo baby free samples
10. Purex
11. Seventh Generation
12. Tide Detergent and/or Stain Release
13. Tylenol baby freebies
14. Vaseline
15. Xtra Laundry Detergent sample freebies
16. Dreft

FREE! Get Free Samples from Enfamil Family Beginnings Program

If you are really serious about getting baby free samples by mail, I recommend finding the company’s address on the contact us form and letting them know that you’re expecting a baby (or that you’ve recently had a baby) and then, let them know that you’re interested in trying their products and getting free samples by mail.

FREE Printable Letter for Requesting Baby Samples by Mail

Here is a printable pdf Letter for Free Samples for Baby that you can print out and send.

Just personalize the letter and customize it with your information. Easy Peasy! You never know, some companies have been known to send a free baby welcome box!

You’re going to LOVE these!

2. Find the Free Baby Kits Already Being Offered

Another way to request free baby samples by mail is to find where there are free baby sample kits already being offered.

It's no secret that companies want you to try their products and fall madly in love with them.

So, why shouldn't they be sure you get your hands on something free for baby, or even a free gift - a small sample for baby at little to no cost to you?

When it comes down to it, the market for baby products isn’t that long. If you have a baby, there is likely no way you'll be buying Huggies after the child is three years old, right? Compare this to something like bread, where once you find a bread company to be brand loyal to, you'll be buying that bread for years and years to come.

These companies know that it behooves them to send out free stuff for babies by mail to make sure that you fall in love with their products and buy theirs and theirs alone for the entire time that you're in the market for that product.

There are several companies that offer a free baby kit and even free samples of diapers by mail.

Here are some of the free baby sample kits available (some started in 2017, 2018, 2019, 2020 and are still available in 2022 and still have free baby samples in 2023!):

• Target Free Welcome Kit with Registry (CLICK HERE to Qualify)
• Babylist Registry: Parenting forum Free Hello Baby Box (CLICK HERE to Qualify)

3. Sign up for Baby Registries

The real magic of getting free baby samples by mail is when you sign up for baby registries. Some of the free baby samples that you get when you sign up for a baby registry are mind-blowing! You can receive diapers, free books, baby shampoo, pacifiers and more - all for free!

In addition, some of the companies will even offer a registry completion coupon that is higher than any coupon that you will ever get from that retailer again! When your registry is filled, they will deliver a coupon to you that you can use at that store - sometimes for up to 40, 50, or 60% off at that retailer!

Here are retailers that offer a free baby box when you create a baby registry with them:

• Amazon Baby Registry (Plus, the Amazon baby site offers great deals to save money, free shipping and a free "Free Stuff for Baby Box" when you buy off the registry!)
• Target
• Walmart Baby Registry

Another super nice perk of registering for your baby at a big store like this other than getting all of the free baby sample options is that you'll also have super easy exchanges and returns on all of your registry items as well.

And, when you're a new mom or dad, easy is king. Promise. :)

10 Legit Places to Get FREE Baby Samples

Below I have listed 10 awesome places to get free baby baby samples, and some other free items that are available for the taking.

Tip: Are you not the one having a baby? This article is free, please pass it on to any friends or relatives who could use some free baby stuff. You can also request the free baby items and take it to your local women's shelter.

1. Free Baby Diapers

Who wouldn't love to try out a diaper company before buying big packages? Get free sample pack and 50% off your first bundle when you request them from Hello Bello. You can do that here.

2. Free Baby Body Care Samples

Hello Bello is making a huge run on their baby product lines! Get a free bonus item with your free baby set here.

3. Free Baby Formula

However you plan on feeding baby is up to you, but it's nice to have some sample sizes hanging around, especially for when you're on the go.

Enfamil offers a free Pack 'n Cool set along with free baby formula coupons when you submit a request here.

4. Free Baby Magazines

Every once in awhile, RewardSurvey offers free baby magazines that you can request by taking a short survey. There aren't any free magazines available but check back by pinning this post here.

5. Free Gift Cards for Buying Baby Stuff

When our kiddos were in diapers I loved peeling the reward stickers off diaper boxes everytime I bought them and watching my reward points rack up. When you put the reward codes into the online portals you earn free stuff for baby. You can earn free diapers, but you can also earn free Starbucks gift cards, too.  ;-)

Join these clubs to earn free gift cards for buying baby diapers and wipes:

• Huggies Rewards
• Pampers Rewards Gifts to Grow

6. Free Baby Food

Just like Pampers Rewards Gifts to Grow provides free baby diapers, and it also offers free Starbucks Gift Cards, your Pampers Gifts to Grow points also offers free baby food. Yes, it's true!

You can earn free baby food from buying diapers. This is a great way to try new brands, or just buy the brands that you've always loved with free baby food coupons.

7. Free Maternity Clothes

Did you know that you can earn free maternity clothes by trading in your old clothes to ThredUp and using the credit to buy gently used maternity clothes? You sure can!

Another great tip if you're looking for one or two great maternity outfits or staples to your closet, subscribe to StitchFix.

When you make an account here you'll input a note to your stylist along outlining  with your measurements this is the deal for you!

New Stitchfix customers will get a free $20 credit to use on their first order. And, you'll get $25 to spend on every "fix" you request to use towards to new clothes. Win-win!

• 1. Head here and take 7-8 minutes to fill out your style profile
• 2. **** Note: On prices I put “cheaper the better” because, well… I’m frugal.  ?
• 3. Pick the date you’d like to receive your shipment
• 4. Try everything on in the comfort of your home when you receive it
• 5. Buy what you like and return the rest within 3 business days (MINUS the $20 Stylist fee = FREE clothes!!)

8. Get a Target REDcard stat

Apply for a Target Baby Registry here to get a rare 20% off a Target purchase coupon. And, I'm here to tell you, any savings when you have a new baby at home is a good deal.

When you request that a Target REDcard debit card be added to your bank account HERE, you'll automatically save 5% off every Target purchase.

This is a big deal since I imagine you'll also be using coupons on top of the 5% discount saving big money on diapers, clothes, baby food and more. Apply for a Target REDcard easy here.

9. Free Baby Stuff on Craigslist

Do you need an extra rocking chair for another level of the house? Or maybe Grandma needs one at her house? Setting a reminder to search the craigslist in your area is a great way to find one for free or atleast possibly uber cheap!

Please be safe when you arrange your pickup. Many police stations offer a monitored part of their parking lot for selling and trading craigslist items.

10. Get free baby stuff from friends and family

Do you need a pack 'n play only for the weekend? Or, do you need a foldup stroller just for a getaway? Don't be afraid to ask a friend. Normally they're more than happy to help where they can.

Other FAQs About Free Baby Samples

Still have questions about free baby samples by mail? Here are some of the other questions I get all the time.

Are free samples really free?

Free samples are really free! Sometimes you do need to test out the products by buying a bundle, or paying the shipping costs, but most of the time these baby product companies want to get in front of new moms, so they're happy to give something for free in return for a lifetime customer.

Are the free baby samples by mail really any good?

You better bet your bippy! I always find that the baby companies are so generous with their free samples, a free baby box, free baby gear, etc.

The reason likely is that they know that there is only a short window of time to use all of their products and they hope that you’ll choose their brand, so they want to be yours and your child’s favorite as soon as possible.

How about free baby bottle samples – are those a thing?

Of course free baby bottle samples are a thing! Much like diapers (in fact maybe even more so), you use baby bottles for such a short amount of time.

And, bottles can be reused for multiple children, so it may be even more important to them to get your business from the get-go.

To that point, offering a free baby bottle or baby bottle coupons is in their best interest.

Companies that are currently offering free baby bottle samples:

• Dr. Brown’s via Target (with free baby registry here)
• Amazon’s Baby Registry Welcome Box
  • Simply complete a Baby Registry using Amazon Checklist here and $10 off purchases from the registry spent (from yourself or gifters). Use this free $10 on some free baby clothes, samples!
  • You’ll also get a free baby sample box full of full size and trial size freebies – awesome!

Okay now - sound off! What ways to get free baby samples and free baby sample kits did I miss? What are your best tips for getting baby freebies? I'd love to hear!

And, they even have maternity clothes for petites, maternity clothes for plus size and there’s a $20 credit towards free maternity clothes available right now as well!

Try Stitch Fix Maternity for Free!

Oh my stars, I am SO excited about the Stitch Fix Maternity program! The Stitch Fix that we already know and love has a Stitch Fix Maternity option where you can score Maternity Stitch Fix Outfits instead of regular everyday women’s clothing and I could just squeal with joy.

If you’re like me, when I was pregnant I hated shopping. I loathed the fact that things didn’t fit for long and that I wouldn’t be wearing any of this in a short period of time.

I didn’t feel all that well, I am (almost to a fault) frugal and so I didn’t want to spend the money, and nothing (nothing!) looked good on me. Enter kid #2 and I literally was feeling like wearing only t-shirts. I needed a few nice shirts to wear to work in an office but finding something that fit well was a s-t-ru-g-g-l-e.

In enters my favorite clothing vendor.

What is Stitch Fix?

Stitch Fix is an online fashion retailer that blends expert styling, proprietary technology, and unique product to deliver a shopping experience that is truly personalized for you.

When you fill out your profile (free here) and you’re honest and clear with your preferences, you can get some of the highest quality clothing that will fit you perfectly for the event that you’re looking to dress for.

How does Stitch Fix work?

It’s an easy process to get your first Stitch Fix box
Fill out your Stitch Fix style profile: This takes about 10-15 minutes, but take your time and use your best email address. The profile is the best way for your stylist to pick out excellent clothes that you’ll love.
Schedule your Stitch Fix: Once you receive your box you’ll have 7 days to decide what you’re going to keep.
Pay your refundable styling fee ($20)
Check out: Once you decide what you’re going to keep, go through the checkout process, being sure to give your stylist plenty of information about why you picked things to keep and why you didn’t keep other things. This is how your stylist will know what to pick for your next box.
Pay: On the payment screen your $20 styling fee will be deducted from whatever you choose to keep. And, if you decide that you want to keep everything you’ll save 25% off your entire order – (a whopping 25%!!)
Enjoy!

Simply head here to fill out the Stitch Fix Style Profile and the Stitch Fix personal stylists will handpick a selection of five clothing items and accessories unique to your taste, budget, lifestyle and in this case, stage in your pregnancy. You can buy what you like and return the rest for free!

So, Does Stitch Fix Have Maternity Clothes?

Yes! And, when I heard that there was a Stitch Fix Maternity option I was thrilled! Try it once to get an outfit for a special event, or get every month of your pregnancy covered. It’s up to you.

And, as your baby gets older, there’s also a kids Stitch Fix, which is super fun as well!

Is there a certain type of pregnancy clothes that Stitch Fix has?

The Stitch Fix maternity program has everything from maternity dresses to post pregnancy dresses, plus size maternity, maternity pants, maternity jeans, maternity shorts, and even maternity bras. You might get your nw favorite knit top, or a skinny jean that you didn’t know that you could have ever lived without!

And, you can bet that they’ll be the cutest maternity clothes, as the Stitch Fix stylists are always on top of the latest trends.

How Much Does Maternity Stitch Fix Maternity Cost?

In reality, Stitch Fix Maternity costs the price of just one item. When you sign up for a one month delivery of Stitch Fix Maternity, you’ll pay a $20 styling fee.

But, here’s the awesome part of this maternity styling program: The $20 that you pay can go towards any one item in your order. So, if you love a pair of jeans that is in your maternity Stitch Fix box, keep the jeans and you’ll pay the difference between the $20 and the price of the jeans.

Why would I use the Stitch Fix Maternity program?

Well, does a FREE stylist sound good?! Ha – only kidding (but not really!) The Stitch Fix styling fee is $20 upfront, but technically it is FREE because that $20 can be applied towards anything you decide to order. This is AWESOME if you have an event coming up – like a baby shower, wedding, or for example, if you’re working through your pregnancy.

Or, maybe even if you’re in need of maternity workout clothes. The $20 will go towards whatever you choose, making for a possible free maternity clothing piece. Awesome, ‘eh?!

Does Stitch Fix offer maternity clothes for plus size women?

When you’re looking for plus sizes maternity clothes can be especially hard to find. But, since Stitch Fix offers maternity clothes for plus size women, this becomes a fantastic option!

Stitch Fix offers maternity items in sizes 0-14 & XS-XL as well as bump-friendly items in sizes 16-24W. When you create your Stitch Fix Maternity account, just let your Stylist know you’d like to receive maternity clothing by updating your Style Profile with your due date.

By letting them know when you’re due, your Stylist can send you the right pieces at the right time. How awesome is that?!

Does Stitch Fix also offer maternity clothes for petites?

Stitch Fix offers maternity clothes for women of all fits and sizes – including petite women as well.

What if I don’t love my all of my Stitch Fix Outfits?

The great thing about Stitch Fix is that when you pay your $20 styling fee on the front end, that $20 will go towards anything in the Stitch Fix box that you decide to keep. I LOVE that about Stitch Fix. So, let’s say your stylist sends you a $28 shirt as one of your five items. And, you love the shirt.

The $20 credit goes toward that shirt (and remember it’s going to fit you PERFECTLY because they have your measurements) and shipping is free.

Then, (for free!) you’ll send any of the pieces back that you didn’t care for. Easy peasy!

Does Stitch Fix have cheap maternity clothes?

The maternity clithes that Stitch Fix has are not cheap, but they’re not overly expensive either. They are reasonably priced and seeing as you don’t have to leave the house to shop for them, that makes them that much more appealing, right?

Can Stitch Fix send any kind of maternity clothes?

Yes. And, the more particular you are on the note that you send to your stylist, the better off you’ll be. Let the Stitch Fix stylists know the events that you have coming up, the pieces that you need to complete your maternity wardrobe and anything else that is pertinent to the state that you’re in and you’ll be all set!

Does Stitch Fix send cute maternity clothes?

Yep! You’ll be amazed at the clothes pregnant ladies can have when they have a Stitch Fix stylist shopping for them!

Does Stitch Fix do subscription boxes?

Stitch Fix is not a subscription box company. You schedule your Stitch Fix deliveries as needed, or you can opt to have them sent monthly. It’s up to you, but there is no monthly fee.

I love that about Stitch Fix!

When can I choose for my maternity fix to be sent?

You can do your fixes on demand (which is how I receive mine) or you can have them automatically sent. There is no mandatory monthly fee or anything like that.

Is Stitch Fix worth it?

100% Yes! If you only even choose to do one month and choose one or two high quality items, that makes Stitch Fix Maternity worth it for sure!

Any questions? Email me, and I’d be happy to answer any questions. The girls over at Stitch Fix are awesome at answering questions too. Once you make your initial profile here, you can ask questions through the form that they will get back to you with.

Head here to make your profile.

Check out the Stitch Fix Maternity Pinterest board for some inspiration.

If you answered yes, then you might want to consider signing up for Amazon’s Kindle Unlimited!

This amazing subscription service gives you access to an enormous library of ebooks, audiobooks, and magazines that you can read to your heart’s content.

You can download as many books as you want and read them on any of your Amazon devices, including your Kindle e-reader, Fire tablet, or the Kindle app on your phone or computer.

Now, you may already be familiar with Amazon Prime, but did you know that Kindle Unlimited is a separate subscription service that can be added on top of your Prime membership?

With Prime, you get all sorts of amazing benefits, like free two-day shipping, access to Prime Video and Prime Music, and exclusive discounts.

But, if you’re a book lover, then you’re definitely going to want to sign up for Kindle Unlimited as well, which is a treasure trove of books that are not included in Prime Reading.

What is Kindle Unlimited?

Think of Kindle Unlimited as a Netflix for books.

It’s a subscription service that lets you access an enormous library of books for a monthly fee.

The best part? You can read as many books as you want from the Kindle Unlimited library without having to pay extra for each one.

Whether you’re into romance, thriller, mystery, or literary fiction, Kindle Unlimited has got you covered. It includes a wide variety of genres and categories, including bestsellers and self-published works.

So, if you’re tired of rereading the same old books on your bookshelf, Kindle Unlimited is the perfect solution to help you explore new literary worlds.

Another great thing about Kindle Unlimited is that you can use it on any device that has the free Kindle app installed.

This includes smartphones, tablets, and even your computer. So, if you’re on the go and don’t have your Kindle e-reader with you, you can simply switch to your phone and continue reading where you left off.

Oh, and did we mention that Kindle Unlimited also includes audiobooks? That’s right, you can listen to books on the go, whether you’re commuting to work or working out at the gym.

Plus, many Kindle Unlimited titles come with Audible narration, so you can seamlessly switch between reading and listening to the book.

All in all, Kindle Unlimited is an excellent choice for bookworms who want to discover new authors and genres without breaking the bank.

Get a FREE Month of Kindle Unlimited

The Differences Between Amazon Prime and Kindle Unlimited

Now, let’s address the burning question: Does Kindle Unlimited come with Amazon Prime? The short answer is no, but let’s dig deeper.

First, let’s talk about Amazon Prime. This is a subscription service that provides a host of benefits to its members. Some of these benefits include free two-day shipping, access to Prime Video and Prime Music, and unlimited photo storage.

But what about books? Well, Prime members do get access to a service called Prime Reading, which lets them borrow a rotating selection of ebooks, magazines, and comics for free. Prime Reading doesn’t offer as many titles as Kindle Unlimited, but it’s still a great perk for book lovers who also enjoy other benefits of Amazon Prime.

As for Kindle Unlimited, it’s a separate subscription service that requires its own monthly fee. However, Amazon Prime members do get a discount on Kindle Unlimited subscriptions. The exact discount varies depending on the plan you choose, but it can be a great way to save some money if you’re already an Amazon Prime member.

Get a FREE Month of Kindle Unlimited

So, to sum it up, Kindle Unlimited and Amazon Prime are two separate subscription services. While they don’t come bundled together, Prime members can still enjoy some book-related benefits through Prime Reading and can save money on a Kindle Unlimited subscription if they choose to sign up.

What is in the Kindle Unlimited Library and Catalogs?

Let’s talk more about what you can expect from the Kindle Unlimited library. At the time of writing, the library includes over one million titles, with more being added all the time.

The catalog includes a wide range of genres, including fiction, non-fiction, and children’s books.

Some of the publishers whose books are included in the Kindle Unlimited library include HarperCollins, Macmillan, and Penguin Random House. This means that you’ll find popular bestsellers alongside lesser-known gems that you might not have discovered otherwise.

One thing to keep in mind is that not all books are included in Kindle Unlimited. Some publishers choose not to participate in the program, which means that some of their titles won’t be available. However, with over a million titles to choose from, you’re sure to find plenty of great reads even if some of your favorites aren’t included.

Kindle Unlimited Cost and Free Trial of Kindle Unlimited:

Let’s talk about the cost of Kindle Unlimited.

As I mentioned earlier, the service requires a monthly fee.

At the time of writing this blog post, the cost is $9.99 per month. However, as an Amazon Prime member, you can get a discount on your Kindle Unlimited subscription.

Get a FREE Month of Kindle Unlimited

If you’re unsure whether Kindle Unlimited is right for you, you can take advantage of the 30-day free trial.

This lets you try out the service for a month before you commit to paying for it.

During the free trial, you’ll have access to the entire Kindle Unlimited library, so you can read as many books as you want without having to pay a dime.

Can I share Kindle Unlimited?

One of the great things about Kindle Unlimited is that you can share it with your family members. If you have an Amazon account and your family members have their own accounts linked to yours, they can access your Kindle Unlimited subscription as well.

How Can I Cancel Kindle Unlimited?

If you decide that Kindle Unlimited isn’t for you, you can cancel your subscription at any time. If you cancel during the free trial period, you won’t be charged anything. If you cancel after the free trial period, you’ll still have access to the service until the end of your billing cycle.

Is Kindle Unlimited worth it?

That’s a question that ultimately depends on your reading habits and preferences. If you’re someone who reads a lot and likes to explore different genres and authors, Kindle Unlimited can be a fantastic value, so yes, at times, and for some people, Kindle Unlimited is the best option! 

Kindle Unlimited vs. Prime Reading

While both Kindle Unlimited and Prime Reading offer access to a huge collection of books, they differ in some key ways.

Prime Reading is a feature included in the Amazon Prime subscription that provides access to a rotating selection of books, magazines, comics, and more.

On the other hand, Kindle Unlimited is a standalone subscription service that offers unlimited access to over one million books, audiobooks, and magazines.

Prime Reading allows Prime members to borrow up to 10 titles at a time, and there are no due dates, so subscribers can keep the books as long as they want. However, the selection is smaller than Kindle Unlimited, and not all books are available for free.

Get a FREE Month of Kindle Unlimited

With Kindle Unlimited, subscribers can read and listen to as many books as they want from the Kindle Unlimited library for a monthly fee of $9.99. This service offers access to a much larger selection of books, including bestsellers, literary fiction, thrillers, romance, and more. Plus, some books come with Audible narration, so you can switch between reading and listening seamlessly.

Overall, if you’re an avid reader and want access to a wider variety of books and access to books more often, Kindle Unlimited might be the better option for you.

But if you’re already an Amazon Prime member and only occasionally read books, Prime Reading would be a more cost-effective choice.

It’s your turn to sound off! What is your favorite way to get your eBooks?

But as you’ll see, the reality is a little bit different.

We’ll dig into the truth behind making money on the internet, and fast!

Are online surveys like this the right choice for you? Read here to find out.

Why Companies Pay for Surveys

Companies pay for surveys because they want to gather valuable insights and consumer feedback from their target audience.

By conducting surveys, companies can better understand their customers’ preferences, opinions, and behavior so customers’ opinions are something that they are happy to pay for!

This information can then be used to improve their products, services, and marketing strategies, ultimately leading to increased sales and customer loyalty.

By compensating people to take surveys online, companies can get more people to participate and provide the companies with more accurate and valuable data to better their products.

This is a great way for a company or retailer to get feedback without having to host people for a focus group or meetings.

How Do Online Surveys Work?

The process of signing up for and taking surveys on an online survey company can seem daunting. Thankfully, the process is pretty straightforward and usually follows the same steps:

• Choose a legitimate survey company:

  • I’ve listed my personal favorites below

• Create an account:

  • Once you have chosen a survey site, you will need to create an account, which includes basic personal information such as your name, email address, and demographic information.

• Complete your profile:

  • To maximize your chances of receiving surveys that you qualify for, be sure to complete your profile with as much information as possible, including your age, gender, education level, and employment status. This is really important to make sure you qualify for the surveys that you sign up for and eventually, the surveys that will be offered to you to complete.

• Look for surveys:

  • Once you have created an account and completed your profile, you can start looking for surveys to take. Survey companies will typically send you survey invitations via email, or you can log in to your account to see if there are any available surveys.

• Complete surveys:

  • When you receive a survey invitation, read the instructions carefully and complete the survey to the best of your ability. Some paid survey opportunities may be short and straightforward, while others may be longer and more complex. Usually, you are compensated based on the size and commitment of the survey.

• Earn rewards:

  • Once you have completed a survey, you will typically earn rewards such as points to redeem towards gift cards or even cash. Some survey sites may also offer other rewards or bonus points such as gift cards or prizes. Gift cards are usually offered to larger retailers like Amazon, Starbucks, Walmart, etc.

How Much You Can Make Taking Online Surveys?

The amount you can make by taking surveys online varies depending on several things, including the number of surveys you take, the length of the surveys, and the compensation offered by the survey site or company. Pay is usually $1-$10 per survey.

In general, taking online surveys is not a way to make a full-time income, but it can be a way to earn a little extra money in your spare time.

Most survey sites, in general pay anywhere from a few cents to a few dollars per survey, and some may offer other rewards such as gift cards, Paypal cash or prizes.

The amount you can earn per survey also depends on the complexity and length of the survey. Longer surveys that require more detailed responses usually pay more than shorter surveys.

If you’re looking for extra spending money working from home, or a small side hustle, this is a great option!

Spotting the Fake Survey Companies

There are several warning signs that can throw up a red flag that an online survey company isn’t legitimate.

Here are a few things to watch out for when you are wondering how to know fake survey companies.

1. High payment promises:

   If an online survey company promises high payouts for very little effort, it may be a scam. Legitimate survey sites typically offer modest compensation for completing surveys with a payout threshold that you should meet as well to get compensated. Doing online surveys will not replace the income of a full-time job.

2. Request for payment:

   If an online survey company asks you to pay a fee to sign up, to get your earnings, or to access surveys, it is likely a scam. Legitimate survey sites do not require payment to participate.

3. Personal information requests:

   If an online survey company requests too much personal information such as your social security number, bank account information, or credit card number, it is likely a scam. Legitimate survey sites will only ask for basic demographic information such as your age, gender, and location.

4. No contact information:

   If the branded surveys sites do not provide any contact information or customer support, it may be a scam. A legitimate paid survey site should have a way for you to contact them if you have any questions or concerns.

5. Poor website design:

   If the online survey sites company website looks unprofessional or have poor design, it may be a scam. Legitimate survey sites typically have well-designed websites with clear information about their services and compensation policy.

6. Unsolicited emails:

   If you receive unsolicited emails inviting you to take surveys from a market research companies you haven’t heard of, it may be a scam. Legitimate survey websites sites typically do not send unsolicited emails.

If something seems too good to be true, it probably is, but no fear, we are here to give you our top survey companies that are legit and pay well.

Top Online Survey Companies to Check Out

There are many online survey companies available, each with its own strengths and weaknesses.

Here are some of the top online survey companies and the best paid survey sites that are known for offering a variety of surveys and paying their members fairly:

1. Swagbucks:

Swagbucks is a popular survey site that offers a variety of surveys as well as other ways to earn rewards, such as watching videos, shopping online, and playing games.

2. Survey Junkie:

Survey Junkie is a well-known survey site that offers a variety of surveys on a wide range of topics. The site pays members in points, which can be redeemed for cash or gift cards.

3. Opinion Outpost:

Opinion Outpost is a survey site that pays members in cash for completing surveys, watching videos, and other activities. The site is known for offering higher-paying surveys than some other sites.

4. Toluna:

Toluna is a survey site that offers a variety of surveys as well as product testing opportunities. The site pays members in points, which can be redeemed for cash or gift cards.

5. Tippp:

Earning points by playing games is fun and straightforward. You have to reach certain levels, unlock hidden secrets or just beat the high score. Every time you complete a task, try an app or take a survey you get points for it to redeem for gift cards or cash.

6. YouGov:

YouGov is a survey site that offers surveys on current events, politics, and other topics. The site pays members in points, which can be redeemed for cash or gift cards.

OK, now it’s your turn to sound off! If you have done online surveys, what’s your favorite online survey company and why??

Let’s take a look at the best age for a Great Wolf Lodge visit, and what is available for each age group at the  to help you decide when is the best time for your family to hit up this resort!

Activities for Kids of All Ages at the Great Wolf Lodge Indoor Water Park

The great thing about Great Wolf Lodge is that there are activities and amenities catered to children of all ages. From toddlers to teens, there’s something fun and exciting available for every single age group.

While we think that the best age to enjoy Great Wolf Lodge is 7-13, we’ve had our kids at the Great Wolf Lodge water parks under 7 years old and over 13, so it’s all in the beholder’s eye.

We list the activities at Great Wolf Lodge locations below, and while all locations will vary, these are the most popular and most common activities.

For adults, there is plenty to do aside from watching the kids have fun! You can relax in any one of the pools and hot tubs or grab a bite to eat at one of their delicious restaurants.

Let’s break things down by age group to really explore all the fun there is to be had at Great Wolf Lodge!

See What Each Great Wolf Lodge Location Offers HERE

Top Activities for Toddlers at Great Wolf Lodge:

The activities are best for kids under 5 years old

1. Cub Paw Pool:

Picture a mini water wonderland crafted just for the little ones! The Lodge is a dream come true for families with tots since it has a special pool area where kiddos can splash around safely and have tons of fun.

Think shallow waters, cute slides, and magical water features that keep them entertained for hours. Sit back and soak in all the precious moments of them giggling and playing in this area.

Just pack goggles and you’ll be all set!

2.Great Wolf Stuffing Creation Station:

At the Stuffing Station, you and your little ones will get the chance to make your very own stuffed animals from scratch, making your visit to Great Wolf Lodge even more memorable.

Choose from an array of adorable creatures and watch as they’re stuffed, hugged, and loved before your eyes.

This unique, hands-on activity is perfect for families wanting to take home a tangible reminder of their water park adventure or simply seeking a creative break from the water fun.

No matter the reason, the Great Wolf Stuffing Station promises to hold a special place in your heart, just like your cuddly creations!

3. Seasonal Activities:

The Great Wolf Lodge seasonal activities such as Easter egg hunts, Halloween setups and more are so fun!

The water park is transformed into a truly unique and enchanting destination, one that caters to visitors of all ages and weaves unforgettable memories for families and friends to cherish!

It’s a fun time to visit when these events are happening.

4. Character Appearances:

You’ll be greeted by some lovable characters who are eager to make your day even more special.

Among these furry friends, you’ll meet Wiley the Wolf, the adventurous forest ranger; Violet the Wolf, a true nature lover; Oliver Raccoon, the smart and curious one; and many more!

To make sure you don’t miss a chance to meet these delightful characters, the park provides a schedule with designated times so you can plan your day around these magical encounters.

So, get ready to create unforgettable memories with these charming mascots while enjoying a super fun time at Great Wolf Lodge!

5. The Forest Friends Show:

Typically, the Forest Friends Show is performed several times a day, with specific times listed in the hotel’s daily schedule.

The show is located in the main lobby area of the hotel, which is an open area, perfect for you or the kids to move around.

The show will hold the kids attention, featuring animatronic animals, such as raccoons and bears, who sing and dance to a variety of catchy tunes.

Children are encouraged to participate in the show, making it a fun and interactive experience for the whole family – it’s super cute!

6. Read-aloud Story Times:

Great Wolf Lodge water parks are known for their water slides and pools, but they also offer Read-aloud Story Times.

These story times are perfect for families with young children who love books and storytelling.

During Read-aloud Story Times, a trained staff member reads a children’s book aloud to a group of children and their families. The readings take place in a cozy and comfortable space, usually near a fireplace, where families can sit back, relax, and enjoy the story together.

The stories that are read during these events are often related to themes that children can relate to, such as animals, nature, and adventure.

The staff members who lead the readings are skilled at engaging children’s imaginations and making the stories come alive. Our kids always loved the story time!

7. Great Wolf Lodge Cub Club:

Great Wolf Lodge water parks offer a special program called the Cub Club, designed specifically for young children. The Cub Club is a supervised play area where kids can engage in fun and educational activities while parents enjoy some time to themselves, however parents are welcome to stay as well!

The Cub Club is typically for children between the ages of 3 and 12, and is available at most Great Wolf Lodge locations.

Upon check-in, families can enroll their children in the program for an additional fee, and children receive a wristband that allows them access to the club.

I love that the Cub Club is divided into different age groups, with age-appropriate activities for each group.

For example, younger children may enjoy coloring, crafts, and interactive story time, while older children may engage in science experiments, games, and team-building activities.

One of the most popular features of the Cub Club is the Creation Station, where children can make their own stuffed animal souvenir to take home.

They can choose from a variety of animals, outfits and accessories, and staff members are on hand to help with the creation process.

In addition to the supervised activities, the Cub Club also has a play area with slides, climbing structures, and other equipment that kids can use to burn off energy and have fun.

Parents can feel confident leaving their children in the Cub Club, knowing that the staff members are trained and experienced in working with children.

You can also check in anytime, or call if you need to!

8. Dance Party:

One of the most popular events at Great Wolf Lodge is the “Dance Party,” which is held regularly at the resorts.

The Dance Party at Great Wolf Lodge is a high-energy event that is held in one of the main common areas of the resort.

The party typically takes place in the evening, and it features music, dancing, and a lot of fun for guests of all ages.

The Dance Party is led by the resort’s “ambassadors,” who are trained to lead the party and get everyone up and dancing.

During the Dance Party, guests can expect to hear a wide range of music, from popular songs to classic tunes.

The party is designed to be inclusive, so there is something for everyone to enjoy. The resort’s employees will often lead guests in fun dances and games, and sometimes they hand out glow sticks or other party favors.

We always thought this was super fun!

See the available Great Wolf Lodge Coupons HERE

What is there for Kids ages 4 and up to do at Great Wolf Lodge?

All of the activities in the list ablve are all great for these kiddos too, but the activities below are best suited for ages 4 and up:

1. Magiquest:

For the most creative and imaginative Great Wolf Lodge kiddos, the MagiQuest game is where it’s at!

MagiQuest is an interactive, role-playing game that is offered at Great Wolf Lodge resorts, especially popular among children between the ages of 5 and 12. Older kids and adults can also enjoy the game, especially if they are fans of fantasy and role-playing games, or just slipping into the make believe world for a little while. 

Once you have your wand, it’s yours to keep and you can begin the game by following a series of quests, which will lead you on a journey to defeat various creatures, gather magical artifacts, and ultimately save the kingdom, earning points and prizes. You get to decide how much time you want to spend in the realms of MagiQuest. Each quest takes 15 to 30 minutes to complete. With unlimited play during your stay, you can always take a break and come back later, which our kids love to do! 

If you want to start a new game, you will need to purchase a new wand, but wands are usually priced around $23.99. There are also add-on games at select hotels that you might be able to take advantage of too!

It’s a break from the water, and a nice game to play with a few kids that are with you, or even other hotel guests, too!

2. Hologate Virtual Reality:

Hologate Virtual Reality is a multi-player virtual reality experience that is offered at some of the Great Wolf Lodge resorts and is a great activity for families, groups of friends, or even solo players who want to compete against others.

The game involves donning a VR headset and entering a virtual world where players can explore, battle enemies, and complete challenges.

Hologate is a popular attraction among guests of all ages, especially those who are interested in gaming and technology.

Players do not win physical prizes when playing Hologate, but they can earn points and achievements within the game itself.

The experience of playing Hologate is usually reward enough, as the game is designed to be immersive and engaging, with high-quality graphics and sound effects.

In order to play Hologate, guests will need to purchase a ticket for the experience, which can be done at the Hologate counter in the resort. It is typically played in short sessions of a few minutes each, allowing for quick and easy gameplay that can be enjoyed throughout the day.

The ticket includes access to the VR headset and any necessary controllers or other equipment. Players do not need any special tools or skills to play Hologate, as the game is designed to be easy to learn and intuitive to use.

3. Ten Paw Alley:

Ten Paw Alley is an exciting and fun-filled indoor bowling alley that is available at some Great Wolf Lodge Resorts.

To play at Ten Paw Alley, guests are required to pay a fee, which may vary depending on the location of the Great Wolf Lodge resort and the time of day which is not included with either the Pup Pass or Wolf Pass.

You can typically expect to pay around $5 to $8 per game per person, with discounts available for multiple games or larger groups.

Ten Paw Alley features five traditional ten-pin bowling lanes that are scaled down in size to fit the smaller space inside of the resorts.

The lanes use lightweight bowling balls, smaller pins, and automated bumpers that can be raised or lowered to help younger children play.

The bowling alley is perfect for a change of pace!

4. Northern Lights Arcade:

Do your kids love arcades? If so, here’s a fun thing to do at Great Wolf Lodge when you need a break from the water!

Northern Lights Arcade is your run of the mill arcade including classic games like skee-ball and air hockey, as well as newer games like virtual reality experiences and interactive motion games.

The arcade also includes ticket redemption games, where guests can earn tickets by playing games and redeem them for prizes at the end of their visit.!

The arcade games aren’t included with either the Pup Pass or Wolf Pass and the cost of playing at the arcade may vary depending on the location of the Great Wolf Lodge resort, but I always paid $0.50 to $3 per game or activity.

And, the kids love the arcade!

Several other highlights that are perfect for the kids are:

• Mini Golf:

 Several Great Wolf Lodge Resorts offer mini golf courses for guests to enjoy. The courses typically feature 9 holes and are themed around the resort’s overall aesthetic. For example, at the Great Wolf Lodge in Grapevine, TX, the mini golf course is themed around a Texas oil field.

• Laser Tag:

 Many Great Wolf Lodge Resorts feature a laser tag arena where kids can compete in team-based laser tag games. The arenas are typically designed with a fun and exciting theme, such as a castle or outer space.

• Gem Mining:

 Some Great Wolf Lodge Resorts offer gem mining activities, where kids can purchase a bag of mining rough and sift through it to find gems and minerals. The experience is designed to be educational and interactive, and kids can take their finds home as a souvenir.

• Ropes Course:

 The “Fallen Timbers” ropes course is a challenging outdoor activity available at some Great Wolf Lodge Resorts. The course features a series of obstacles and high ropes elements that challenge participants to navigate and balance while suspended in the air. The course is designed for guests over 48 inches tall and typically requires a separate fee.

Check out the Nearest Location to You HERE!

And, last, but not least, with an adult for the younger kids in this age group, inside the indoor waterpark enjoy the wave pool, lazy rivers, outdoor pool areas, the frog pond (outfitted with ropes to hang from, lilypads to try to stay on, and basketball hoops to shoot on!) and of course water slides upon water slides!

Teens and Tween Activities at Great Wolf Lodge:

These activities are for the kiddos age 10 and over:

In addition to everything mentioned above, there are several water slides like the Howlin’ Tornado that are perfect for the older kids and take some courage to go in to.

These are perfect for the teens, tweens, and dare I say adults that are more daring (than I!)

Adult Activities at Great Wolf Lodge:

Along with just being a kid yourself and enjoying watching your kids have fun at the water park, you can relax in any one of the pools and hot tubs or grab a bite to eat at one of their delicious restaurants with different dining options and food including: pizza, sandwiches and fries, burgers, chicken offerings and more.

Your kids won’t be the only ones that will want to enjoy the ice cream, candy and bear paw sweets that different Great Wolf Lodge resorts have to offer.

I also need to mention that most locations also have a Dunkin’ Donuts on site. (Yay to help with those who still have early risers!)

Let’s just say: come hungry!

You will run out of time to do all of the things you want to!

I hope this article helps put your mind at ease while booking your Great Wolf Lodge vacation, and don’t forget to check out the website for the exact location that you’re planning on visiting here so that you can see a map of the hotel. If you are a visual learner, like I am, this will help a ton!

See What Each Great Wolf Lodge Location Offers HERE

Since Amazon presents both services, the glaring question becomes: What’s the distinction between the two reading options?

This Amazon Prime Reading vs Kindle Unlimited comparison will make that clear.

Want to get Free Kindle books on Kindle readers? How about finding free Kindle books for avid readers? Or, how do you go about getting free Kindle books on Amazon Prime? eBook reading programs are becoming more popular. You just have to know how to find the best one for you and how to take advantage of them. Which one is better for you? We are looking at Kindle Unlimited vs Prime Reading.

What is Kindle Unlimited vs. Prime Reading?

Prime Reading and Kindle Unlimited both provide a vast library of e-books, digital magazines, comics, and even audiobooks.

However, Prime Reading is exclusive to Amazon Prime members as an Amazon Prime benefit, while Kindle Unlimited is available to everyone.

Prime members get access to magazines, books and other content at no additional cost through their Prime membership.

Kindle Unlimited offers its members more than the limited amount of content that Prime Reading gives with over one million titles for a small monthly subscription fee, and you can even get a free or discounted Kindle membership here!

In comparison, Prime Reading has some significant benefits, such as exclusive prime-only titles.

For those who don’t read enough books, it’s hard to justify investing in a Kindle Unlimited membership.

So here we break down each option:

Top Benefits of Kindle Unlimited:

1. Hundreds of thousands of titles to choose from, giving readers access to a digital library of books.
2. No due dates, no holds, unlimited simultaneous accessing and free audiobooks
3. Textbooks available for rent
4. Free access to Amazon Audible Originals
5. Get exclusive book discounts and early access perks
6. Prime Reading access
7. Personalized recommendations based on the books you’ve read in the past
8. Cancel anytime at no cost
9. Access Kindle editions through apps on your apple or android device or PC computer via a web browser
10. Easy sharing with family or friends
11. Listen hands-free with Amazon Alexa integration and narration
12. Borrow up to ten books at once through a single account

Top Benefits of Prime Reading:

1. Included as a bonus with an Amazon Prime membership (along with Prime Video, Prime Music, select movies, Prime only tv shows and more) Get a free trial of Amazon Prime here.
2. Access to thousands of books, magazines and comics to read at no additional cost
3. Opportunity to explore new genres, discover favorite authors and even catch up on popular magazines
4. Access a wide selection of digital content instantly without ever leaving home
5. Save money by not needing to purchase additional magazine subscriptions or buy individual books from Amazon’s vast digital library
6. Access titles from Kindle Devices such as Kindles and smartphone devices enabled with the Kindle app
7. Customers can search for specific titles using Amazon’s search engine instead of manually going through bookstore after bookstore in an attempt to find what you’re looking for
8. Reducing the time spent searching for particular reads
9. Unlimited access to the books offered in Prime Reading

Key Takeaways:

• Kindle Unlimited offers a much larger selection of Kindle books than Amazon Prime Reading does
• Every Amazon Prime member gets free access to Prime Reading, whereas a Kindle Unlimited subscription costs $9.99 per month
• You can access both Prime Reading and Kindle Unlimited with Kindle e-readers or through the Kindle app available on most devices
• If you’re an occasional reader looking for the latest bestsellers or magazines, then Prime Reading may be the right option
• If you lean more towards expansive libraries of books, magazines and audiobooks, then Kindle Unlimited might be more suitable

Kindle Unlimited vs. Prime Reading

As you can see from the comparisons above, Kindle Unlimited offers a much larger selection of Kindle books in the Kindle store than Amazon Prime Reading does, but weighing the price per month is the proper task at hand.

Your ultimate decision will depend on the type of reader you are, and the books you like to read. If Prime Reading doesn’t have what you like, then for the price of just one Kindle book, you can have unlimited Kindle books with a Kindle Unlimited membership.

Get a free month of Kindle Unlimited here to try it out!

Is Prime reading the same as Kindle Unlimited?

In my honest opinion, Prime Reading is for more of a light reader, someone who picks up a magazine or a book here and there, but Prime Reading is probably to intermediate for someone who views reading as a hobby per se.

Are all Prime Reading Books in Kindle Unlimited?

Yes, all Prime Reading books and ebooks are in Kindle Unlimited, but not all Kindle Unlimited books are in Prime Reading. You can see the Prime Reading books that are available here.

Get a Free Trial of Prime Reading with a FREE 30 Day Amazon Prime Membership

Is Amazon Unlimited Reading Free with Prime?

No, Amazon unlimited reading (officially named Kindle Unlimited) is not included with your Amazon Prime membership, only the limited version of Prime Reading is included with an Amazon Prime membership.

How much is Kindle Unlimited if you have Amazon Prime?

Kindle Unlimited’s price is around $9.99 per month (get a free trial here) on top of an Amazon Prime membership price.

Are books free with Kindle Unlimited?

Yes, eBooks that you borrow from the Kindle library are free with your Kindle Unlimited membership.

How many books are free with Prime reading?

Prime members can download one free book each month from a selection of six editors’ picks. They announce new titles at the start of each month.

Want to get started with getting your own free samples in the mail? This is my most updated list of free samples to request (many of which include free shipping!)

Everything to Know About Getting Free Samples in the Mail

There’s nothing more awesome than getting surprises in the mail, is there?! I love it when my mail is a little heavier than normal because it’s filled with free samples (rather than bills, right?!).

How do I get free samples in the mail?

There is free stuff everywhere you look (seriously!) A big part of getting free samples is keeping your eyes wide open and your ears as well.

I am going to list out my favorite places to request free samples, but that’s my first tip. Look for free product coupons at the grocery store — a lot of times they’re even on the products themselves.

My second tip is to listen to commercials and you’ll hear about free samples or a high value coupon on a website.

And, the last super simple tip for getting freebies that I have is to check your email. So many times companies email out one time use coupons, or coupon codes to try their newest products. It’s a great way to try the newest things from your favorite brands.

Top places to get free samples in the mail:

Two FREE Yankee Candles: 

Head here to sign up to get two free Yankee Candles. You’ll need to submit a review of your candles, but this is a great way to get started with mystery shopping and how mystery shopping works, too!

PinchMe will send full boxes of free stuff when you sign up for an account and qualify for a box. Head here to learn more.

What do I do when I get extra free samples by mail?

I love using my free samples by mail in guest bathrooms! Another great way to use free samples is when you travel. When we stay the night anywhere where shampoo, soap and other toiletries aren’t provided, those kinds of freebies come in really handy!

And, it goes without mentioning that I also love getting free grocery samples by mail, too. This is a great way to try out new products!

Are there free samples – no surveys, no catch by mail?

These are my favorite companies that offer free samples (but please note that you’ll have to answer a few questions):

• Toluna: An online survey company that also offers PAID Product Trials, making you spend less in the stores, and essentially help you make money from home and save money. That means you can get free products AND get paid to review them by answering surveys about the products.
• Product Testing USA:  Product Testing allows you to test a variety of all the latest tech, gadgets, fashion accessories and more. It even gives you the opportunity to mystery shop some amazing stores and fantastic restaurants all across the US. All users need to do is write a simple review in exchange for keeping their chosen product for free!

What if I’d Rather Make Money Online than Get Free Samples by Mail?

Well, in that case, you’re really in luck! There are SEVERAL companies that are willing to pay you real money for your opinion! Companies want your feedback, and they want to know what helps make your purchasing decisions. So, in turn, they’re willing to give you money for your opinion.

There are several legit companies that I recommend signing up with if you’re looking to be compensated for your time online.

Here are the best ones:

• National Consumer Panel: Join National Consumer Panel to earn valuable points, which are redeemable for electronics, household items, jewelry, toy, gift cards, and more.
  • There is no landline required with this homescan signup – YAY!
  • Once you become a NCP panel member all you have to do is scan and send your household purchase information to the company digitally with a handheld scanner that they provide.
  • For each week of the month that NCP receives your purchase information, you will earn one entry into the Monthly Sweepstakes where you can win a $500 American Express Rewards Card.
  • That’s up to FOUR entries every month! Every month, 25 panel members win!
  • That’s not all… Every quarter an additional 40 panel members win a $500 American Express Rewards card just by sending purchase information in every week of a month.
• Opinion Outpost:
  • This online company conducts surveys because businesses, governments, public bodies, and similar organizations are interested in the views and attitudes of the people who use their products and services.
  • The more they know about what customers and citizens think, the easier it is for them to improve and adapt what they supply.
  • Rewards include cash, Amazon gift cards, game points, donations to your favorite charities, and more. Everyone is also automatically entered to win a $10,000 sweepstakes by joining and taking surveys.
• Pinecone Research: This company pays members to do surveys and share their opinions of brands and new products.
  • Pinecone Research has an A+ rating with the BBB – Better Business Bureau and is rated #2 on Survey Police, making it a surefire favorite of survey companies.

Is there such a thing as getting free baby samples in the mail?

You can definitely get free baby samples in the mail!  There are more free baby samples and baby companies that offer freebies as well.

Here are some of my favorites:

• Free Pack n’ Cool from Enfamil here
• Similac StrongMoms: Receive over $300 in free stuff. Last I checked, you’ll also get a free Shutterfly Pregnancy Photo Book valued at over $30!

More ways to get free samples by mail:

• Free Stuff by Mail (Over $100 worth!)

Get Trendy Boots for only $10!

Head over here to JustFab where they are offering your first item, a pair of boots, sandals or shoes for as low as just $10!

After you take a quick style quiz survey, you’ll be able to choose from hundreds of styles of shoes for next to nothing prices.

This is your chance to try a pair of Just Fab women’s boots, women’s shoes or Just Fab sandals for next to nothing!

I just LOVE a good deal on a wardrobe update for cheap!

You can decide to stay a VIP Member of Just Fab Shoes and receive a $39.95 credit to your account each month, choose a new pair of shoes each month, or skip each month altogether.

The best part is that all charges become a member credit that you can redeem any time, or shop or skip by the 5th of each month to avoid a $39.95 charge.

Are Just Fab Shoes Good?

I have loved every single pair of Just Fab shoes that I’ve received. And to get $10 boots? That is just plain awesome!

Some of the boots are $11-$15 after your first member credit, but these prices still cannot be beat! 

How to Skip a Month on JustFab:

If you decide to keep your membership, you’ll simply visit your Just Fab online boutique between the 1st and the 5th of each month to shop for your new selections. And, if you are not ready to make your purchase, simply log into your account and press the “Skip The Month” button by the 5th and you will not be charged.

If no action is taken between the 1st and the 5th of each month, they will charge your credit card $49.95 on the 6th (for a member credit) until you cancel.

You can redeem each credit towards another JustFab item, so you can use it to shop later!

Or, if you decide after getting your first pair of shoes, jeans or new faux suede/leather booties that this just isn’t for you, you may cancel your VIP membership by calling 1-866-337-0906 (open 24/7).

Is JustFab Really $10?

Yes, JustFab is really $10, but only on your first checkout.

From there you’ll decide if you want to keep the monthly subscription for yourself, or not. If you keep the subscription you’ll pay $49.95 a month and can use that credit anytime towards anything on the website. Or skip the month and pay nothing.

JustFab has so many categories to shop from including:

• Activewear
• Denim
• Dresses
• Intimates
• Jumpsuits & Rompers
• Loungewear
• Slippers
• Outerwear
• Pants
• Shorts
• Skirts
• Sweaters
• Tops
  … and so much more!

Just look at the options that they offer for picking the right boots for example:

• Cold Weather & Rain Boots
• Flat Boots/Flat Soles
• Over-The-Knee Boots
• Heeled Boots
• Combat Boots
• Cowboy & Western Boots
• Riding Boots
• Fuzzies
• Dress Boots
• Lug Sole Boots
• Lace-Up Boots
• Black Boots
• White Boots
• Wide Calf Boots
• Extra Wide Calf Boots
• Extra Wide Width Booties
  … and more!

Can you cancel JustFab membership?

You can 100% cancel your JustFab Membership by simply calling the VIP membership line.

Can you cancel JustFab VIP after first order?

You can absolutely cancel Just Fab after your first order. Maybe you only wanted a new pair of boots for October, November, or just a couple new boots for the winter months.

That is fine!

You may cancel your VIP membership by calling 1-866-337-0906 (open 24/7). They will likely try and retain you because of the great special deals that they offer, but just be strong and confirm that you’d like to cancel.

Does JustFab have free returns?

Yes! Just Fab offers a free shipping pre-paid return label for returns or exchanges within 60 days from the date of shipment and in new, unused condition with original packaging if you are not happy with your purchase. Final sale items, however might be excluded from returns – make sure to read the promotion disclaimers for each item individually.

To get your free return started, head to My Account Order History and click on the return link on the order details and to request a return label.

JustFab offers 3 easy return options: (1) return for JustFab membership or store credit for free ; (2) exchange for another item for free; (3) return for a refund.

What is JustFab return policy?

Just Fab offers a pre-paid return label for returns or exchanges within 60 days from the date of shipment and in new, unused condition with original packaging if you are not happy with your purchase.

They recommend trying on shoes on a carpeted surface to prevent scuffs and scratches.

Handbags, jewelry and accessories must be returned with all pieces included and intact, and earrings unworn.

Apparel must also be returned unworn, with all tags still attached.

Can you use JustFab credits on ShoeDazzle?

Unfortunately JustFab and ShoeDazzle are operated as separate companies and the credits are not interchangeable on eachothers websites.

How do I spend my JustFab credit?

At JustFab you can use your $49.95 member credit on anything towards your next order of $49.95 or more!

Have your eye on a Michael Kors purse? You’re going to want to check this sale with rock bottom Michael Kors purses at LOW prices!

A few awesome deals I spotted while peeking around the Macy’s Michael Kors purses sale:

• Michael Kors Small Crossbody
• Michael Kors Julia Medium Messenger
• Michael Kors Mae Large East West Drawstring Tote

Shipping is free on orders over $49, which will include most everything included in this Michael Kors purse sale.

Where can I find more Michael Kors purses on sale?

Although the Macy’s Michael Kors purse prices are some of the best when they get marked down. there are other places that you can find some awesome Michael Kors purses on sale.

My favorite places to look for MK purses on sale include:

The Michael Kors Outlet (plus, sign up for the Michael Kors free VIP Club and get 10% off your first purchase!)

Dillards – there are some really nice prices in this Michael Kors purse sale!

Belk – I am loving the sale prices on Michael Kors purses here!

While the Upside app has been around since 2016, it has rebranded a few times and it really seems to be making a huge marketing push, and for good reason! 

Today I am reviewing the Upside app (formerly known as the Get Upside app) to let you know what it takes to use the app, how to earn cash back and everything else that you will want to know about easy way to earn money online.

Get Upside App Review | Upside App Review

The Upside app was originally called Get Upside app, so I will use the names interchangablly in this article, but know that both names talk about one app, now call the Upside app.

In a nutshell, here is why you should use the Upside app:

○ It’s easy to use
○ It’s real cash
○ It really adds up — cents turn into dollars! 

Sign me up for the FREE Upside App to start earning cash back on gas! 

Everything You Need To Know About the Upside Cash Back App

Step 1: Download the App

In order to start using the Upside app (formerly known as the getupsideapp) head here to the Apple app store, or here to the Google play store to initiate the app download.

Once you’ve started the app download process, be ready to create an account. You can make a username and password, or you can simply sign in using Facebook, which is usually the easiest.

Step 2: Find Participating Businesses in Your Area

Once you have the app downloaded onto your mobile device, you’re ready to start getting rewarded right away.

You will immediately be able to find offers that are available near you. You can zoom out or zoom in and move around the area as well to find the nearest offers.

You’ll see right away that the getupside app offers gas station perks, and every once in awhile there will be an additional perk.

For example, I usually see anywhere from 2 cents per gallon rewards, but every now and then I’ll see an offer for 25 cents back per gallon. That’s a great way to save on gas!

Step 3: Claim an Offer

When you are ready to claim an offer head to your Upside app on your phone and press on the gas station (or restaurant) that you’re at.

Press the button on the bottom of the page that says “claim offer”

Step 4: Complete Your Claimed Deal

To complete your claimed deal, you will have a set amount of time, usually 4 hours to upload and attach a receipt.

Make sure that you get a paper receipt or you will not be able to claim the offer!

Step 5: Upload the Receipt or Check In

Once you upload your receipt inside of the Upside app your work is done!

Just sit back and wait for your email saying that you’ve received your reward.

Step 6: Cash Out!

Once you have $15 of rewards in your Upside app you are eligible to cash out.

When you are ready to cash out you’ll have the opportunity to deposit the free money into Paypal, or your choice of several different restaurants.

This is my most recent cashback payout from Upside below, I went boring with Paypal (ha!)

Also, there was no transfer fee, either (bonus!)

Sign me up for the FREE Upside App to start earning cash back on gas! 

Frequently asked questions about the Upside app:

What is the catch with Upside app?

There are no catches to the Upside app – it is literally a gas app that pays you back when you get gas at participating gas stations.

What is Upside app?

This amazing app is a gas and money saving app that pays you back, offering you the cash via discounts at grocery stores, restaurants and more big brands – simple as that. As long as you remember to check into the gas station and upload your receipt, you will get free money when you buy gas.

How does Upside app work?

Claim your offer at the gas station: Upload a photo of your receipt after you buy gas – it’s as easy as that!

Once you’ve met a certain amount you can cash out for a gift card to use towards your purchase of groceries, coffee, or just send the money straight to your bank account via Paypal. 

Is get Upside app legit?

The Getupside app is legit and I personally use it!

How does Upside app make money?

The Upside app makes money after its partners have made money.

Once the partners have proven to be successful at being a part of the Upside app, the app will make a commission split from the earnings.

Is the Upside app free for me to use? 

You do not pay to use the Upside app. This money-saving app is 100% free for you to use! 

What stores can I use this app at? 

Upside users can use the Upside iOs or android app to claim offers at fast food joints like Burger King or Dunkin’, Exxon, Circle K, Caseys, Mobil, bp amoco, conoco gas stations, several local businesses and more! 

Join the FREE Upside App to start earning cash back on gas! 

This review is all about the Babebox, a beauty subscription box!

Babebox is a makeup subscription box for serious fans of makeup and trying new products.

Each box contains 4-6 high quality full size, travel size and sample size exclusive and limited edition beauty products in several categories, including skincare, bath and body, hair care, makeup, facial masks and beauty accessories.

And, right now and while this deal lasts, Babebox is offering your first month free! That means for your first Babebox you’ll only be paying to ship the first order – just $6.95! 

Examples of what can be in a box of Babebox products: 

• Lipstick
• Eyeliner
• Eye shadow
• Blush
• Skincare products
• Everything is cruelty-free, as well!

You’ll receive over $100 worth of products for only the price of shipping – and if you were to make the purchases separately on your own, you’d pay a lot more! 

Head here to get your FIRST Babebox!

How to get the best price on shipping on your Babebox subscription boxes:

Shipping is free worldwide for any of the pre-paid plans.

If you decide to go month-to-month, shipping prices are $6.95 to the US and $7.95 for anywhere else in the world.

How to cancel your Babebox subscription:

You can cancel your subscription very easily. Just log into your account to cancel or shoot an email to su*****@***********cs.com for assistance.

First Box Free Promotion subscribers may cancel penalty-free after their second month.

Free Box Promotion cancellations requested prior to the second month will be charged $29 for the first box.

Reach out to ba*****@***********cs.com if you have any questions.

Knowing how to get free stuff online was a such a God-send during these times, and it was so much easier than I ever realized!

So today, I want to share how to get free stuff online with you.

Taking surveys for free stuff sometimes gets a bad rap, but I think that’s only because people don’t understand the process, or they have worked with less-than-honest companies in the past. However, the companies I’m sharing below are ones that I have tried myself and know to be true and honest.

They are seriously one of the best ways to get free stuff online, so  go ahead, check them out and give them a shot!

How to Get Free Stuff Online By Doing Surveys & Giving Your Opinion!

Did you know that you can actually get free stuff online just by giving your opinion? There are numerous companies that are willing to pay you and/or give you free products just for giving your two cents.

How do I know how to get free stuff online without paying?

Well, for starters, all of the survey companies that I have listed below are legit and I have worked with them to take surveys to get free stuff in the past.

You will not pay to be a part of any of these survey companies. So, if it feels too good to be true, and it’s not on this list, it probably is?

Feel free to shoot me an email and I’d love to look into any new opportunities that you find to see if they’re legit though. I’m happy to help!

Can I get free online stuff {really?!}

You sure can get free things online. I have received more full size makeup products than I care to admit over the years. And, once you feel like you have the gist of getting free stuff online by doing surveys, you might even decide to take on the next step of sharing your love of getting free stuff online by starting a blog (hey, crazier things have happened!)

I’ve listed below the TOP 10 companies that will compensate you for your opinion.

** Please note: You *may be able to apply for all of these if they are still accepting applicants. Good luck!

Ten Survey Companies Where You Can Get Free Stuff Online:

1. Toluna

Influence tomorrow’s products by joining Toluna, participate in online surveys and get rewarded with PayPal, Amazon & Tango e-vouchers.

Register for free in just 2 minutes and receive 500 bonus points ($5) as a welcome gift from us!

FREE! Earn $5 when you join Toluna Surveys!

2. Paid Surveys.io 

• 1. Registering for an account, confirm the confirmation email they send
• 2. Complete surveys and offers or simply watch videos in your spare time
• 3. Earn points for every activity you complete and redeem for rewards from stores including Amazon and Paypal

Earn Free Money with Paid Surveys.io

3. YouGov Survey Company

• 1. Join millions of others in sharing your opinion on politics, sport, entertainment and more to earn money and shape the news
• 2. Get cash for taking surveys
• 3. You’ll earn points every time you answer a survey – the longer the survey, the more points you’ll earn 

Earn Free Money with YouGov

4. Branded Surveys

• 1. Tell them about yourself and answer a few basic questions so they can match you with surveys!
• 2. Earn points for sharing your opinion and help shape tomorrow’s products and services.
• 3. Redeem your points for cash or over 100 gift card option including Amazon, Target, Paypal and more.

Earn Free Money Branded Surveys

5. Focus Group by Schlesinger

You will be asked for some basic information and will be able to create your own personal login and password.

Once your profile is complete, we can begin matching your lifestyle, and interests, to one of the thousands of research studies we conduct each year.

When we find a study that fits your profile we will contact you either by email or phone, to see if you qualify.

You will receive an incentive in the form of reward points or Visa debit cards for participating in any online or in-person studies within 4-6 weeks!

Try this Focus Group HERE

6. Survey Junkie

Survey Junkie is one of the most popular survey sites, and for sure one to join if you want to earn extra money online! 

Have more questions? See my Survey Junkie review.

Earn FREE Money with Survey Junkie HERE

7. Clearvoice Surveys

Get Paid To Take Surveys and Share Your Opinions about the products and services you use every day.

Try Clearvoice Surveys HERE

8. Nielsen Research

By participating in Nielsen research, you can improve products and services you use online today. Nielsen Computer and Mobile Panel combines your device usage with people like you to build a picture of consumer behavior.

By using your devices as you do every day, we invite you to make a difference – and you earn rewards while doing so!

Easy money! 

See what it Takes to Join Nielsen Research Company HERE

9. Survey Club

Survey Club offers focus groups, clinical trials, and survey opportunities via your email or via text message. Access hundreds of local research facilities and opportunities in your city.

Better yet, it’s Free to join, and there are no registration fees ever.

You’ll earn cash, sweepstakes, and prizes for your participation.

Try Survey Club HERE

10. Survey Table

The Survey Table rewards program grows every day, all depending on what our members most want to earn. To make the most of your opinions, you’ll first take a Personality Survey.

It’s how they target the surveys to your needs and interests.

The virtual debit cards ($10 and up) currently up for grabs: Amazon.com, Banana Republic, Barnes and Noble, GAP Brands, Regal Theaters and more.

Try Survey Table HERE

See more freebies here! And, see all of the online deals here.

To help you find the best gift for a trucker, or if you’re simply looking for gifts for long-distance drivers or a gift for a truck driver husband, we’ve put together a list of our top 10 favorite trucker gifts.

Top 13 Best Gifts for Truck Drivers

If you have a truck driver to buy for, you know how hard they work, and the long hours that they put in. Gifts that are perfect for an over-the-road truck driver are gifts that have high durability, create comfort since they’re away from home so much and ease the fatigue of driving such long periods.

1. Books

It is always nice to read for pleasure, so why not give the gift of books? This can come in handy when they are on an extended haul and have downtime after getting dropped off by another driver at the customer’s location.

Or if they are on a short-haul, they can use their downtime to read. Just make sure you get the books that have the same genre of movies or music they are into, so it is easy for them to find what they want to read next.

Gift Ideas for Truck Drivers TIP: A fantastic way for truck drivers to read books is to listen to them while they drive!

Audiobooks

Get started with a 30-day free trial of audiobooks from the company appropriately named Audiobooks here and your truck driver will get their first 3 audiobooks on the company!

Access a premium library of over 250,000 books, plus 10,000+ free audiobooks and access to 100+ million podcast episodes.

Audible

Truck drivers can get also get a FREE 30 day subscription to Audible, Amazon’s “Books on tape” program here.

Then, you can always buy your favorite truck driver Amazon gift cards to buy books to play on their Audible account.

Audible is really simple to use. Read all about it here.

Sirius XM

2. Snacks

Hungry drivers need something to munch on when they aren’t sleeping in their truck at a truck stop or on the road. They could eat the snacks you give them over a period of days, so it’s nice to have some variety instead of having all their snacks from one box run out at once. The best gifts for truck drivers are things that can be drawn out for a length of time.

If they enjoy nuts, there are many kinds you can get from peanuts to almonds and cashews that will last a long while.

And, those of us that are looking for good gifts for truckers, there are several companies that send snack boxes to recipients, so if you aren’t up for putting a snack box together, you can just have one sent!

SnackNation

SnackNation allows your favorite truck driver to indulge in tasty chips, nutrition bars, savory jerkies, better-for-you sweets, nuts and more! It’s the perfect snack box size for truck drivers, meetings, gifts, celebrations, birthdays, holidays, care packages and more.

Plus SnackNation provides an exclusive curation of premium snacks that you can’t find anywhere else AND they’ll donate one meal to a family in need for every box you receive.

Carnivore Club

The Carnivore Club subscription offers 4 to 6 handcrafted cured types of meat (total 20 to 32 oz) from new artisans each month with free shipping. As a bonus for truck drivers that are on the road, all meats are cured and sealed so they’re shelf stable and don’t require refrigeration or ice-packs during transit.

Buffalo Bills Jerky Subscription Box

This one-time (or monthly if you decide) box will always contain 10 meat snack items. They’ll include a mix of a jerky, sticks, and other select meat snacks made with an assortment of meats including beef, ham, turkey, venison, elk, and wild boar. Each month varies – how fun!

3. Magazines

This is a great gift idea for truck drivers because there are tons of different types and genres to choose from.

From business magazines like Forbes and Entrepreneur to Popular Mechanics and Sports Illustrated they will have something interesting to read during their downtime on the road. If they enjoy cooking, why not get them a magazine that features recipes? Or if they enjoy cars, you could give them a car-related magazine.

Discount Mags – This is the BEST website for getting cheap magazine subscriptions.

Digital Magazine Subscriptions here.

4. Travel mugs or water bottles

Truck drivers are always on the move, so it is nice to have water bottles or other drinks to make sure they stay hydrated. personalized truck driver gifts are also super fun and these are simple to have personalized.

If you can get a bottle or mug with their company logo on it, it makes an excellent promotional gift for them to advertise your brand when they go out of town and spend time in different places. This is a great way for your company to get more recognition in the area.

Personalized Coffee Mugs

Personalized Water Bottles

Personalized Coffee or Tea Tumblers

5. Movies

For example, if they are a fan of action movies, they could watch “Die Hard” or “Terminator 2”. For comedies, you could give them “Back to the Future” or “The Blues Brothers”. If they have kids, you could get them a movie that their kids would enjoy too. This is a great gift idea because the trucker will watch it in their downtime while they are driving or when they get home. (No more having to pay late fees at the video store!)

Amazon Prime offers Unlimited instant streaming of thousands of movies and TV shows, and as a bonus, he’ll get FREE Two-Day Shipping on millions of items

Plus, there’s unlimited, ad-free streaming of over a million songs, as well as several more Prime benefits.

6. Travel pillow

Getting comfortable enough to sleep while sitting straight up in the driver’s seat of a truck can be difficult, but if you get them a travel pillow they will have something soft to lean against which will make it easier for them to fall asleep.

Some pillows are better at blocking out sound while others are better at holding their head up without hurting their neck.

• A nice mattress is also a nice gift idea as sleeping in a truck obviously isn’t the desired setup
• A seat cushion that’s meant for long periods of sitting is another idea – once that’s super padded and good for easing discomfort and limiting the back pain

7. Emergency kit

You never know when an emergency is going to happen, so it is always a good idea to have something to keep the driver safe in case of an accident.

In this emergency kit you could include things like flashlights, road flares and tools like screwdrivers, scissors, pliers and wrenches. This will help when the driver is out on the road and in need of something they don’t normally keep in their truck like jumper cables or an extra tire iron.

Speaking of emergencies, a nice first aid kit is always a nice idea as well.

8. Portable car jump starter

This would make a great gift for someone who enjoys working on cars when they aren’t at work, but it can also be useful for truckers who are on the road.

When they suddenly notice their battery is dying, they could use this jump starter to give it a boost and get back to where they need to be safely. This way they don’t have to worry about being stuck out in the middle of nowhere!

• Headlamps are also a thoughtful gift idea – in case they’re stuck out in the dark jumping the truck, or doing other work on the car
• Sunglasses – If it’s not dark, it’s a good chance the driver will want some nice sunglasses to see while he’s driving, or working on the truck

9. Charge up portable power bank

This would make another great gift idea if the trucker you are shopping for enjoys using their mobile devices all day and doesn’t like to worry about running out of power. This portable battery pack will charge up their devices when they aren’t near an outlet and make sure they can use them when needed most.

10. Flip flops or slippers

If possible, we recommend getting your trucker something they can use inside of their cab.

Many drivers complain about the cold in the winter and how uncomfortable it is to sit with no shoes or socks on, so why not get them some nice warm slippers or flip flops for when they are driving around in the winter time?

11. Toiletries

You never know when a truck driver is going to need a few supplies, so it is always good to have something small tucked away just in case.

In their bathroom storage box you could include things like tissue paper, mouthwash and travel sized shampoo bottles for when they arrive at a rest stop and feel like freshening up.

12. Electronics

No matter how often they drive around, most truck drivers can always benefit from having a new GPS device that will help them get to their destination faster and more accurately. These models all have fantastic ratings!

• Bluetooth Headset
• Laptops
• Working cell phone

13. Games

Some classic games can be timeless and they can enjoy no matter what generation you come from. If they like card games, why not get them a deck of cards?

Or if they enjoy board games, you could get them a popular classic such as Monopoly or Clue. This is perfect for those down times when the drivers are just sitting around at a truck stop waiting for their next load or delivery.

Top single player games

Anything we missed? I’d love to know if you’ve got a good idea for awesome Christmas gifts for truck drivers, too!